User’s Guide [Network Administrator]

Table of contents
1 Introduction
1.1 Welcome .......................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.1 User's guides ..................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.2 User's Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2 Conventions used in this manual .................................................................................................. 1-4
1.2.1 Symbols used in this manual. ............................................................................................................ 1-4
To use this machine safely................................................................................................................. 1-4
Procedural instruction........................................................................................................................ 1-4
Key symbols....................................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.2 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-5
Original and paper sizes .................................................................................................................... 1-5
Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-5
1.3 Display modes of PageScope Web Connection........................................................................... 1-6
1.3.1 "Tab Function Display" ...................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.3.2 "List Function Display"....................................................................................................................... 1-6
Main Menu ......................................................................................................................................... 1-7

2 Setting Items for each Procedure

2.1 Procedure list .................................................................................................................................. 2-2
2.1.1 Connecting to network....................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.2 Using PageScope Web Connection .................................................................................................. 2-2
2.1.3 Scanning ............................................................................................................................................ 2-2
2.1.4 Printing............................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.5 Sending and receiving network faxes ................................................................................................ 2-3
2.1.6 Using User Authentication ................................................................................................................. 2-3
2.1.7 Cooperating with applications ........................................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.8 Reinforcing security ........................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.9 Managing ........................................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.1.10 Registering ......................................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.1.11 Configuring User Box settings ........................................................................................................... 2-5
2.1.12 Configuring print settings................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.1.13 Configuring fax settings ..................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.2 Basic settings for TCP/IP communication ................................................................................... 2-6
TCP/IP Settings.................................................................................................................................. 2-6
Device Setting.................................................................................................................................... 2-7
2.3 Using PageScope Web Connection .............................................................................................. 2-8
2.3.1 TCP/IP Settings.................................................................................................................................. 2-8
2.3.2 PSWC Settings .................................................................................................................................. 2-8
2.3.3 TCP Socket Settings.......................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.3.4 Device Certificate Setting .................................................................................................................. 2-9
2.4 Logging in to the administrator mode ........................................................................................ 2-10
2.5 Using Popup Help ......................................................................................................................... 2-12
Help Display Setting......................................................................................................................... 2-12
Popup Help Display Example .......................................................................................................... 2-12
2.6 Configuring Settings for each Purpose via Wizard.................................................................... 2-13
2.6.1 Screen Components ........................................................................................................................ 2-13
2.6.2 Setting for each purpose ................................................................................................................. 2-14
2.7 Registering the certificate of this machine for SSL communications ..................................... 2-15
2.7.1 Device Certificate Setting ................................................................................................................ 2-16
2.7.2 Creating and installing a self-signed certificate ............................................................................... 2-17
2.7.3 Requesting an issuance of certificate .............................................................................................. 2-18

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-1

 2.7.4 Install a Certificate ........................................................................................................................... 2-19
2.7.5 Import Certificates ........................................................................................................................... 2-20
2.7.6 SSL Setting ...................................................................................................................................... 2-20
2.7.7 Removing a Certificate..................................................................................................................... 2-21
2.8 Using device certificates depending on protocol ...................................................................... 2-22
2.8.1 Registering a certificate ................................................................................................................... 2-23
2.8.2 Protocol setting................................................................................................................................ 2-23
2.9 Managing a device certificate...................................................................................................... 2-24
2.9.1 Registering a certificate ................................................................................................................... 2-24
2.9.2 Exporting a certificate ...................................................................................................................... 2-24
2.10 Registering a user certificate in this machine............................................................................ 2-26
2.10.1 E-mail ............................................................................................................................................... 2-27
2.10.2 Automatically Obtain Certificates .................................................................................................... 2-28
2.10.3 Certificate validation ........................................................................................................................ 2-29
Certificate Verification Level Settings .............................................................................................. 2-29
Certificate Verification Settings........................................................................................................ 2-29
2.11 Specifying the date and time of this machine ............................................................................ 2-31
2.11.1 Manual Setting ................................................................................................................................. 2-32
2.11.2 TCP/IP Settings................................................................................................................................ 2-32
2.11.3 Time Zone ........................................................................................................................................ 2-32
2.11.4 Timer Adjustment Setting ................................................................................................................ 2-33
2.12 Sending scanned data to a computer on network .................................................................... 2-34
2.12.1 TCP/IP Settings................................................................................................................................ 2-34
2.12.2 Client Setting.................................................................................................................................... 2-35
2.12.3 WINS Setting.................................................................................................................................... 2-36
2.12.4 Direct Hosting Setting...................................................................................................................... 2-37
2.12.5 LLMNR Setting................................................................................................................................. 2-37
2.13 Sending scanned data to your computer (Scan to Home) ........................................................ 2-38
2.13.1 TCP/IP Settings................................................................................................................................ 2-39
2.13.2 User authentication (Active Directory) ............................................................................................. 2-39
2.13.3 Scan to Home Settings .................................................................................................................... 2-39
2.13.4 Client Setting.................................................................................................................................... 2-39
2.13.5 WINS Setting.................................................................................................................................... 2-39
2.13.6 Direct Hosting Setting...................................................................................................................... 2-39
2.13.7 LLMNR Setting................................................................................................................................. 2-39
2.14 Restricting the use of the SMB address registered in the address book................................ 2-40
2.14.1 TCP/IP Settings................................................................................................................................ 2-40
2.14.2 User Authentication ......................................................................................................................... 2-41
2.14.3 Scan to Authorized Folder Settings ................................................................................................. 2-41
2.14.4 Client Setting.................................................................................................................................... 2-41
2.14.5 WINS Setting.................................................................................................................................... 2-41
2.14.6 Direct Hosting Setting...................................................................................................................... 2-41
2.14.7 LLMNR Setting................................................................................................................................. 2-41
2.15 Sending scanned data by E-mail ................................................................................................. 2-42
2.15.1 TCP/IP Settings................................................................................................................................ 2-42
2.15.2 E-mail Transmission (SMTP) ............................................................................................................ 2-43
E-mail Transmission (SMTP) ............................................................................................................ 2-43
Admin. E-mail Address .................................................................................................................... 2-44
2.15.3 SMTP over SSL/Start TLS ............................................................................................................... 2-45
E-mail Transmission (SMTP) ............................................................................................................ 2-45
Certificate Verification Settings........................................................................................................ 2-46
2.15.4 SMTP Authentication ....................................................................................................................... 2-47
2.15.5 POP before SMTP............................................................................................................................ 2-47
POP before SMTP............................................................................................................................ 2-47
E-Mail RX (POP) ............................................................................................................................... 2-48
2.15.6 POP over SSL .................................................................................................................................. 2-49
E-Mail RX (POP) ............................................................................................................................... 2-49

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-2

 Certificate Verification Settings........................................................................................................ 2-49
2.15.7 APOP Authentication ....................................................................................................................... 2-50
2.16 Sending scanned data to the user's E-mail address (Scan to Me) .......................................... 2-51
2.16.1 TCP/IP Settings................................................................................................................................ 2-51
2.16.2 User Authentication ......................................................................................................................... 2-52
When the MFP authentication is selected ....................................................................................... 2-52
When the Active Directory authentication is selected ..................................................................... 2-52
When the NTLM or NDS authentication is selected ........................................................................ 2-52
2.16.3 E-mail Transmission (SMTP) ............................................................................................................ 2-52
2.16.4 SMTP over SSL/Start TLS ............................................................................................................... 2-52
2.16.5 SMTP Authentication ....................................................................................................................... 2-52
2.16.6 POP before SMTP............................................................................................................................ 2-52
2.16.7 POP over SSL .................................................................................................................................. 2-52
2.16.8 APOP Authentication ....................................................................................................................... 2-53
2.17 Sending scanned data by E-mail (with digital signature) .......................................................... 2-54
2.17.1 TCP/IP Settings................................................................................................................................ 2-54
2.17.2 E-mail Transmission (SMTP) ............................................................................................................ 2-54
2.17.3 Registering a certificate ................................................................................................................... 2-55
2.17.4 S/MIME ............................................................................................................................................ 2-55
2.17.5 SMTP over SSL/Start TLS ............................................................................................................... 2-55
2.17.6 SMTP Authentication ....................................................................................................................... 2-55
2.17.7 POP before SMTP............................................................................................................................ 2-55
2.17.8 POP over SSL .................................................................................................................................. 2-56
2.17.9 APOP Authentication ....................................................................................................................... 2-56
2.18 Sending scanned data by E-mail (Encryption by public key).................................................... 2-57
2.18.1 TCP/IP Settings................................................................................................................................ 2-57
2.18.2 E-mail Transmission (SMTP) ............................................................................................................ 2-58
2.18.3 S/MIME ............................................................................................................................................ 2-58
2.18.4 SMTP over SSL/Start TLS ............................................................................................................... 2-58
2.18.5 SMTP Authentication ....................................................................................................................... 2-58
2.18.6 POP before SMTP............................................................................................................................ 2-58
2.18.7 POP over SSL .................................................................................................................................. 2-59
2.18.8 APOP Authentication ....................................................................................................................... 2-59
2.19 Searching for the E-mail address in the LDAP server ............................................................... 2-60
2.19.1 TCP/IP Settings................................................................................................................................ 2-60
2.19.2 LDAP Settings.................................................................................................................................. 2-61
2.19.3 Setting up the LDAP server.............................................................................................................. 2-62
2.19.4 LDAP over SSL ................................................................................................................................ 2-64
Setting up the LDAP server.............................................................................................................. 2-64
Certificate Verification Settings........................................................................................................ 2-64
2.19.5 DNS server setting ........................................................................................................................... 2-65
2.19.6 Date/Time Setting ............................................................................................................................ 2-65
2.20 Sending scanned data to the FTP server.................................................................................... 2-66
2.20.1 TCP/IP Settings................................................................................................................................ 2-66
2.20.2 FTP transmission setting ................................................................................................................. 2-66
2.21 Sending scanned data to the WebDAV server ........................................................................... 2-68
2.21.1 TCP/IP Settings................................................................................................................................ 2-68
2.21.2 WebDAV client settings ................................................................................................................... 2-69
2.21.3 WebDAV over SSL ........................................................................................................................... 2-70
Certificate Verification Level Settings .............................................................................................. 2-70
Certificate Verification Settings........................................................................................................ 2-70
2.22 Sending Internet faxes.................................................................................................................. 2-72
2.22.1 TCP/IP Settings................................................................................................................................ 2-73
2.22.2 Network Fax Function Settings........................................................................................................ 2-73
2.22.3 Machine Setting ............................................................................................................................... 2-74
2.22.4 Header Information .......................................................................................................................... 2-75

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-3

 2.22.5 E-mail Transmission (SMTP) ............................................................................................................ 2-75
2.22.6 Network Fax Settings....................................................................................................................... 2-75
I-Fax Advanced Setting ................................................................................................................... 2-75
Black Compression Level ................................................................................................................ 2-76
Color/Grayscale Multi-Value Compression Method ........................................................................ 2-77
2.22.7 SMTP over SSL/Start TLS ............................................................................................................... 2-77
2.22.8 SMTP Authentication ....................................................................................................................... 2-77
2.22.9 POP before SMTP............................................................................................................................ 2-77
2.22.10 POP over SSL .................................................................................................................................. 2-77
2.22.11 APOP Authentication ....................................................................................................................... 2-77
2.23 Receiving Internet faxes............................................................................................................... 2-78
2.23.1 TCP/IP Settings................................................................................................................................ 2-78
2.23.2 Network Fax Function Settings........................................................................................................ 2-78
2.23.3 E-Mail RX (POP) ............................................................................................................................... 2-79
2.23.4 Network Fax Settings....................................................................................................................... 2-80
I-Fax Advanced Setting ................................................................................................................... 2-80
Internet Fax RX Ability...................................................................................................................... 2-81
2.23.5 POP over SSL .................................................................................................................................. 2-81
2.23.6 APOP Authentication ....................................................................................................................... 2-81
2.24 Sending and receiving IP address faxes..................................................................................... 2-82
2.24.1 TCP/IP Settings................................................................................................................................ 2-82
2.24.2 Network Fax Function Settings........................................................................................................ 2-83
2.24.3 SMTP TX Setting.............................................................................................................................. 2-84
2.24.4 SMTP RX Setting ............................................................................................................................. 2-85
2.24.5 Network Fax Settings....................................................................................................................... 2-86
Black Compression Level ................................................................................................................ 2-86
Color/Grayscale Multi-Value Compression Method ........................................................................ 2-87
2.24.6 IP Address Fax Setting .................................................................................................................... 2-87
2.24.7 Header Information .......................................................................................................................... 2-88
2.25 Importing images by TWAIN scan ............................................................................................... 2-89
2.25.1 TCP/IP Settings................................................................................................................................ 2-89
2.25.2 SLP Setting ...................................................................................................................................... 2-89
2.25.3 TCP Socket Settings........................................................................................................................ 2-90
2.25.4 Network TWAIN ............................................................................................................................... 2-90
2.26 Printing (LPR/Port9100) ................................................................................................................ 2-91
2.26.1 TCP/IP Settings................................................................................................................................ 2-91
2.26.2 LPD Setting ...................................................................................................................................... 2-91
2.26.3 RAW Port Number ........................................................................................................................... 2-91
2.27 Print (SMB)..................................................................................................................................... 2-92
2.27.1 TCP/IP Settings................................................................................................................................ 2-92
2.27.2 Print Setting ..................................................................................................................................... 2-93
2.27.3 WINS Setting.................................................................................................................................... 2-93
2.27.4 Direct Hosting Setting...................................................................................................................... 2-93
2.27.5 LLMNR Setting................................................................................................................................. 2-93
2.28 Print (IPP) ....................................................................................................................................... 2-94
2.28.1 TCP/IP Settings................................................................................................................................ 2-94
2.28.2 IPP Setting ....................................................................................................................................... 2-95
2.28.3 IPP Authentication Setting ............................................................................................................... 2-96
2.29 Print (IPPS)..................................................................................................................................... 2-97
2.29.1 TCP/IP Settings................................................................................................................................ 2-97
2.29.2 IPP Setting ....................................................................................................................................... 2-97
2.29.3 Device Certificate Setting ................................................................................................................ 2-97
2.29.4 IPP Authentication Setting ............................................................................................................... 2-98
2.30 Printing (Bonjour) .......................................................................................................................... 2-99
Bonjour Settings .............................................................................................................................. 2-99
2.31 Printing (AppleTalk)..................................................................................................................... 2-100
AppleTalk Settings ......................................................................................................................... 2-100

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-4

 2.32 Printing (Netware) ....................................................................................................................... 2-101
2.32.1 NetWare Settings ........................................................................................................................... 2-101
In Remote Printer mode using the NetWare 4.x Bindery Emulation .............................................. 2-101
In Print Server mode using the NetWare 4.x Bindery Emulation ................................................... 2-102
In NetWare 4.x Remote Printer mode (NDS).................................................................................. 2-103
In the NetWare 4.x/5.x/6 Print Server mode (NDS)........................................................................ 2-103
For NetWare 5.x/6 Novell Distributed Print Service (NDPS) .......................................................... 2-104
2.32.2 NetWare Status.............................................................................................................................. 2-105
2.33 Using the WS print function ....................................................................................................... 2-106
2.33.1 TCP/IP Settings.............................................................................................................................. 2-106
2.33.2 Web Service Common Settings..................................................................................................... 2-106
2.33.3 Print Setting ................................................................................................................................... 2-107
2.34 Using Data Saved in a Cellular Phone or PDA ......................................................................... 2-108
2.34.1 Bluetooth Setting ........................................................................................................................... 2-108
2.34.2 System Connection Setting ........................................................................................................... 2-109
2.35 Using the WS scan function ....................................................................................................... 2-110
2.35.1 TCP/IP Settings.............................................................................................................................. 2-110
2.35.2 Web Service Common Settings..................................................................................................... 2-110
2.35.3 Scanner Settings............................................................................................................................ 2-111
2.36 Using Web services to secure communication from Vista/Server 2008 to this machine
via SSL ......................................................................................................................................... 2-112
2.36.1 TCP/IP Settings.............................................................................................................................. 2-112
2.36.2 Device Certificate Setting .............................................................................................................. 2-112
2.36.3 Web Service Common Settings..................................................................................................... 2-112
2.37 Using Web services to establish an SSL communication from this machine to
Vista/Server 2008 ........................................................................................................................ 2-113
2.37.1 TCP/IP Settings.............................................................................................................................. 2-113
2.37.2 Web Service Common Settings..................................................................................................... 2-113
Certificate Verification Settings...................................................................................................... 2-114
2.38 Displaying this machine on the network map .......................................................................... 2-115
2.38.1 TCP/IP Settings.............................................................................................................................. 2-115
2.38.2 LLTD Setting .................................................................................................................................. 2-115
2.39 Monitoring this machine by SNMP Manager............................................................................ 2-116
2.39.1 TCP/IP Settings.............................................................................................................................. 2-116
2.39.2 NetWare Settings ........................................................................................................................... 2-116
2.39.3 SNMP Settings............................................................................................................................... 2-117
2.40 Reporting the status of this machine (by E-mail)..................................................................... 2-119
2.40.1 TCP/IP Settings.............................................................................................................................. 2-119
2.40.2 E-mail Transmission (SMTP) .......................................................................................................... 2-120
2.40.3 Status Notification Setting ............................................................................................................. 2-120
2.40.4 SMTP over SSL/Start TLS ............................................................................................................. 2-121
2.40.5 SMTP Authentication ..................................................................................................................... 2-121
2.40.6 POP before SMTP.......................................................................................................................... 2-121
2.40.7 POP over SSL ................................................................................................................................ 2-121
2.40.8 APOP Authentication ..................................................................................................................... 2-121
2.41 Reporting the status of this machine (TRAP) ........................................................................... 2-122
2.41.1 TCP/IP Settings.............................................................................................................................. 2-122
2.41.2 NetWare Settings ........................................................................................................................... 2-122
2.41.3 TRAP Settings................................................................................................................................ 2-123
2.41.4 Status Notification Setting ............................................................................................................. 2-123
2.42 Reporting the counter information of this machine (by E-mail) ............................................. 2-125
2.42.1 TCP/IP Settings.............................................................................................................................. 2-125
2.42.2 E-mail Transmission (SMTP) .......................................................................................................... 2-126
2.42.3 Total Counter Notification Setting.................................................................................................. 2-127
2.42.4 SMTP over SSL/Start TLS ............................................................................................................. 2-128
2.42.5 SMTP Authentication ..................................................................................................................... 2-128
2.42.6 POP before SMTP.......................................................................................................................... 2-128

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-5

 2.42.7 POP over SSL ................................................................................................................................ 2-128
2.42.8 APOP Authentication ..................................................................................................................... 2-128
2.43 Restricting users of this machine (MFP authentication) ......................................................... 2-129
2.43.1 General Settings ............................................................................................................................ 2-129
2.43.2 Administrative Setting .................................................................................................................... 2-131
2.43.3 User Registration ........................................................................................................................... 2-133
2.43.4 Account Track Registration ........................................................................................................... 2-135
2.44 Restricting users of this machine (Active Directory) ............................................................... 2-137
2.44.1 TCP/IP Settings.............................................................................................................................. 2-137
2.44.2 External Server Settings................................................................................................................. 2-138
2.44.3 General Settings ............................................................................................................................ 2-139
2.44.4 Administrative Setting .................................................................................................................... 2-140
2.44.5 Default Function Permission .......................................................................................................... 2-140
2.44.6 Date/Time Setting .......................................................................................................................... 2-141
2.45 Restricting users of this machine (Windows domain or workgroup)..................................... 2-142
2.45.1 TCP/IP Settings.............................................................................................................................. 2-142
2.45.2 External Server Settings................................................................................................................. 2-143
2.45.3 General Settings ............................................................................................................................ 2-144
2.45.4 Administrative Setting .................................................................................................................... 2-144
2.45.5 Default Function Permission .......................................................................................................... 2-144
2.45.6 Client Setting.................................................................................................................................. 2-145
2.45.7 WINS Setting.................................................................................................................................. 2-145
2.45.8 Direct Hosting Setting.................................................................................................................... 2-145
2.46 Restricting users of this machine (NDS over IPX/SPX) ........................................................... 2-146
2.46.1 External Server Settings................................................................................................................. 2-146
2.46.2 General Settings ............................................................................................................................ 2-147
2.46.3 Administrative Setting .................................................................................................................... 2-147
2.46.4 Default Function Permission .......................................................................................................... 2-148
2.46.5 NetWare Settings ........................................................................................................................... 2-148
2.47 Restricting users of this machine (NDS over TCP/IP) ............................................................. 2-149
2.47.1 TCP/IP Settings.............................................................................................................................. 2-149
2.47.2 External Server Settings................................................................................................................. 2-150
2.47.3 General Settings ............................................................................................................................ 2-151
2.47.4 Administrative Setting .................................................................................................................... 2-151
2.47.5 Default Function Permission .......................................................................................................... 2-151
2.48 Restricting users of this machine (LDAP)................................................................................. 2-152
2.48.1 TCP/IP Settings.............................................................................................................................. 2-152
2.48.2 External Server Settings................................................................................................................. 2-153
2.48.3 General Settings ............................................................................................................................ 2-154
2.48.4 Administrative Setting .................................................................................................................... 2-154
2.48.5 Default Function Permission .......................................................................................................... 2-154
2.48.6 LDAP over SSL .............................................................................................................................. 2-154
External Server Settings................................................................................................................. 2-154
Setting Up LDAP (Certificate Verification Level Settings) .............................................................. 2-155
Certificate Verification Settings...................................................................................................... 2-155
2.49 Filtering IP addresses ................................................................................................................. 2-157
2.49.1 TCP/IP Settings.............................................................................................................................. 2-157
2.49.2 IP Filtering ...................................................................................................................................... 2-157
2.50 Communicating using IPv6 ........................................................................................................ 2-159
TCP/IP Setting ............................................................................................................................... 2-160
2.51 Communicating using IPsec ...................................................................................................... 2-162
2.51.1 TCP/IP Settings.............................................................................................................................. 2-162
2.51.2 IPsec .............................................................................................................................................. 2-163
2.51.3 IKE.................................................................................................................................................. 2-163
IKE.................................................................................................................................................. 2-163
IKE Setting ..................................................................................................................................... 2-164

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-6

 2.51.4 SA................................................................................................................................................... 2-164
SA................................................................................................................................................... 2-164
SA Setting ...................................................................................................................................... 2-164
2.51.5 Peer................................................................................................................................................ 2-165
2.52 Using IEEE802.1X authentication .............................................................................................. 2-166
2.52.1 TCP/IP Settings.............................................................................................................................. 2-166
2.52.2 Device Certificate Setting .............................................................................................................. 2-166
2.52.3 IEEE802.1X Authentication Setting................................................................................................ 2-167
2.52.4 Certificate validation ...................................................................................................................... 2-169
IEEE802.1X Authentication Setting................................................................................................ 2-169
Certificate Verification Settings...................................................................................................... 2-169
2.52.5 IEEE802.1X Authentication Trial .................................................................................................... 2-170
2.53 Using applications that communicate with this machine with TCP Socket.......................... 2-171
2.53.1 TCP/IP Settings.............................................................................................................................. 2-171
2.53.2 Device Certificate Setting .............................................................................................................. 2-171
2.53.3 TCP Socket Settings...................................................................................................................... 2-172
2.54 Linking an OpenAPI system with this machine........................................................................ 2-173
2.54.1 TCP/IP Settings.............................................................................................................................. 2-174
2.54.2 SSDP Settings ............................................................................................................................... 2-174
2.54.3 Device Certificate Setting .............................................................................................................. 2-174
2.54.4 OpenAPI Setting ............................................................................................................................ 2-175
2.54.5 Certificate validation ...................................................................................................................... 2-176
Certificate Verification Level Settings ............................................................................................ 2-176
Certificate Verification Settings...................................................................................................... 2-176
2.55 Using the FTP server and WebDAV server functions .............................................................. 2-178
2.55.1 TCP/IP Settings.............................................................................................................................. 2-178
2.55.2 Device Certificate Setting .............................................................................................................. 2-178
2.55.3 FTP Server Settings ....................................................................................................................... 2-179
2.55.4 WebDAV Server Settings ............................................................................................................... 2-180
2.56 Settings under "Maintenance"................................................................................................... 2-181
2.56.1 Checking the counter of this machine ........................................................................................... 2-181
Meter Count ................................................................................................................................... 2-181
2.56.2 Checking the machine ROM version ............................................................................................. 2-182
ROM Version.................................................................................................................................. 2-182
2.56.3 Importing and exporting the machine configuration information................................................... 2-183
Import/Export................................................................................................................................. 2-183
2.56.4 Using the timer functions ............................................................................................................... 2-184
Power Save Setting........................................................................................................................ 2-184
Weekly Timer Setting ..................................................................................................................... 2-185
2.56.5 Displaying a network error code .................................................................................................... 2-186
Network Error Code Display Setting .............................................................................................. 2-186
2.56.6 Initializing the configuration information ........................................................................................ 2-187
Network Setting Clear.................................................................................................................... 2-187
Reset .............................................................................................................................................. 2-187
Format All Destination.................................................................................................................... 2-188
2.56.7 Enhancing the functions of this machine ....................................................................................... 2-188
Get Request Code ......................................................................................................................... 2-189
Install License ................................................................................................................................ 2-189
2.56.8 Registering and editing font/macro ............................................................................................... 2-190
Edit Font/Macro ............................................................................................................................. 2-190
2.56.9 Outputting job logs ........................................................................................................................ 2-190
Creating job log data ..................................................................................................................... 2-191
Downloading job log data .............................................................................................................. 2-191
2.57 Settings under "System Settings" ............................................................................................. 2-192
2.57.1 Registering machine information ................................................................................................... 2-192
Machine Setting ............................................................................................................................. 2-192
2.57.2 Registering support information .................................................................................................... 2-193
Register Support Information......................................................................................................... 2-193

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-7

 2.57.3 Configuring the environmental settings for using User Boxes ...................................................... 2-194
Delete Unused User Box................................................................................................................ 2-194
Delete Secure Print File.................................................................................................................. 2-195
Delete Time Setting........................................................................................................................ 2-195
Document Delete Time Setting ...................................................................................................... 2-196
Document Hold Setting.................................................................................................................. 2-197
External Memory Function Settings............................................................................................... 2-199
User Box Operation ....................................................................................................................... 2-200
ID & Print Delete Time.................................................................................................................... 2-201
2.57.4 Configuring stamp settings............................................................................................................ 2-202
Header/Footer Registration ........................................................................................................... 2-202
Fax TX settings .............................................................................................................................. 2-203
2.57.5 Configuring settings for printing blank pages................................................................................ 2-204
Blank Page Print Settings .............................................................................................................. 2-204
2.57.6 Configuring settings for skipping jobs ........................................................................................... 2-204
Skip Job Operation Settings .......................................................................................................... 2-204
2.57.7 Disabling Flash View ...................................................................................................................... 2-205
Flash View Settings........................................................................................................................ 2-205
2.57.8 Using the Fax Server Communicating in E-Mail Format................................................................ 2-206
System Connection Setting ........................................................................................................... 2-206
2.57.9 Canceling the connection with applications .................................................................................. 2-207
System Connection Setting ........................................................................................................... 2-207
2.57.10 Specifying the display mode of the administrator mode ............................................................... 2-208
Display Setting ............................................................................................................................... 2-208
Tab Function Display ..................................................................................................................... 2-208
List Function Display...................................................................................................................... 2-208
2.57.11 Configuring Outline PDF Settings .................................................................................................. 2-209
Outline PDF Setting ....................................................................................................................... 2-209
2.58 Settings under "Security"........................................................................................................... 2-210
2.58.1 Managing external certificates ....................................................................................................... 2-210
External Certificate Setting ............................................................................................................ 2-210
2.58.2 Limiting accessible destinations for each user .............................................................................. 2-212
Registering reference allowed groups ........................................................................................... 2-212
2.58.3 Restricting Registration and Change by a User............................................................................. 2-213
Restrict User Access...................................................................................................................... 2-213
2.58.4 Configuring Copy Security Settings............................................................................................... 2-213
Copy Security ................................................................................................................................ 2-214
2.58.5 Specifying the automatic logout time of PageScope Web Connection ........................................ 2-214
Auto Logout ................................................................................................................................... 2-214
2.58.6 Configuring the administrator password ....................................................................................... 2-215
Administrator Password Setting .................................................................................................... 2-215
2.59 Settings under "User Authentication/Account Track" ............................................................ 2-216
2.59.1 Configuring the function permission of the public user ................................................................. 2-216
Public User..................................................................................................................................... 2-216
2.59.2 Specifying the maximum number of Public User Boxes ............................................................... 2-217
Public User Box Setting................................................................................................................. 2-217
2.59.3 Managing single color /2 Color output .......................................................................................... 2-218
User/Account Common Setting..................................................................................................... 2-218
2.59.4 Restricting specification of sending destinations .......................................................................... 2-218
Scan to Authorized Folder Settings ............................................................................................... 2-219
2.60 Settings under "Box" .................................................................................................................. 2-220
2.60.1 Changing User Box settings .......................................................................................................... 2-220
Open User Box .............................................................................................................................. 2-220
2.60.2 Creating new User Boxes .............................................................................................................. 2-221
Create User Box............................................................................................................................. 2-221
2.60.3 Changing System User Box settings ............................................................................................. 2-222
Open System User Box ................................................................................................................. 2-222
2.60.4 Creating a new System User Box .................................................................................................. 2-224
Create System User Box ............................................................................................................... 2-224

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-8

 2.61 Settings under "Print Setting" ................................................................................................... 2-226
2.61.1 Configuring initial settings for the printer function......................................................................... 2-226
Basic Setting.................................................................................................................................. 2-226
2.61.2 Configuring the initial settings for the PCL print function .............................................................. 2-227
PCL Setting.................................................................................................................................... 2-227
2.61.3 Configuring the initial settings for the PS print function ................................................................ 2-228
PS Setting ...................................................................................................................................... 2-228
2.61.4 Configuring the initial settings for the TIFF print function.............................................................. 2-229
TIFF Setting.................................................................................................................................... 2-229
2.61.5 Configuring the initial settings for the XPS print function .............................................................. 2-230
XPS Settings .................................................................................................................................. 2-230
2.61.6 Specifying the timeout of the interface .......................................................................................... 2-230
Interface Setting............................................................................................................................. 2-230
2.61.7 Disabling the direct print function .................................................................................................. 2-231
Direct Print Settings ....................................................................................................................... 2-231
2.61.8 Restricting users from obtaining device information using password........................................... 2-231
Assign Account to Acquire Device Info ......................................................................................... 2-231
2.62 Settings under "Store Address" ................................................................................................ 2-232
2.62.1 Registering Address Book ............................................................................................................. 2-232
Address Registration...................................................................................................................... 2-232
Icon ................................................................................................................................................ 2-236
2.62.2 Registering a group........................................................................................................................ 2-237
Group ............................................................................................................................................. 2-237
2.62.3 Registering a program destination................................................................................................. 2-238
Program ......................................................................................................................................... 2-238
2.62.4 Registering Temporary One-Touch Destination ............................................................................ 2-253
Temporary One-Touch................................................................................................................... 2-253
2.62.5 Registering the E-mail subject and body....................................................................................... 2-254
Subject ........................................................................................................................................... 2-254
Text ................................................................................................................................................ 2-254
2.62.6 Using a fax server .......................................................................................................................... 2-255
Registering applications................................................................................................................. 2-255
2.62.7 Simplifying entering E-mail addresses........................................................................................... 2-258
Prefix/Suffix.................................................................................................................................... 2-258
2.63 Settings under "Fax Settings".................................................................................................... 2-259
2.63.1 Configuring Header/Footer Position settings ................................................................................ 2-259
Header/Footer Position.................................................................................................................. 2-259
2.63.2 Configuring settings for telephone and fax lines ........................................................................... 2-260
Line Parameter Setting .................................................................................................................. 2-260
2.63.3 Configuring settings to send or receive faxes ............................................................................... 2-261
TX/RX settings ............................................................................................................................... 2-261
2.63.4 Configuring settings for the fax functions...................................................................................... 2-262
Function ON/OFF Setting .............................................................................................................. 2-262
Memory RX Setting ........................................................................................................................ 2-263
Closed network RX ........................................................................................................................ 2-264
Forward TX Setting ........................................................................................................................ 2-265
Incomplete TX Hold ....................................................................................................................... 2-266
PC-FAX RX Setting ........................................................................................................................ 2-267
TSI User Box Setting...................................................................................................................... 2-268
TSI User Box Registration.............................................................................................................. 2-269
2.63.5 Configuring PBX connection settings ............................................................................................ 2-270
PBX Connection Setting ................................................................................................................ 2-270
2.63.6 Configuring settings to print fax reports ........................................................................................ 2-271
Report Settings .............................................................................................................................. 2-271
2.63.7 Using extension lines ..................................................................................................................... 2-272
Multi Line Settings ......................................................................................................................... 2-272
2.63.8 Registering the Sender Name and Fax ID ..................................................................................... 2-273
Header Information ........................................................................................................................ 2-273
2.64 Using Data Management Utility ................................................................................................. 2-275

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-9

 2.64.1 Starting up Data Management Utility............................................................................................. 2-275
2.64.2 Managing copy protect data.......................................................................................................... 2-276
Copy protect list............................................................................................................................. 2-276
System ........................................................................................................................................... 2-277
Edit ................................................................................................................................................. 2-277
2.64.3 Managing stamp Data.................................................................................................................... 2-278
Stamp list ....................................................................................................................................... 2-278
System ........................................................................................................................................... 2-279
Edit ................................................................................................................................................. 2-279
2.64.4 Managing font or macro................................................................................................................. 2-280
Font/Macro List.............................................................................................................................. 2-280
System ........................................................................................................................................... 2-281
Add................................................................................................................................................. 2-281

3 Appendix
3.1 Product specifications (Network functions) ................................................................................. 3-2
3.2 Displaying the network settings screen (Control panel) ............................................................. 3-3
3.3 Network settings menu list (Control panel) .................................................................................. 3-5
3.3.1 Network Settings screen (1/2)............................................................................................................ 3-5
[1]TCP/IP Settings.............................................................................................................................. 3-5
[2]NetWare Settings ........................................................................................................................... 3-7
[3]HTTP Server Settings..................................................................................................................... 3-7
[4]FTP Settings................................................................................................................................... 3-8
[5]SMB Settings ................................................................................................................................. 3-8
[6]LDAP Settings ................................................................................................................................ 3-9
[7]E-mail Settings ............................................................................................................................. 3-10
[8]SNMP Settings............................................................................................................................. 3-12
[9]AppleTalk Settings ....................................................................................................................... 3-12
[0]Bonjour Setting ............................................................................................................................ 3-13
3.3.2 Network Settings screen (2/2).......................................................................................................... 3-13
[1]TCP Socket Settings .................................................................................................................... 3-13
[2]Network Fax Settings................................................................................................................... 3-13
[3]WebDAV Settings......................................................................................................................... 3-14
[4]Web Service Settings................................................................................................................... 3-14
[6]SSDP Setting ............................................................................................................................... 3-15
[7]Detail Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-15
[8]IEEE802.1X Authentication Settings ............................................................................................ 3-16
[0]Bluetooth Setting ......................................................................................................................... 3-16
3.4 Network Error Codes.................................................................................................................... 3-17
3.5 Glossary ......................................................................................................................................... 3-29

4 Index
4.1 Index by item ................................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2 Index by button................................................................................................................................ 4-4

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-10

1 Introduction
1.1 Welcome
1

1 Introduction

1.1 Welcome
Thank you for purchasing this machine.
This User's Guide describes the functions, operating instructions, precautions for correct operation, and
simple troubleshooting guidelines of this machine. In order to obtain maximum performance from this
product and use it effectively, please read this User's Guide as necessary.

1.1.1 User's guides

Printed manual Overview

Quick Guide [Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Opera- This manual describes operating procedures and the
tions] functions that are most frequently used in order to en-
able you to begin using this machine immediately.
This manual also contains notes and precautions that
should be followed to ensure safe usage of this ma-
chine.
Please be sure to read this manual before using this
machine.

User's guide CD manuals Overview

Copy Operations This manual describes details on copy mode opera-
tions and the settings of this machine.
• Specifications of originals and copy paper
• Copy function
• Maintaining this machine
• Troubleshooting
Enlarge Display Operations This manual describes details on operating proce-
dures of enlarge display mode.
• Copy function
• Scanning function
• G3 fax function
• Network fax function
Print Operations This manual describes details on printer functions.
• Printer function
• Setting the printer driver
Box Operations This manual describes details on the boxed functions
using the hard disk.
• Saving data in User Boxes.
• Retrieving data from User Boxes.
• Transferring and printing data from User Boxes
Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations This manual describes details on transmitting
scanned data.
• E-mail TX, FTP TX, SMB TX, Save in User Box,
WebDAV TX, Web Services
• G3 fax
• IP Address Fax, Internet Fax
Fax Driver Operations This manual describes details on the fax driver func-
tion that transmits faxes directly from a computer.
• PC-FAX
Network Administrator This manual describes details on setting methods for
each function using the network connection.
• Network settings
• Settings using PageScope Web Connection.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 1-2

1.1 Welcome
1
User's guide CD manuals Overview
Advanced Function Operations This manual describes details on functions that be-
come available by registering the optional license kit
and by connecting to an application.
• Web browser function
• Image panel
• PDF Processing Function
• Searchable PDF
• My panel and My address function
Trademarks/Copyrights This manual describes details on trademarks and
copyrights.
• Trademarks and copyrights.

1.1.2 User's Guide

This User's Guide is intended for a wide range of users ranging from those using this machine for the first
time to administrators.
It describes basic operations, functions that enable more convenient operations, simple troubleshooting
operations, and various setting methods of this machine.
Note that basic technical knowledge about the product is required to enable users to perform troubleshooting
operation. Limit your troubleshooting operations to the areas explained in this manual.
Should you experience any problems, please contact our service representative.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 1-3

1.2 Conventions used in this manual
1
1.2 Conventions used in this manual

1.2.1 Symbols used in this manual.

Symbols are used in this manual to express various types of information.
The following describes each symbol related to correct and safe usage of this machine.

To use this machine safely

7 WARNING
- This symbol indicates that a failure to heed the instructions may lead to death or serious injury.

7 CAUTION
- This symbol indicates that negligence of the instructions may lead to mishandling that may cause injury
or property damage.

NOTICE
This symbol indicates a risk that may result in damage to this machine or originals.
Follow the instructions to avoid property damage.

Procedural instruction
0 This check mark indicates an option that is required in order to use conditions or functions that are
prerequisite for a procedure.

1 This format number "1" represents the first step.

2 This format number represents the order of serial steps.

% This symbol indicates a supplementary explanation of a
procedural instruction. A procedural operation
is illustrated.

% This symbol indicates transition of the control panel to access a desired menu item.

This symbol indicates a desired page.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 1-4

1.2 Conventions used in this manual
1
d Reference
This symbol indicates a reference.
View the reference as required.

Key symbols
[]
This symbol represents a key name on the control panel, touch panel or the computer screen, or power
switch, etc.

1.2.2 Original and paper indications

Original and paper sizes

The following explains the indication for originals and paper described
in this manual.
When indicating the original or paper size, the Y side represents the
width and the X side the length.

Original and paper indications

w indicates the paper size with the length (X) being longer than the
width (Y).

v indicates the paper size with the length (X) being shorter than the
width (Y).

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 1-5

1.3 Display modes of PageScope Web Connection
1
1.3 Display modes of PageScope Web Connection
The display modes of the PageScope Web Connection administrator modes are classified into two display
modes: "Tab Function Display" and "List Function Display". This manual shows an example where the "List
Function Display" is set as the display mode.
This section provides an overview of each display mode. In either display mode, the available items are the
same.

d Reference
For details on specifying the display mode, refer to page 2-208.

1.3.1 "Tab Function Display"

In the default setting, the screen is displayed in "Tab Function Display".
In "Tab Function Display", click the desired icon to change the menu.

1.3.2 "List Function Display"

In "List Function Display", change the menu from the list box.
Select the desired menu in the drop-down list, click [Display].

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 1-6

1.3 Display modes of PageScope Web Connection
1
Main Menu
If you log in to the administrator mode while "List Function Display" is selected, the main menu appears first.
The main menu displays a list of all the menus in the administrator mode. Select the desired setting in the
drop-down list, and click [Display] to display each setting screen.

d Reference
Click "To Main Menu" on each setting screen of the administrator mode to return to the main menu.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 1-7

2 Setting Items for each
Procedure
2.1 Procedure list
2

2 Setting Items for each Procedure

2.1 Procedure list

This section describes a list of procedures that are required to use this machine.
Find the required procedure in the list, and configure the required settings.

2.1.1 Connecting to network

Title Page
Basic settings for TCP/IP communication p. 2-6
Communicating using IPv6 p. 2-159

2.1.2 Using PageScope Web Connection

Title Page
Using PageScope Web Connection p. 2-8
Logging in to the administrator mode p. 2-10
Using Popup Help p. 2-12
Configuring Settings for each Purpose via Wizard p. 2-13
Disabling Flash View p. 2-205
Specifying the display mode of the administrator mode p. 2-208
Specifying the automatic logout time of PageScope Web Connection p. 2-214

2.1.3 Scanning

Title Page
Sending scanned data to a computer on network p. 2-34
Sending scanned data to your computer (Scan to Home) p. 2-38
Sending scanned data by E-mail p. 2-42
Sending scanned data to the user's E-mail address (Scan to Me) p. 2-51
Sending scanned data to the FTP server p. 2-66
Sending scanned data to the WebDAV server p. 2-68
Importing images by TWAIN scan p. 2-89
Using the WS scan function p. 2-110

2.1.4 Printing

Title Page
Printing (LPR/Port9100) p. 2-91
Print (SMB) p. 2-92
Print (IPP) p. 2-94
Print (IPPS) p. 2-97
Printing (Bonjour) p. 2-99
Printing (AppleTalk) p. 2-100

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-2

2.1 Procedure list
2
Title Page
Printing (Netware) p. 2-101
Using the WS print function p. 2-106
Using Data Saved in a Cellular Phone or PDA p. 2-108

2.1.5 Sending and receiving network faxes

Title Page
Sending Internet faxes p. 2-72
Receiving Internet faxes p. 2-78
Sending and receiving IP address faxes p. 2-82

2.1.6 Using User Authentication

Title Page
Restricting users of this machine (MFP authentication) p. 2-129
Restricting users of this machine (Active Directory) p. 2-137
Restricting users of this machine (Windows domain or workgroup) p. 2-142
Restricting users of this machine (NDS over IPX/SPX) p. 2-146
Restricting users of this machine (NDS over TCP/IP) p. 2-149
Restricting users of this machine (LDAP) p. 2-152

2.1.7 Cooperating with applications

Title Page
Using applications that communicate with this machine with TCP Socket p. 2-171
Linking an OpenAPI system with this machine p. 2-173
Using the FTP server and WebDAV server functions p. 2-178
Canceling the connection with applications p. 2-207

2.1.8 Reinforcing security

Title Page
Registering the certificate of this machine for SSL communications p. 2-15
Using device certificates depending on protocol p. 2-22
Managing a device certificate p. 2-24
Registering a user certificate in this machine p. 2-26
Restricting the use of the SMB address registered in the address book p. 2-40
Sending scanned data by E-mail (with digital signature) p. 2-54
Sending scanned data by E-mail (Encryption by public key) p. 2-57
Using Web services to secure communication from Vista/Server 2008 to this machine p. 2-112
via SSL
Using Web services to establish an SSL communication from this machine to Vis- p. 2-113
ta/Server 2008
Filtering IP addresses p. 2-157
Communicating using IPsec p. 2-162
Using IEEE802.1X authentication p. 2-166

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-3

2.1 Procedure list
2
Title Page
Managing external certificates p. 2-210
Limiting accessible destinations for each user p. 2-212
Restricting Registration and Change by a User p. 2-213
Configuring Copy Security Settings p. 2-213
Configuring the administrator password p. 2-215
Configuring the function permission of the public user p. 2-216
Restricting specification of sending destinations p. 2-218

2.1.9 Managing

Title Page
Specifying the date and time of this machine p. 2-31
Searching for the E-mail address in the LDAP server p. 2-60
Displaying this machine on the network map p. 2-115
Monitoring this machine by SNMP Manager p. 2-116
Reporting the status of this machine (by E-mail) p. 2-119
Reporting the status of this machine (TRAP) p. 2-122
Reporting the counter information of this machine (by E-mail) p. 2-125
Checking the counter of this machine p. 2-181
Checking the machine ROM version p. 2-182
Importing and exporting the machine configuration information p. 2-183
Using the timer functions p. 2-184
Displaying a network error code p. 2-186
Initializing the configuration information p. 2-187
Enhancing the functions of this machine p. 2-188
Outputting job logs p. 2-190
Configuring settings for printing blank pages p. 2-204
Configuring settings for skipping jobs p. 2-204
Configuring Outline PDF Settings p. 2-209
Managing single color /2 Color output p. 2-218
Using Data Management Utility p. 2-275

2.1.10 Registering

Title Page
Registering and editing font/macro p. 2-190
Registering machine information p. 2-192
Registering support information p. 2-193
Configuring stamp settings p. 2-202
Registering Address Book p. 2-232
Registering a group p. 2-237
Registering a program destination p. 2-238
Registering Temporary One-Touch Destination p. 2-253
Registering the E-mail subject and body p. 2-254

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-4

2.1 Procedure list
2
Title Page
Simplifying entering E-mail addresses p. 2-258

2.1.11 Configuring User Box settings

Title Page
Configuring the environmental settings for using User Boxes p. 2-194
Specifying the maximum number of Public User Boxes p. 2-217
Changing User Box settings p. 2-220
Creating new User Boxes p. 2-221
Changing System User Box settings p. 2-222
Creating a new System User Box p. 2-224

2.1.12 Configuring print settings

Title Page
Configuring initial settings for the printer function p. 2-226
Configuring the initial settings for the PCL print function p. 2-227
Configuring the initial settings for the PS print function p. 2-228
Configuring the initial settings for the TIFF print function p. 2-229
Configuring the initial settings for the XPS print function p. 2-230
Specifying the timeout of the interface p. 2-230
Disabling the direct print function p. 2-231
Restricting users from obtaining device information using password p. 2-231

2.1.13 Configuring fax settings

Title Page
Configuring Header/Footer Position settings p. 2-259
Configuring settings for telephone and fax lines p. 2-260
Configuring settings to send or receive faxes p. 2-261
Configuring settings for the fax functions p. 2-262
Configuring PBX connection settings p. 2-270
Configuring settings to print fax reports p. 2-271
Using extension lines p. 2-272
Registering the Sender Name and Fax ID p. 2-273
Using a fax server p. 2-255
Using the Fax Server Communicating in E-Mail Format p. 2-206

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-5

2.2 Basic settings for TCP/IP communication
2
2.2 Basic settings for TCP/IP communication
Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
These settings are required before using this machine via the network.
NOTICE
To enable changed network settings, turn the main power of this machine off and on again.
To turn the main power switch off and on, first turn the main power off, and then on after 10 seconds or more
has elapsed. Not doing so may result in an operation failure.

TCP/IP Settings
In the Administrator Settings screen of the control panel, select [Network Settings] ö [1 TCP/IP Settings].

d Reference
For details on how to go to the Network Settings screen, refer to page 3-3.
For details on the menu structure of the network setting in the control panel, refer to page 3-5.
For details on how to use this machine in the IPv6 environment, refer to page 2-159.

Item Description Prior check

[ON]/ [OFF] Select [ON].

[IPv4 Settings]

Item Description Prior check

IP application Select whether to automatically obtain the IP address or IP application meth-
method directly specify it. od
Auto Input To automatically obtain the IP address, select the auto-
matic retrieval method.
IP Address To directly specify the IP address, enter the IP address of IP address of this
this machine. machine
Subnet mask When directly entering the IP address, configure the sub- Subnet mask of this
net mask of the network to be connected. machine
Default Gateway When directly entering the IP address, specify the default Default gateway of
gateway of the network to be connected. this machine

[DNS Host]

Item Description Prior check

Dynamic DNS Set- Select [Enable] when automatically registering the host Is Dynamic DNS
tings name specified in [DNS Host Name] with the DNS server supported?
that supports the Dynamic DNS function.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-6

2.2 Basic settings for TCP/IP communication
2
Item Description Prior check
DNS Host Name Specify the host name of this machine (up to 63 charac-
ters).

[DNS Domain]

Item Description Prior check

Domain Name Select whether to automatically obtain the domain name. Can it be obtained
Auto Retrieval This item is necessary when DHCP is enabled. automatically using
DHCP?
Search Domain Select whether to automatically obtain the search domain Can it be obtained
Name Auto Re- name. automatically using
trieval This item is necessary when DHCP is enabled. DHCP?
Default DNS Do- When not automatically obtaining the domain name, Default Domain
main Name specify the name of the domain that contains this machine Name
(up to 255 characters, including the host name).
DNS Search Do- Specify the DNS search domain name (up to 253 charac-
main Name 1 to ters).
DNS Search Do-
main Name 3

[DNS Server Settings (IPv4)]

Item Description Prior check

DNS Server Auto Select whether to automatically obtain the DNS server ad- Can it be obtained
Obtain dress. automatically using
This item is necessary when DHCP is enabled. DHCP?
Priority DNS Server Enter the address of the primary DNS server if you do not Server address
obtain the DNS server address automatically.
Secondary DNS Specify the addresses of the secondary DNS servers. Server address
Server 1 to Sec-
ondary DNS Server
2

Device Setting
In the Administrator Settings screen of the control panel, select [Network Settings] ö [Forward] ö [7 Detail
Settings] ö [1 Device Setting].

Item Description Prior check

MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the network interface card of
this machine.
Network Speed Specify the network speed.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-7

2.3 Using PageScope Web Connection
2
2.3 Using PageScope Web Connection
Configure settings to use PageScope Web Connection.
PageScope Web Connection is a device management utility that is supported by the HTTP server built into
this machine. Start the Web browser on the computer via the network; you can change the settings of this
machine or check the status of this machine. You can also handle some settings, which are to be configured
on the control panel of this machine, through your computer.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

TCP/IP Settings

PSWC Settings

TCP Socket Settings

Used in SSL?

Yes No

Device Certificate Setting

Finish

2.3.1 TCP/IP Settings

Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

2.3.2 PSWC Settings

In the Administrator Settings screen of the control panel, select [Network Settings] ö [3 HTTP Server
Settings].

d Reference
For details on how to go to the Network Settings screen, refer to page 3-3.

Item Description Prior check

PSWC Settings Select [ON].

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-8

2.3 Using PageScope Web Connection
2
2.3.3 TCP Socket Settings
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "TCP Socket Setting".

d Reference
For details on how to log in to the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, refer to page 2-10.

Item Description Prior check

TCP Socket Select this check box to use PageScope Web Connection
(ASCII Mode) in the flash format.
Port Number Enter the port number.
(ASCII Mode)

2.3.4 Device Certificate Setting

Configure settings for the encrypting communication from a computer to this machine using SSL.
For details, refer to page 2-15.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-9

2.4 Logging in to the administrator mode
2
2.4 Logging in to the administrator mode
To configure this machine with PageScope Web Connection, log in to the administrator mode. The following
shows a procedure to log in to the administrator mode.
Reference
- If you are already logging in to the administrator mode, you cannot use the control panel of this machine
to perform operations.
- Depending on the status of this machine, you may not be able to log in to the administrator mode.
- If you access PageScope Web Connection while User Authentication or Account Track is not enabled,
you will see the screen displayed when you logged in as the public user. To log in as an administrator,
log out from the public user mode once.

1 In the login page, select "Administrator", and click [Login].

% If necessary, select the language and view mode.
% The flash display can be restricted if necessary. For details on configuring the setting, refer to
page 2-205.
% Selecting the "Display dialog box in case of warning" check box displays a dialog box when a
warning has occurred during operation.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-10

2.4 Logging in to the administrator mode
2
2 Enter the administrator password of this machine.
% If the number of passwords you entered by mistake exceeds the specified count while "Prohibited
Functions When Authentication Error" is set to "Mode 2" in Administrator Settings, you cannot log
in to the administrator mode.
% You can specify whether to use Popup Help in "Help Display Setting". For details, refer to
page 2-12.

3 Click [OK].
The administrator mode window appears.

d Reference
You can select the display mode of the PageScope Web Connection administrator mode from "Tab Function
Display" or "List Function Display".
This manual shows an example where the "List Function Display" is set as the display mode.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-11

2.5 Using Popup Help
2
2.5 Using Popup Help
You can use Popup Help on the Network page of PageScope Web Connection.
Selecting a specific item in a page using On-Mouse or On-Focus (click) displays the explanation of the item
in a popup window, so you can specify each item while checking its meaning.
Reference
- Help can be displayed only for network settings.
- Popup help can be displayed using two methods: On-Mouse and On-Focus (click). Whether to use On-
Mouse or On-Focus can be specified individually.

Help Display Setting

Item Description
On-Mouse View Select whether to display popup help using On-Mouse.
To use On-Mouse, place the mouse over the desired setting item; its expla-
nation appears on the right of page.
On-Focus View Select whether to display popup help using On-Focus.
To use On-Focus, click the desired setting item entry area or option; its ex-
planation appears on the right of the page.

Popup Help Display Example

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-12

2.6 Configuring Settings for each Purpose via Wizard
2
2.6 Configuring Settings for each Purpose via Wizard
"Setting for each purpose" allows you to easily configure settings for using the following functions according
to the instructions shown by a wizard.
"Configure the settings for sending a scanned document"
- "Send scanned data by E-mail"
- "Send scanned data by E-mail (with digital signature)"
- "Send scanned data by E-mail (Encryption by public key)"
"Configure the network print settings"
- "LPR printing"
- "Print by RAW port"
- "Print by SMB"
"Restricting users of this machine"
- "Not Authenticate"
- "Manage by User Authentication Only"
- "Manage by Organization Unit Only"
- "Manage by User Authentication + Organization Unit"
- "Manage by External Authentication Server (ActiveDirectory)"

2.6.1 Screen Components

The "Setting for each purpose" page has the following components.

2
1

No. Item Description

1 Flow Displays a setting flow to use the desired function. The currently ena-
bled items are displayed in dark gray.
2 View Purpose Displays the selected purpose.
3 View Settings Displays settings.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-13

2.6 Configuring Settings for each Purpose via Wizard
2
2.6.2 Setting for each purpose
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select Setting for each purpose. Select the
desired purpose, and configure its setting according to the instructions shown by the wizard.

Reference
- To return to the previous setting item during the setting procedure, click the desired setting item using
Flow. If you return to the previous item, perform re-configuration from its settings.
- To end the setting procedure, click "End" in Flow.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-14

2.7 Registering the certificate of this machine for SSL communications
2
2.7 Registering the certificate of this machine for SSL
communications
Register the certificate of this machine (device certificate) to configure SSL communication settings.
The device certificate is registered in this machine at the time of shipment; therefore, SSL-encrypted
communication is enabled immediately after installation.
This machine allows you to manage multiple device certificates. To register a new device certificate with this
machine, create a self-signed certificate, or ask a certificate authority (CA) and install the issued certificate.
You can also import an exported device certificate.
When using this machine for the following purposes, you can encrypt a communication from a client
computer to this machine using SSL. For details, refer to the relevant reference page.
- "Using PageScope Web Connection" (p. 2-8)
- "Print (IPPS)" (p. 2-97)
- "Using Web services to secure communication from Vista/Server 2008 to this machine via SSL"
(p. 2-112)
- "Using IEEE802.1X authentication (for EAP-TLS)" (p. 2-166)
- "Linking an OpenAPI system with this machine" (p. 2-173)
- "Using the FTP server and WebDAV server functions (WebDAV server function only)" (p. 2-178)
Also, if this machine is used for any of the following purposes, this machine submits (attaches) a device
certificate that has been registered in this machine. For details, refer to the relevant reference page.
- "Sending scanned data by E-mail (with digital signature)" (p. 2-54)
- "Using IEEE802.1X authentication (for EAP-TLS or PEAP)" (p. 2-166)
- "Using applications that communicate with this machine with TCP Socket" (p. 2-171)
- To submit a certificate upon request from a server (SMTP, POP, LDAP, WebDAV)
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

Device Certificate Setting

(1) Self-signed creation

(2) Issuance by CA
(3) Import

(1) (2) (3)

Creating and installing a Requesting an issuance of Import Certificates

self-signed certificate certificate

Install a Certificate

SSL Setting

Finish

d Reference
This machine enables you to use multiple registered device certificates depending on protocols. For details
on how to use device certificates depending on purposes, refer to page 2-22.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-15

2.7 Registering the certificate of this machine for SSL communications
2
2.7.1 Device Certificate Setting
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Security" ö "PKI Setting" ö "Device
Certificate Setting".

Item Description Prior check

[New Registration] Register a new device certificate.
Select a registration method: creating a self-signed certif-
icate, requesting an issuance of a certificate, or importing
a certificate.
Default Specify the default device certificate. Default device certif-
When not using device certificates depending on proto- icate
cols, specify the default device certificate.
Issuer Displays an issuer of a device certificate.
Subject Displays a destination to issue a device certificate to.
Validity Period Displays the validity period of a device certificate.
Detail Enables you to confirm detailed information about a de-
vice certificate.
Setting Enables you to remove or export a device certificate if it is
installed.
If "Requesting Certificate" is displayed in "Issuer" of the
device certificate, you can install a CA-issued certificate in
this machine.

d Reference
For details on how to remove a device certificate, refer to page 2-21.
For details on how to export a device certificate, refer to page 2-24.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-16

2.7 Registering the certificate of this machine for SSL communications
2
2.7.2 Creating and installing a self-signed certificate
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Security" ö "PKI Setting" ö "Device
Certificate Setting" ö [New Registration] ö "Create and install a self-signed Certificate".

Item Description Prior check

Common Name Displays the IP address or domain name of this machine.
This item shows the set value used to access this ma-
chine.
Organization Enter an organization or association name (up to 63 char-
acters).
Organizational Unit Enter an account name (up to 63 characters).
You can also specify a null.
Locality Enter a city, ward, town, or village name (up to 127 char-
acters).
State/Province Enter a prefecture name (up to 127 characters).
Country Enter the country name with a country code defined in
ISO03166 (2 characters).
United States: US, Great Britain: GB, Italy: IT, Australia:
AU, The Netherlands: NL, Canada: CA, Spain: ES, Czech
Republic: CZ, China: CN, Denmark: DK, Germany: DE,
Japan: JP, France: FR, Belgium: BE, Russia: RU
Admin. E-mail Ad- Enter the E-mail address of the administrator (up to 128 E-mail address of the
dress characters, excluding a space). administrator
If the administrator address has been specified in "Ma-
chine Setting" in "System Settings", the registered E-mail
address is displayed.
Validity Start Date Displays the validity period starting date.
Displays the date and time (of this machine) when this
page was displayed.
Validity Period Enter the validity period of a certificate with the number of
days that have elapsed since the starting date.
Encryption Key Select a type of encryption key.
Type
[OK] Click this button to create a self-signed certificate. It may
take several minutes to create a certificate.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-17

2.7 Registering the certificate of this machine for SSL communications
2
2.7.3 Requesting an issuance of certificate
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Security" ö "PKI Setting" ö "Device
Certificate Setting" ö [New Registration] ö "Request a Certificate".

Item Description Prior check

Common Name Displays the IP address or domain name of this machine.
This item shows the set value used to access this ma-
chine.
Organization Enter an organization or association name (up to 63 char-
acters).
Organizational Unit Enter an account name (up to 63 characters).
You can also specify a null.
Locality Enter a city, ward, town, or village name (up to 127 char-
acters).
State/Province Enter a prefecture name (up to 127 characters).
Country Enter the country name with a country code defined in
ISO03166 (2 characters).
United States: US, Great Britain: GB, Italy: IT, Australia:
AU, The Netherlands: NL, Canada: CA, Spain: ES, Czech
Republic: CZ, China: CN, Denmark: DK, Germany: DE,
Japan: JP, France: FR, Belgium: BE, Russia: RU
Admin. E-mail Ad- Enter the E-mail address of the administrator (up to 128 E-mail address of the
dress characters, excluding a space). administrator
If the administrator address has been specified in "Ma-
chine Setting" in "System Settings", the registered E-mail
address is displayed.
Encryption Key Select a type of encryption key.
Type
[OK] Click this button to create certificate signing request data.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-18

2.7 Registering the certificate of this machine for SSL communications
2

Item Description Prior check

Certificate Signing Displays request data to issue a device certificate.
Request Data Send the displayed character string to the CA.
[Save] Click this button to save certificate signing request data in
your computer as a file.

2.7.4 Install a Certificate

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Security" ö "PKI Setting" ö "Device
Certificate Setting" ö [Setting] ö "Install a Certificate".
Ask the CA to issue a certificate, and install the certificate sent from the CA in this machine.

Item Description Prior check

Install a Certificate Pastes text data sent from the CA.
[Install] Click this button to install a certificate.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-19

2.7 Registering the certificate of this machine for SSL communications
2
2.7.5 Import Certificates
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Security" ö "PKI Setting" ö "Device
Certificate Setting" ö "New Registration" ö "Import Certificates".

Item Description Prior check

File Specify the file name of the device certificate to be import-
ed.
Click [Browse] to specify where to save a certificate file.
Password Enter the password to decode the encrypted certificate
file (up to 32 characters).

2.7.6 SSL Setting

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Security" ö "PKI Setting" ö "SSL
Setting".

Item Description Prior check

Mode using Select the PageScope Web Connection mode to apply
SSL/TLS SSL.
Click "None" to disable SSL.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-20

2.7 Registering the certificate of this machine for SSL communications
2
Item Description Prior check
Encryption Specify the SSL encryption strength.
Strength

2.7.7 Removing a Certificate

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Security" ö "PKI Setting" ö "Device
Certificate Setting" ö [Setting] ö "Remove a Certificate".
Click [OK] to remove the registered device certificate.

Reference
- To remove the default device certificate while two or more certificates are registered, specify the other
one as the default.
- If Enhanced Security Mode is enabled, the device certificate cannot be deleted.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-21

2.8 Using device certificates depending on protocol
2
2.8 Using device certificates depending on protocol
Configure settings to use device certificates depending on protocol.
This machine enables you to use multiple registered device certificates depending on protocols. Configure
settings to fit your environment.
You can specify the device certificate to be used for each of the following protocols in this machine.

Protocol1 Protocol2 Description

SSL http server If this machine is used as an http server
• If the client accesses PageScope Web Connection
via HTTPS, it is used to encrypt communication
from the client to this machine.
• If the client prints data via IPPS, it is used to encrypt
communication from the client to this machine.
SSL E-mail Transmission If this machine is used as an SMTP client
(SMTP) • This machine submits a device certificate upon re-
quest from the SMTP server.
SSL E-Mail RX (POP) If this machine is used as a POP client
• This machine submits a device certificate upon re-
quest from the POP server.
SSL TCP Socket If this machine is used as a TCP Socket client
• This machine submits a device certificate upon re-
quest from the TCP Socket server.
SSL LDAP If this machine is used as an LDAP client
• This machine submits a device certificate upon re-
quest from the LDAP server.
SSL WebDAV client If this machine is used as a WebDAV client
• This machine submits a device certificate upon re-
quest from the WebDAV server.
SSL OpenAPI If this machine is used as an OpenAPI server
• If the OpenAPI client accesses this machine via
SSL, it is used to encrypt communication from the
client to this machine.
SSL Web service If this machine is used as a Web service server
• If Windows Vista accesses this machine via HTTPS,
it is used to encrypt communication from Vista to
this machine.
IEEE802.1X If this machine is used as an IEEE802.1X authentication
client
• If this machine is authenticated by the IEEE802.1X
server via EAP-TLS, it is used to encrypt communi-
cation.
• This machine submits a device certificate upon re-
quest from the server via EAP-TTLS or EAP-PEAP.
S/MIME This machine attaches a device certificate when send-
ing an S/MIME E-mail message.

Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

Registering a certificate

Protocol setting

Finish

d Reference
When not using device certificates depending on protocols, specify the device certificate shown in "Default
Setting" of "Device Certificate Setting". For details, refer to page 2-15.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-22

2.8 Using device certificates depending on protocol
2
2.8.1 Registering a certificate
Register a device certificate.
For details, refer to page 2-15.

2.8.2 Protocol setting

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Security" ö "PKI Setting" ö "Protocol
setting".
Reference
- The function that uses device certificates depending on protocols is not available when a device
certificate is not registered or is only in the certificate signing request state.

Item Description Prior check

Protocol1/2 Displays the classification for each protocol.
If the target device certificate is registered, the protocol is
marked by "*".
[Create] Select the protocol to specify a device certificate, and
click [Create]. The device certificate registration page ap-
pears, and you can specify the target device certificate.
If the device certificate is already registered, [Edit] ap-
pears. Clicking [Edit] enables you to change the target de-
vice certificate or confirm the details of a device
certificate.
[Delete] If the target device certificate is registered, click this but-
ton to delete the registered information.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-23

2.9 Managing a device certificate
2
2.9 Managing a device certificate
To manage a device certificate, use PageScope Web Connection to export it.
Obtaining a device certificate enables you to send an encrypted E-mail from the user to this machine using
the obtained certificate (public key).
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

Registering a certificate

Exporting a certificate

Finish

d Reference
The user can also obtain a device certificate by receiving an E-mail with a digital signature from this machine.
For details on how to send an E-mail with a digital signature from this machine, refer to page 2-54.

2.9.1 Registering a certificate

Register a device certificate.
For details, refer to page 2-15.

2.9.2 Exporting a certificate

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Security" ö "PKI Setting" ö "Device
Certificate Setting" ö [Setting] ö "Export Certificate".

Item Description Prior check

Password Enter the password (up to 32 characters).
The entered password is required when importing a certif-
icate.
Retype Password Reenter the password for confirmation (up to 32 charac-
ters).
[OK] Click this button to move to the Download page.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-24

2.9 Managing a device certificate
2
Clicking [Download] downloads a certificate in your computer.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-25

2.10 Registering a user certificate in this machine
2
2.10 Registering a user certificate in this machine
Register a user certificate in this machine.
There are two methods of registering a certificate: (1) directly specifying a certificate when registering an E-
mail address and (2) automatically registering a certificate by sending an E-mail with a digital signature to this
machine.
Registering a user certificate in this machine enables you to send an encrypted E-mail from this machine to
the user using the registered certificate (public key).
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

(1) Manual registration

(2) Automatic registration

(1) (2)

E-mail Automatically Obtain Certifi-

cates

Do you validate the certifi-

cate?

No Yes

Certificate validation

Finish

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-26

2.10 Registering a user certificate in this machine
2
2.10.1 E-mail
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Store Address" ö "Address Book" ö
"Store Address" ö [New Registration] ö "E-mail".

Item Description Prior check

Registration of Select the "Registration of Certification Information" Where to save a cer-
Certification Infor- check box. Click [Browse], and specify where to save the tificate
mation certificate information to be registered.
Certificate information is supported only as a DER (Distin-
guished Encoding Rules) file.
Clicking "Deletion of Certification Information" deletes the
registered certificate information.
You cannot register a certificate if the E-mail address to be
registered as a destination does not match that of the user
certificate. Before registering a certificate, check that
those E-mail addresses are the same.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-27

2.10 Registering a user certificate in this machine
2
2.10.2 Automatically Obtain Certificates
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "E-Mail Setting" ö
"S/MIME".

Item Description Prior check

S/MIME Comm. Select "ON".
Setting
Automatically Ob- Select "ON".
tain Certificates
Print S/MIME infor- To print S/MIME information, select "ON".
mation

Reference
- Before you register a certificate, you must register the E-mail address of the user for the certificate with
this machine.
- "Automatically Obtain Certificates" is available only when this machine can receive an E-mail. For
details on settings for receiving an E-mail, refer to page 2-78.
- When the conditions above are satisfied, send an E-mail with a digital signature from a computer
connected to a network to this machine. The received certificate is automatically registered if the user's
E-mail address registered in this machine matches the E-mail address registered in the certificate.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-28

2.10 Registering a user certificate in this machine
2
2.10.3 Certificate validation

Certificate Verification Level Settings

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "E-Mail Setting" ö
"S/MIME".

Item Description Prior check

Certificate Verifica- Specify how to validate a certificate.
tion Level Settings
Validity Period Select whether to check that the target certificate is within
the validity period.
Key Usage Select whether to check that the certificate is used ac-
cording to the purpose approved by the issuer.
Chain Select whether to check that the certificate chain (certifi-
cation path) is correct.
The chain is validated by referencing the external certifi-
cates managed on this machine. For details, refer to
page 2-210.
Expiration Date Select whether to check that the target certificate is within
Confirmation the validity period.
The OCSP service and CRL (Certificate Revocation List)
are checked in this order when the expiration date of the
certificate is checked.

Certificate Verification Settings

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Security" ö "Certificate Verification
Settings".

Item Description Prior check

Certificate Verifica- Select "ON" to validate the certificate.
tion Settings
Timeout Enter a timeout period for expiration date confirmation. Do you confirm the
expiration date?
OCSP Service Select this check box to use the OCSP service.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-29

2.10 Registering a user certificate in this machine
2
Item Description Prior check
URL Enter the URL of the OCSP service (up to 511 characters).
If this item is left blank, the machine accesses the URL of
the OCSP service embedded in the certificate. If the URL
of the OCSP service is not embedded in the certificate, an
error will occur.
Proxy Server Ad- To confirm the expiration date via a proxy server, enter its Server address
dress address.
Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255)
If the DNS server has already been configured, you can
enter the host name instead.
If "IPv6" is set to "ON", you can also specify the IPv6 ad-
dress.
Proxy Server Port Enter the port number of a proxy server. Server port number
Number
User Name Enter the user name to log in to the proxy server (up to 63
characters).
Password is Select this check box to change the password.
changed.
Password Enter the password to log in to the proxy server (up to 63
characters).
Address not using To enable expiration date confirmation, specify an ad-
Proxy Server dress that does not use the proxy server depending on
your environment.
If the DNS server has already been configured, you can
enter the host name instead.
If "IPv6" is set to "ON", you can also specify the IPv6 ad-
dress.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-30

2.11 Specifying the date and time of this machine
2
2.11 Specifying the date and time of this machine
Specify the date and time of the clock built into this machine.
Select one of two procedures: manually specifying the date and time and obtaining them from the NTP server
via the network.
Before using Fax in this machine, specify the date and time of this machine. When logging in to Active
Directory, specify the date and time of this machine as required.
When using the following options, specify the date and time. For details, refer to the relevant reference page.
- Searching for the E-mail address in the LDAP server (p. 2-60)
- Restricting users of this machine (Active Directory) (p. 2-137)
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

Do you use NTP?

No Yes

Manual Setting TCP/IP Settings

Time Zone

Timer Adjustment Setting

Finish

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-31

2.11 Specifying the date and time of this machine
2
2.11.1 Manual Setting
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Maintenance" ö "Date/Time Setting" ö
"Manual Setting".

Item Description Prior check

Year Enter the year.
Month Enter the month.
Day Enter the day.
Hour Enter the hour.
Minute Enter the minute.
Time Zone Specify the time difference from GMT. Time Zone
Daylight Saving Specify the daylight saving time as required.
Time

2.11.2 TCP/IP Settings

Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

2.11.3 Time Zone

Specify the time zone on the Manual Setting screen.
For details, refer to page 2-32.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-32

2.11 Specifying the date and time of this machine
2
2.11.4 Timer Adjustment Setting
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Maintenance" ö "Date/Time Setting" ö
"Timer Adjustment Setting".

Item Description Prior check

Timer Adjustment Select "ON".
Setting
Auto IPv6 Retrieval To automatically obtain the IPv6 address of the NTP serv- Can the IPv6 ad-
er, select "ON". dress be obtained
This item is necessary when IPv6 is used while DHCPv6 is automatically?
enabled.
NTP Server Ad- Enter the NTP server address. Server address
dress Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255)
If the DNS server has already been configured, you can
enter the host name instead.
If "IPv6" is set to "ON", you can also specify the IPv6 ad-
dress.
Port No. Enter the port number. Server port number
Default setting: 123
Auto Timer Adjust- To automatically connect to the NTP server and correct Can the time be cor-
ment the time, select "ON". rected automatical-
ly?
Polling Interval When automatically correcting the time, specify its interval
on a hour basis.
[Adjust] Click this button to connect to the NTP server in the spec-
ified conditions and adjust the time.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-33

2.12 Sending scanned data to a computer on network
2
2.12 Sending scanned data to a computer on network
Configure settings to send scanned data to a computer on network (SMB transmission).
Before SMB transmission, specify a Windows shared file in the computer to receive data in. If Samba is
installed, data can be transmitted to a computer that is equipped with a non-Windows OS. SMB transmission
is also available for the CIFS service (TCP/IP) that is running on the NetWare server.
To specify a computer over a router using the Windows name (NetBIOS name), use the WINS server.
To perform SMB sending in the IPv6 environment, enable the direct hosting service. Enabling the direct
hosting service allows you to specify the destination computer with the IPv6 address or computer name (host
name). When specify the destination with the computer name (host name), use the DNS server to obtain the
IPv6 address.
To send data to a computer with Windows Vista/Server 2008 installed, you can perform name resolution
using the LLMNR function even if DNS server is not present. To perform the name resolution especially in the
IPv6-only communication environment under Windows Vista/Server 2008, it will be convenient to enable the
LLMNR function.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

TCP/IP Settings

Client Setting

IPv6 environment?
No Yes

Do you use the WINS server? Direct Hosting Setting

Yes No

WINS Setting

Do you send data to Win-

dows Vista/Server 2008?

No Yes

LLMNR Setting

Finish

d Reference
For details on how to register the SMB address, refer to page 2-232.
For details on SMB file sending, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".

2.12.1 TCP/IP Settings

Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
- To specify the destination computer with the computer name (host name) for SMB transmission in IPv6
environment, prepare a DNS server and configure DNS settings in this machine.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-34

2.12 Sending scanned data to a computer on network
2
2.12.2 Client Setting
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "SMB Setting" ö "Client
Setting".

Item Description Prior check

SMB TX Setting Select "ON".
NTLM setting Specify the NTLM version. OS of destination
To perform SMB transmission for Windows sharing (Mac computer
OSX) or Samba (Linux/Unix), select "v1".
To perform SMB transmission for Windows 98SE or Win-
dows Me, select "v1/v2" or "v1".
DFS setting To perform SMB transmission in a DFS (Distributed File DFS environment?
System) environment, select "Enable".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-35

2.12 Sending scanned data to a computer on network
2
2.12.3 WINS Setting
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "SMB Setting" ö "WINS
Setting".

Item Description Prior check

WINS To use the WINS server, select "ON".
WINS Auto Obtain To automatically obtain the WINS server address, select Can it be obtained
Setting "Enable". automatically using
This item is necessary when DHCP is enabled. DHCP?
WINS Server Ad- Enter the WINS server address. Server address
dress 1 to WINS Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255)
Server Address 2
Node Type Setting Specify the name resolution method.
• B Node: Query by broadcast
• P Node: Query the WINS server
• M Node: Query by broadcast, and then query the
WINS server
• H Node: Query the WINS server, and then query by
broadcast

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-36

2.12 Sending scanned data to a computer on network
2
2.12.4 Direct Hosting Setting
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "SMB Setting" ö "Direct
Hosting Setting".

Item Description Prior check

Direct Hosting Set- To use IPv6 addresses for communication, select "ON". IPv6 environment?
ting

2.12.5 LLMNR Setting

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "TCP/IP Settings" ö "TCP/IP
Settings".

Item Description Prior check

LLMNR Setting To perform name resolution to send data to a computer • Is the computer
with Windows Vista/Server 2008 installed in the environ- Windows Vista/
ment where the DNS server is not running, select "Ena- Server 2008?
ble". • Is the DNS server
To perform the name resolution especially in the IPv6-only not used?
communication environment, enable this setting.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-37

2.13 Sending scanned data to your computer (Scan to Home)
2
2.13 Sending scanned data to your computer (Scan to Home)
Configure settings to send scanned data to your computer.
This function is available when the user's Home folder position is registered after user authentication has
been performed with Active Directory.
If the login user's Home folder is registered in Active Directory, the [Home] is displayed when the destination
has been selected. Click the [Home] to enable you to easily send data to your Home folder.
To authenticate the user to send data to the Home folder, use the user name and password specified in "User
Name" and "Password" that are authenticated by Active Directory.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

TCP/IP Settings

User authentication (Ac-

tive Directory)

Scan to Home Settings

Client Setting

IPv6 environment?
No Yes

Do you use the WINS server? Direct Hosting Setting

Yes No

WINS Setting

Do you send data to

Windows Vista/
Server 2008?

No Yes

LLMNR Setting

Finish

Reference
- To use the Scan to Home function, the Home folder of the user must be registered in Active Directory.
Also, the user's E-mail address or fax number must be registered.
- When you register the location of the Home folder in Active Directory, use uppercase letters to specify
a computer that has the Home folder using the NetBIOS name.
- For details on how to send a file to the Home folder using SMB, refer to the "User's Guide [Network
Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-38

2.13 Sending scanned data to your computer (Scan to Home)
2
2.13.1 TCP/IP Settings
Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
- To specify the destination computer with the computer name (host name) for SMB transmission in IPv6
environment, prepare a DNS server and configure DNS settings in this machine.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

2.13.2 User authentication (Active Directory)

Configure settings to restrict users who use this machine with Active Directory.
For details, refer to page 2-137.

2.13.3 Scan to Home Settings

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "User Authentication/Account Track" ö
"Scan to Home Settings".

Item Description Prior check

Scan to Home Set- Select "Enable".
tings

2.13.4 Client Setting

Configure SMB client settings.
For details, refer to page 2-35.

2.13.5 WINS Setting

To perform SMB transmission via routers, configure the WINS server settings.
For details, refer to page 2-36.

2.13.6 Direct Hosting Setting

To perform SMB transmission in an IPv6 environment, enable the Direct Hosting service.
For details, refer to page 2-37.

2.13.7 LLMNR Setting

To perform name resolution in the environment configured to communicate with Windows Vista/Server 2008,
and where the DNS server is not running, enable the LLMNR function.
For details, refer to page 2-37.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-39

2.14 Restricting the use of the SMB address registered in the address book
2
2.14 Restricting the use of the SMB address registered in the address
book
Configure settings to restrict the use of the SMB address registered in the address book.
When the login user selects the required SMB address from the address book to send data, the system
performs SMB authentication using the user name and password, which are specified in "User Name" and
"Password" for user authentication. This allows you to restrict third party use of the SMB address because
you do not need to register "User ID" and "Password" of the SMB address in the address book that anyone
can access.
To use this function, do not enter any characters in "User ID" and "Password" of the SMB address.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

TCP/IP Settings

User Authentication

Scan to Authorized Folder

Settings

Client Setting

IPv6 environment?
No Yes

Do you use the WINS server? Direct Hosting Setting

Yes No

WINS Setting

Do you send data to

Windows Vista/
Server 2008?

No Yes

LLMNR Setting

Finish

d Reference
If "Scan to Authorized Folder Settings" is set to "Limit", you cannot use some functions. For details, refer to
page 2-218.
For details on how to register the SMB address, refer to page 2-232.

2.14.1 TCP/IP Settings

Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
- To specify the destination computer with the computer name (host name) for SMB transmission in IPv6
environment, prepare a DNS server and configure DNS settings in this machine.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-40

2.14 Restricting the use of the SMB address registered in the address book
2
2.14.2 User Authentication
Configure settings to restrict users who use this machine.
For details, refer to the following reference pages.
- Restricting users of this machine (MFP authentication) (p. 2-129)
- Restricting users of this machine (Active Directory) (p. 2-137)
- Restricting users of this machine (Windows domain or workgroup) (p. 2-142)
- Restricting users of this machine (NDS over TCP/IP) (p. 2-149)
- Restricting users of this machine (LDAP) (p. 2-152)

2.14.3 Scan to Authorized Folder Settings

Configure settings to restrict the sending destinations.
For details, refer to page 2-218.

2.14.4 Client Setting

Configure SMB client settings.
For details, refer to page 2-35.

2.14.5 WINS Setting

To perform SMB transmission via routers, configure the WINS server settings.
For details, refer to page 2-36.

2.14.6 Direct Hosting Setting

To perform SMB transmission in an IPv6 environment, enable the Direct Hosting service.
For details, refer to page 2-37.

2.14.7 LLMNR Setting

To perform name resolution in the environment configured to communicate with Windows Vista/Server 2008,
and where the DNS server is not running, enable the LLMNR function.
For details, refer to page 2-37.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-41

2.15 Sending scanned data by E-mail
2
2.15 Sending scanned data by E-mail
Configure settings to send scanned data to the specified E-mail address as an attachment file.
These settings are available when the SMTP server supports SMTP over SSL or Start TLS. SSL/TLS enables
data encryption, assuring a secure communication between this machine and the SMTP server.
If SMTP authentication is requested from the SMTP server, configure its settings.
If POP before SMTP authentication is requested from the SMTP server, configure its settings. These settings
are available when the POP server supports POP over SSL or APOP authentication.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings.

TCP/IP Settings

E-mail Transmis-
sion (SMTP)

Do you have an SMTP authenti- POP before SMTP?

SSL/TLS communi- cation?
cation with the
SMTP server?

Yes No Yes No Yes No

SMTP over SMTP Authenti- POP before SMTP

SSL/Start TLS cation

(1) POP over SSL?

(2) APOP?

Yes No

(1)POP over SSL

(2)APOP Authenti-
cation

Finish

d Reference
For details on how to register E-mail addresses, refer to page 2-232.
For details on how to send a file by E-mail, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax
Operations]".

2.15.1 TCP/IP Settings

Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-42

2.15 Sending scanned data by E-mail
2
2.15.2 E-mail Transmission (SMTP)

E-mail Transmission (SMTP)

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "E-mail Setting" ö "E-mail
Transmission (SMTP)".

Item Description Prior check

E-mail TX Setting Select the "E-mail TX Setting" check box.
Scan to E-mail Select "ON".
SMTP Server Ad- Enter the SMTP server address. Server address
dress Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255)
If the DNS server has already been configured, you can
enter the host name instead.
If "IPv6" is set to "ON", you can also specify the IPv6 ad-
dress.
Port Number Enter the port number. Server port number
Default setting: 25
Connection Time- Specify the timeout period for a communication with a
out server.
Max Mail Size Select whether to limit the size of an E-mail to be sent.
Server Capacity Enter the SMTP server capacity. A mail that exceeds the Server reception limit
upper limit of the server capacity will be discarded.
If an E-mail is divided, this setting is made invalid.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-43

2.15 Sending scanned data by E-mail
2
Item Description Prior check
Admin. E-mail Ad- Displays the E-mail address of the administrator.
dress
Binary Division Select this check box to divide an E-mail. Restoration function
If the E-mail software that received an E-mail does not of E-mail software
have a restoration function, you may not be able to read
the E-mail.
Divided Mail Size Enter the divided mail size to divide an E-mail. Server reception limit

Admin. E-mail Address

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "System Settings" ö "Machine Setting".

Item Description Prior check

E-mail Address Enter the administrator's E-mail address (up to 128 char- E-mail address of the
acters). administrator
If the administrator's E-mail address is omitted, you will
not be able to send an E-mail.
Usually, the administrator's E-mail address is set to the
From address of the E-mail to be sent from this machine.
To enable user authentication, the user's E-mail address
is set to the From address. However, when the user's E-
mail address is not registered or S/MIME is used to send
an E-mail, the administrator's E-mail address is set to the
From address.
If "Security" ö "Restrict User Access" ö "Change the
"From" Address" is set to "Enable", the user can change
the From address before sending an E-mail.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-44

2.15 Sending scanned data by E-mail
2
2.15.3 SMTP over SSL/Start TLS

E-mail Transmission (SMTP)

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "E-mail Setting" ö "E-mail
Transmission (SMTP)".

Item Description Prior check

Use SSL/TLS To encrypt a communication between this machine and Does the server sup-
the SMTP server using SSL/TLS, select "SMTP over SSL" port SSL or Start
or "Start TLS". TLS?
Port Number Enter a port number if "Start TLS" is selected. Server port number
Default setting: 25
Port Number (SSL) Enter the port number to be used for SSL communication Server port number
if "SMTP over SSL" is selected.
Default setting: 465
Certificate Verifica- To verify the server certificate, configure settings to verify
tion Level Settings the certificate.
Validity Period Select whether to check that the server certificate is within
the validity period.
CN Select whether to check that the CN of the server certifi-
cate matches the server address.
Key Usage Select whether to check that the server certificate is used
according to the purpose approved by the issuer.
Chain Select whether to check that the server certificate chain
(certification path) is correct.
The chain is validated by referencing the external certifi-
cates managed on this machine. For details, refer to
page 2-210.
Expiration Date Select whether to check that the server certificate is within
Confirmation the validity period.
The OCSP service and CRL (Certificate Revocation List)
are checked in this order when the expiration date of the
certificate is checked.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-45

2.15 Sending scanned data by E-mail
2
Certificate Verification Settings
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Security" ö "Certificate Verification
Settings".

Item Description Prior check

Certificate Verifica- Select "ON" to verify the server certificate.
tion Settings
Timeout Enter a timeout period for expiration date confirmation. Do you confirm the
expiration date?
OCSP Service Select this check box to use the OCSP service.
URL Enter the URL of the OCSP service (up to 511 characters).
If this item is left blank, the machine accesses the URL of
the OCSP service embedded in the certificate. If the URL
of the OCSP service is not embedded in the certificate, an
error will occur.
Proxy Server Ad- To confirm the expiration date via a proxy server, enter its Server address
dress address.
Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255)
If the DNS server has already been configured, you can
enter the host name instead.
If "IPv6" is set to "ON", you can also specify the IPv6 ad-
dress.
Proxy Server Port Enter the port number of a proxy server. Server port number
Number
User Name Enter the user name to log in to the proxy server (up to 63
characters).
Password is Select this check box to change the password.
changed
Password Enter the password to log in to the proxy server (up to 63
characters).
Address not using To enable expiration date confirmation, specify an ad-
Proxy Server dress that does not use the proxy server depending on
your environment.
If the DNS server has already been configured, you can
enter the host name instead.
If "IPv6" is set to "ON", you can also specify the IPv6 ad-
dress.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-46

2.15 Sending scanned data by E-mail
2
2.15.4 SMTP Authentication
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "E-mail Setting" ö "E-mail
Transmission (SMTP)".

Item Description Prior check

SMTP Authentica- Select this check box to perform SMTP authentication. Is SMTP authentica-
tion For SMTP authentication, the authentication method with tion requested by the
the highest strength that is supported by the SMTP server server?
is automatically selected from Digest-MD5, CRAM-MD5,
PLAIN, and LOGIN.
User ID Enter the user ID for SMTP authentication (up to 255
bytes).
Password is Select this check box to change the password.
changed
Password Enter the password for SMTP authentication (up to 128
bytes, excluding space and double quotation (")).
Domain name Enter the domain name (realm) for SMTP authentication Authentication Meth-
(up to 255 characters). od
This setting is required when the authentication method is
set to Digest-MD5.
If there is only one user domain (realm), you do not need
to enter this item because the domain name is reported
from the SMTP server at initial communication, and with
the domain name, a communication is established auto-
matically. If there are two or more user domains (realm),
specify the user domain name.
Authentication Set- For user authentication, select whether to synchronize Synchronized with
ting SMTP authentication with user authentication. user authentication?
Selecting "User Authentication" uses the user name and
password for user authentication as those for SMTP au-
thentication.
Selecting "Set Value" uses the values specified in "User
ID" and "Password".

2.15.5 POP before SMTP

POP before SMTP

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "E-mail Setting" ö "E-mail
Transmission (SMTP)".

Item Description Prior check

POP before SMTP Select "ON" to perform POP before SMTP authentication. Is POP before SMTP
authentication re-
quested by the serv-
er?
POP before SMTP Enter the period from a time you log in to the POP server Are the POP and
Time to a time you access the SMTP server. SMTP servers in dif-
If the POP and SMTP servers are in different computers, it ferent computers?
will take time to notify the SMTP server that you have
logged in to the POP server. Therefore, if a too short time
is specified, sending of E-mails may fail.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-47

2.15 Sending scanned data by E-mail
2
E-Mail RX (POP)
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "E-mail Setting" ö "E-mail
RX (POP)".

Item Description Prior check

E-mail RX Setting Select "ON" to perform POP before SMTP authentication.
POP Server Ad- Enter the POP server address. Server address
dress Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255)
If the DNS server has already been configured, you can
enter the host name instead.
If "IPv6" is set to "ON", you can also specify the IPv6 ad-
dress.
Login Name Enter the login name of the POP server (up to 63 charac-
ters).
Password is Select this check box to change the password.
changed.
Password Enter the password to log in to the POP server (up to 15
characters).
Connection Time- Specify the timeout period for a communication with a
out server.
Port Number Enter the port number. Server port number
Default setting: 110

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-48

2.15 Sending scanned data by E-mail
2
2.15.6 POP over SSL

E-Mail RX (POP)
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "E-mail Setting" ö "E-mail
RX (POP)".

Item Description Prior check

Use SSL/TLS Select this check box to encrypt a communication be- Does the server sup-
tween this machine and POP server. port SSL?
Port Number (SSL) Enter the port number to be used for SSL communication. Server port number
Default setting: 995
Certificate Verifica- To verify the server certificate, configure settings to verify
tion Level Settings the certificate.
Validity Period Select whether to check that the server certificate is within
the validity period.
CN Select whether to check that the CN of the server certifi-
cate matches the server address.
Key Usage Select whether to check that the server certificate is used
according to the purpose approved by the issuer.
Chain Select whether to check that the server certificate chain
(certification path) is correct.
The chain is validated by referencing the external certifi-
cates managed on this machine. For details, refer to
page 2-210.
Expiration Date Select whether to check that the server certificate is within
Confirmation the validity period.
The OCSP service and CRL (Certificate Revocation List)
are checked in this order when the expiration date of the
certificate is checked.

Certificate Verification Settings

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Security" ö "Certificate Verification
Settings".

Item Description Prior check

Certificate Verifica- Select "ON" to verify the server certificate.
tion Settings

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-49

2.15 Sending scanned data by E-mail
2
Item Description Prior check
Timeout Enter a timeout period for expiration date confirmation. Do you confirm the
expiration date?
OCSP Service Select this check box to use the OCSP service.
URL Enter the URL of the OCSP service (up to 511 characters).
If this item is left blank, the machine accesses the URL of
the OCSP service embedded in the certificate. If the URL
of the OCSP service is not embedded in the certificate, an
error will occur.
Proxy Server Ad- To confirm the expiration date via a proxy server, enter its Server address
dress address.
Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255)
If the DNS server has already been configured, you can
enter the host name instead.
If "IPv6" is set to "ON", you can also specify the IPv6 ad-
dress.
Proxy Server Port Enter the port number of a proxy server. Server port number
Number
User Name Enter the user name to log in to the proxy server (up to 63
characters).
Password is Select this check box to change the password.
changed.
Password Enter the password to log in to the proxy server (up to 63
characters).
Address not using To enable expiration date confirmation, specify an ad-
Proxy Server dress that does not use the proxy server depending on
your environment.
If the DNS server has already been configured, you can
enter the host name instead.
If "IPv6" is set to "ON", you can also specify the IPv6 ad-
dress.

2.15.7 APOP Authentication

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "E-mail Setting" ö "E-mail
RX (POP)".

Item Description Prior check

APOP Authentica- Select "ON" to encrypt the login name and password Is APOP authentica-
tion when logging in to the POP server. tion requested by the
The password is encrypted with MD5 to log in to the POP server?
server using APOP. Before you select "ON", check wheth-
er the POP server supports APOP. If the POP server does
not support APOP, it results in an error, causing a commu-
nication failure.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-50

2.16 Sending scanned data to the user's E-mail address (Scan to Me)
2
2.16 Sending scanned data to the user's E-mail address (Scan to Me)
Configure settings to send scanned data to the user's E-mail address.
This function is available when user authentication is enabled and the E-mail address of the user is registered
as user information.
If the E-mail address of a logged in user is registered, the [Me] is displayed as a destination, and the user can
simply select the [Me] to send the data to the user's own E-mail address.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

TCP/IP Settings

User Authentica-
tion

E-mail Transmis-
sion (SMTP)

Do you have an SMTP authenti- POP before

SSL/TLS communi- cation? SMTP?
cation with the
SMTP server?

Yes No Yes No Yes No

SMTP over SMTP Authenti- POP before SMTP

SSL/Start TLS cation

(1) POP over SSL?

(2) APOP?

Yes No

(1)POP over SSL

(2)APOP Authenti-
cation

Finish

d Reference
For details on how to send a file to the user's own E-mail address, refer to the "User's Guide [Network
Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".

2.16.1 TCP/IP Settings

Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-51

2.16 Sending scanned data to the user's E-mail address (Scan to Me)
2
2.16.2 User Authentication
Configure settings to restrict users who use this machine.

When the MFP authentication is selected

When the MFP authentication is selected, do the following.
- Configure the settings required for the MFP authentication
- Register the E-mail address of each user when registering users
For details on the settings for the MFP authentication and user registration, refer to page 2-129.

When the Active Directory authentication is selected

When the Active Directory authentication is selected, do the following.
- Configure the settings required for the Active Directory authentication
- Register the E-mail address of each of the users from this machine with the server to enable this
machine to obtain the address using the LDAP protocol
For details on Active Directory authentication settings, refer to page 2-137.

When the NTLM or NDS authentication is selected

When the NTLM or NDS authentication is selected, do the following.
- Configure the settings required for the NTLM or NDS authentication
- Register the E-mail address of each user in User Registration
For details on NTLM authentication settings, refer to page 2-142.
For details on NDS over IPX/SPX authentication settings, refer to page 2-146.
For details on NDS over TCP/IP authentication settings, refer to page 2-149.

2.16.3 E-mail Transmission (SMTP)

Configure settings to send an E-mail.
For details, refer to page 2-43.

2.16.4 SMTP over SSL/Start TLS

Configure the settings for SMTP over SSL or Start TLS.
For details, refer to page 2-45.

2.16.5 SMTP Authentication

Configure SMTP authentication settings.
For details, refer to page 2-47.

2.16.6 POP before SMTP

Configure the settings for POP before SMTP.
For details, refer to page 2-47.

2.16.7 POP over SSL

Configure the settings for POP over SSL.
For details, refer to page 2-49.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-52

2.16 Sending scanned data to the user's E-mail address (Scan to Me)
2
2.16.8 APOP Authentication
Configure APOP authentication settings.
For details, refer to page 2-50.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-53

2.17 Sending scanned data by E-mail (with digital signature)
2
2.17 Sending scanned data by E-mail (with digital signature)
Configure settings to send scanned data by E-mail with a digital signature.
Sending an E-mail with a digital signature enables you to prove that the E-mail has been sent from this
machine and also to send a device certificate to the user. Using the obtained certificate (public key), the user
can send an encrypted E-mail to this machine.
If necessary, you can combine POP before SMTP authentication, APOP authentication, SMTP
authentication, and SSL/TLS encryption to have a communication.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

TCP/IP Settings

E-mail Transmis-
sion (SMTP)

Registering a cer-
tificate

S/MIME

Do you have an SMTP authenti- POP before SMTP?

SSL/TLS communi- cation?
cation with the
SMTP server?

Yes No Yes No Yes No

SMTP over SMTP Authenti- POP before SMTP

SSL/Start TLS cation

(1) POP over SSL?

(2) APOP?

Yes No

(1)POP over SSL

(2)APOP Authenti-
cation

Finish

2.17.1 TCP/IP Settings

Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

2.17.2 E-mail Transmission (SMTP)

Configure settings to send an E-mail.
For details, refer to page 2-43.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-54

2.17 Sending scanned data by E-mail (with digital signature)
2
2.17.3 Registering a certificate
Register a device certificate.
- You cannot send an E-mail if the administrator address of the device certificate used for digital
signature does not match the From address of the E-mail.
For details, refer to page 2-15.

2.17.4 S/MIME
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "E-Mail Setting" ö
"S/MIME".

Item Description Prior check

S/MIME Comm. Select "ON".
Setting
Digital Signature Select "Always add signature" or "Select when sending".

2.17.5 SMTP over SSL/Start TLS

Configure the settings for SMTP over SSL or Start TLS.
For details, refer to page 2-45.

2.17.6 SMTP Authentication

Configure SMTP authentication settings.
For details, refer to page 2-47.

2.17.7 POP before SMTP

Configure the settings for POP before SMTP.
For details, refer to page 2-47.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-55

2.17 Sending scanned data by E-mail (with digital signature)
2
2.17.8 POP over SSL
Configure the settings for POP over SSL.
For details, refer to page 2-49.

2.17.9 APOP Authentication

Configure APOP authentication settings.
For details, refer to page 2-50.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-56

2.18 Sending scanned data by E-mail (Encryption by public key)
2
2.18 Sending scanned data by E-mail (Encryption by public key)
Configure settings to encrypt an E-mail using the user certificate (public key) registered in this machine when
sending scanned data by E-mail.
Sending an encrypted E-mail prevents information from being leaked to the third party on the transmission
route. Combining a digital signature with an E-mail also enables you to perform the authentication of this
machine and message. For details on settings for attaching a digital signature to an E-mail, refer to
page 2-54.
If necessary, you can combine POP before SMTP authentication, APOP authentication, SMTP
authentication, and SSL/TLS encryption to have a communication.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

TCP/IP Settings

E-mail Transmis-
sion (SMTP)

S/MIME

Do you have an SMTP authenti- POP before SMTP?

SSL/TLS communi- cation?
cation with the
SMTP server?

Yes No Yes No Yes No

SMTP over SMTP Authenti- POP before SMTP

SSL/Start TLS cation

(1) POP over SSL?

(2) APOP?

Yes No

(1)POP over SSL

(2)APOP Authenti-
cation

Finish

d Reference
You cannot select an address with no certificate registered. To send an encrypted E-mail, pre-register the
user certificate in this machine. For details, refer to page 2-26.

2.18.1 TCP/IP Settings

Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-57

2.18 Sending scanned data by E-mail (Encryption by public key)
2
2.18.2 E-mail Transmission (SMTP)
Configure settings to send an E-mail.
For details, refer to page 2-43.

2.18.3 S/MIME
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "E-Mail Setting" ö
"S/MIME".

Item Description Prior check

S/MIME Comm. Select "ON".
Setting
E-Mail Text En- Specify the E-mail text encryption format.
crypt. Method

2.18.4 SMTP over SSL/Start TLS

Configure the settings for SMTP over SSL or Start TLS.
For details, refer to page 2-45.

2.18.5 SMTP Authentication

Configure SMTP authentication settings.
For details, refer to page 2-47.

2.18.6 POP before SMTP

Configure the settings for POP before SMTP.
For details, refer to page 2-47.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-58

2.18 Sending scanned data by E-mail (Encryption by public key)
2
2.18.7 POP over SSL
Configure the settings for POP over SSL.
For details, refer to page 2-49.

2.18.8 APOP Authentication

Configure APOP authentication settings.
For details, refer to page 2-50.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-59

2.19 Searching for the E-mail address in the LDAP server
2
2.19 Searching for the E-mail address in the LDAP server
Configure settings to search for the E-mail address in the LDAP server.
When the LDAP server is used for user management, you can search for the E-mail address in the LDAP
server. Configuring these settings displays [Address Search] on the control panel. This function saves many
steps to register E-mail addresses in this machine by using the LDAP server when specifying recipient
addresses.
To select Active Directory as the LDAP server and "GSS-SPNEGO" as the authentication method, specify the
DNS server associated with Active Directory in the DNS server settings of this machine, and also specify the
date and time of this machine.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.
Reference
- To use the same LDAP server for destination search and for user authentication, the LDAP server
certificate verification setting for destination search specified in "Setting Up LDAP" is also applicable
to the LDAP server certificate verification setting for user authentication specified in "User
Authentication/ Account Track" ö "External Server Settings". For details on configuring the LDAP
server for user authentication and certificate verification, refer to page 2-152.

TCP/IP Settings

LDAP Settings

Setting up the LDAP

server

Do you have an SSL com- Do you use Active Directo-

munication with the LDAP ry (GSS-SPNEGO)?
server?

Yes No No Yes

LDAP over SSL DNS server setting

Date/Time Setting

Finish

d Reference
For details on how to send an E-mail using the LDAP search function, refer to the "User's Guide [Network
Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".

2.19.1 TCP/IP Settings

Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-60

2.19 Searching for the E-mail address in the LDAP server
2
2.19.2 LDAP Settings
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "LDAP Setting" ö "LDAP
Setting".

Item Description Prior check

Enabling LDAP Select "ON".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-61

2.19 Searching for the E-mail address in the LDAP server
2
2.19.3 Setting up the LDAP server
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "LDAP Setting" ö "Setting
Up LDAP" ö [Edit].
Reference
- If the LDAP server is registered, press [Check Connection] on the LDAP Server List screen; you can
check if the LDAP server is available.

Item Description Prior check

LDAP Server Name Enter the name of an LDAP server (up to 32 characters).
Server Address Specify the LDAP server address. Server address
Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255)
If the DNS server has already been configured, you can
enter the host name instead.
If "IPv6" is set to "ON", you can also specify the IPv6 ad-
dress.
Port Number Enter the port number.
Default setting: 389
Search base Enter the search starting point in the directory structure Search base
under the LDAP server (up to 255 characters).
This search function also covers subdirectories under the
entered starting point.
Timeout Enter the timeout period for LDAP search.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-62

2.19 Searching for the E-mail address in the LDAP server
2
Item Description Prior check
Max. Search Re- Enter the maximum number of items that can be received
sults as LDAP search results.
Authentication Select the authentication method to log in to the LDAP Server authentica-
Method server. tion method
The authentication method must match that used in the
LDAP server.
If "anonymous" is selected, "Login Name", "Password",
and "Domain Name" can be omitted.
If "GSS-SPNEGO" is selected, log in to the server in the
Kerberos authentication method. The Kerberos authenti-
cation method is supported by Active Directory.
Login Name Enter the login name to log in to the LDAP server (up to
255 bytes).
Password is Select this check box to change the password.
changed
Password Enter the password to log in to the LDAP server (up to 128
bytes, excluding space and double quotation (")).
Domain name Enter the domain name to log in to the LDAP server (up to • Authentication
64 characters). Method
If "GSS-SPNEGO" is selected, enter the domain name of • Domain name
Active Directory.
Select Server Au- Select the server authentication method.
thentication Meth- Select "Use Setting" to use the specified login name,
od password, and domain name.
Select "Use User Authentication" to use the user name
and password specified for user authentication.
If "Dynamic Authentication" is selected, the system
prompts you to enter the user name and password at
LDAP searching.
Use Referral Select whether to use the referral function.
Make an appropriate choice to fit the LDAP server envi-
ronment.
Search Condition Select the attribute of the name used for LDAP searching. Name attribute
Attributes You can toggle this attribute between "Name" (cn) and
"Nickname" (displayName).
Initial Setting for Specify LDAP search conditions.
Search Details

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-63

2.19 Searching for the E-mail address in the LDAP server
2
2.19.4 LDAP over SSL

Setting up the LDAP server

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "LDAP Setting" ö "Setting
Up LDAP" ö [Edit].

Item Description Prior check

SSL Setting Select this check box to encrypt an SSL communication Does the server sup-
between this machine and the LDAP server. port SSL?
Port Number (SSL) Enter the port number to be used for SSL communication. Server port number
Default setting: 636
Certificate Verifica- To verify the server certificate, configure settings to verify
tion Level Settings the certificate.
Validity Period Select whether to check that the server certificate is within
the validity period.
CN Select whether to check that the CN of the server certifi-
cate matches the server address.
Key Usage Select whether to check that the server certificate is used
according to the purpose approved by the issuer.
Chain Select whether to check that the server certificate chain
(certification path) is correct.
The chain is validated by referencing the external certifi-
cates managed on this machine. For details, refer to
page 2-210.
Expiration Date Select whether to check that the server certificate is within
Confirmation the validity period.
The OCSP service and CRL (Certificate Revocation List)
are checked in this order when the expiration date of the
certificate is checked.

Certificate Verification Settings

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Security" ö "Certificate Verification
Settings".

Item Description Prior check

Certificate Verifica- Select "ON" to verify the server certificate.
tion Settings

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-64

2.19 Searching for the E-mail address in the LDAP server
2
Item Description Prior check
Timeout Enter a timeout period for expiration date confirmation. Do you confirm the
expiration date?
OCSP Service Select this check box to use the OCSP service.
URL Enter the URL of the OCSP service (up to 511 characters).
If this item is left blank, the machine accesses the URL of
the OCSP service embedded in the certificate. If the URL
of the OCSP service is not embedded in the certificate, an
error will occur.
Proxy Server Ad- To confirm the expiration date via a proxy server, enter its Server address
dress address.
Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255)
If the DNS server has already been configured, you can
enter the host name instead.
If "IPv6" is set to "ON", you can also specify the IPv6 ad-
dress.
Proxy Server Port Enter the port number of a proxy server. Server port number
Number
User Name Enter the user name to log in to the proxy server (up to 63
characters).
Password is Select this check box to change the password.
changed.
Password Enter the password to log in to the proxy server (up to 63
characters).
Address not using To enable expiration date confirmation, specify an ad-
Proxy Server dress that does not use the proxy server depending on
your environment.
If the DNS server has already been configured, you can
enter the host name instead.
If "IPv6" is set to "ON", you can also specify the IPv6 ad-
dress.

2.19.5 DNS server setting

To select Active Directory as the LDAP server and "GSS-SPNEGO" as the authentication method, specify the
DNS server associated with Active Directory in DNS Server Setting of this machine.
For details on DNS Server Setting, refer to page 2-6.

2.19.6 Date/Time Setting

To use Active Directory, specify the date and time of this machine.
For details, refer to page 2-31.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-65

2.20 Sending scanned data to the FTP server
2
2.20 Sending scanned data to the FTP server
Configure settings to send scanned data to the FTP server.
You can send scanned data to the specified folder in the FTP server via the network, which contains the FTP
server. This allows you to download the data sent to the FTP server from a computer via the network. This
function is suitable to send a large amount of data such as high-resolution data.
If a proxy server is in network environment, you can configure settings to access the FTP server on Internet
via the proxy server.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

TCP/IP Settings

FTP transmission setting

Finish

d Reference
For details on how to register the FTP address, refer to page 2-232.
For details on FTP file sending, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".

2.20.1 TCP/IP Settings

Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

2.20.2 FTP transmission setting

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "FTP Setting" ö "FTP TX
Setting".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-66

2.20 Sending scanned data to the FTP server
2
Item Description Prior check
FTP TX Select "ON".
Proxy Server Ad- To perform transmissions via a proxy server, enter its ad- Server address
dress dress.
Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255)
If the DNS server has already been configured, you can
enter the host name instead.
If "IPv6" is set to "ON", you can also specify the IPv6 ad-
dress.
Proxy Server Port Enter the port number of a proxy server. Server port number
Number
Connection Time- Enter the timeout period for a communication with a serv-
out er.
Port Number Enter the port number. Server port number
Default setting: 21

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-67

2.21 Sending scanned data to the WebDAV server
2
2.21 Sending scanned data to the WebDAV server
Configure settings to send scanned data to the WebDAV server.
You can send scanned data to the specified folder in the WebDAV server via the network, which contains the
WebDAV server. This allows you to download the data sent to the WebDAV server from a computer via the
network.
WebDAV, which is an extension to the HTTP specification, provides the same security technologies as HTTP.
Use SSL to encrypt a communication with the WebDAV server; you can send a file more securely.
If a proxy server is in network environment, you can configure settings to access the WebDAV server on
Internet via the proxy server.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

TCP/IP Settings

WebDAV client settings

Do you have an SSL com-

munication with the Web-
DAV server?

Yes No

WebDAV over SSL

Finish

d Reference
For details on how to register the WebDAV address, refer to page 2-232.
When registering the address, specify whether to send a file encrypted with SSL. For details, refer to
page 2-232.
For details on WebDAV file sending, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".

2.21.1 TCP/IP Settings

Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-68

2.21 Sending scanned data to the WebDAV server
2
2.21.2 WebDAV client settings
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "WebDAV Settings" ö
"WebDAV Client Settings".

Item Description Prior check

WebDAV TX Set- Select "ON".
ting
Proxy Server Ad- To perform transmissions via a proxy server, enter its ad- Server address
dress dress.
Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255)
If the DNS server has already been configured, you can
enter the host name instead.
If "IPv6" is set to "ON", you can also specify the IPv6 ad-
dress.
Proxy Server Port Enter the port number of a proxy server. Server port number
Number
User Name Enter the user name to log in to the proxy server (up to 63
characters).
Password is Select this check box to change the password.
changed
Password Enter the password to log in to the proxy server (up to 63
characters).
Chunk TX Select whether to enable chunk TX (batch transmission) or Method supported
non-chunk TX (split transmission) when sending data to by the server
the WebDAV server.
By default, it is set to "Non-Chunk TX".
Change the setting to fit the target WebDAV server.
Connection Time- Enter the timeout period for a communication with a serv-
out er.
Server Authentica- Select a character code to perform the authentication un-
tion Character der the WebDAV server.
Code You can use this setting when "Japanese" is specified for
the display language.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-69

2.21 Sending scanned data to the WebDAV server
2
2.21.3 WebDAV over SSL

Certificate Verification Level Settings

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "WebDAV Setting" ö
"WebDAV Client Setting".

Item Description Prior check

Certificate Verifica- To verify the server certificate, configure settings to verify
tion Level Settings the certificate.
Validity Period Select whether to check that the server certificate is within
the validity period.
CN Select whether to check that the CN of the server certifi-
cate matches the server address.
Key Usage Select whether to check that the server certificate is used
according to the purpose approved by the issuer.
Chain Select whether to check that the server certificate chain
(certification path) is correct.
The chain is validated by referencing the external certifi-
cates managed on this machine. For details, refer to
page 2-210.
Expiration Date Select whether to check that the server certificate is within
Confirmation the validity period.
The OCSP service and CRL (Certificate Revocation List)
are checked in this order when the expiration date of the
certificate is checked.

Certificate Verification Settings

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Security"ö"Certificate Verification
Settings".

Item Description Prior check

Certificate Verifica- Select "ON" to verify the server certificate.
tion Settings
Timeout Enter a timeout period for expiration date confirmation. Do you confirm the
expiration date?
OCSP Service Select this check box to use the OCSP service.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-70

2.21 Sending scanned data to the WebDAV server
2
Item Description Prior check
URL Enter the URL of the OCSP service (up to 511 characters).
If this item is left blank, the machine accesses the URL of
the OCSP service embedded in the certificate. If the URL
of the OCSP service is not embedded in the certificate, an
error will occur.
Proxy Server Ad- To confirm the expiration date via a proxy server, enter its Server address
dress address.
Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255)
If the DNS server has already been configured, you can
enter the host name instead.
If "IPv6" is set to "ON", you can also specify the IPv6 ad-
dress.
Proxy Server Port Enter the port number of a proxy server. Server port number
Number
User Name Enter the user name to log in to the proxy server (up to 63
characters).
Password is Select this check box to change the password.
changed
Password Enter the password to log in to the proxy server (up to 63
characters).
Address not using To enable expiration date confirmation, specify an ad-
Proxy Server dress that does not use the proxy server depending on
your environment.
If the DNS server has already been configured, you can
enter the host name instead.
If "IPv6" is set to "ON", you can also specify the IPv6 ad-
dress.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-71

2.22 Sending Internet faxes
2
2.22 Sending Internet faxes
Configure settings to send Internet fax.
To use the Internet fax function, ask your service representative to configure settings. For details, contact
your service representative.
Internet faxing sends and receives the read original as an E-mail attachment file (TIFF format) via Intranet or
Internet. It also allows you to send and receive a colored original.
The Internet fax function establishes a communication via Intranet or Internet; therefore, you can reduce the
communication cost compared with a general Fax communication when frequently handling remote or
overseas communications.
If necessary, you can combine POP before SMTP authentication, APOP authentication, SMTP
authentication, and SSL/TLS encryption to have a communication.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

TCP/IP Settings

Network Fax Func-

tion Settings

Machine Setting

Header Information

E-mail Transmis-
sion (SMTP)

Network Fax Set-

tings

Do you have an Do you use SMTP POP before

SSL/TLS commu- authentication? SMTP?
nication with the
SMTP server?

Yes No Yes No Yes No

SMTP over SMTP Authentica- POP before SMTP

SSL/Start TLS tion

(1) POP over SSL?

(2) APOP?

No Yes

(1)POP over SSL

(2)APOP Authenti-
cation

Finish

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-72

2.22 Sending Internet faxes
2
d Reference
For details on how to register Internet fax destinations, refer to page 2-232.
For details on the Internet fax function, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax
Operations]".

2.22.1 TCP/IP Settings

Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

2.22.2 Network Fax Function Settings

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "Network Fax Setting" ö
"Network Fax Function Settings".

Item Description Prior check

I-Fax Function Set- Select "ON".
ting

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-73

2.22 Sending Internet faxes
2
2.22.3 Machine Setting
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "System Settings" ö "Machine Setting".

Item Description Prior check

Device Name Enter the device name (up to 80 characters).
This name is used as a part of an Internet fax subject
name.
E-mail Address Enter the E-mail address of this machine (up to 320 char- E-mail Address
acters).
This setting is required when sending Internet faxes.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-74

2.22 Sending Internet faxes
2
2.22.4 Header Information
Register sender information for fax sending.
For details, refer to page 2-273.

2.22.5 E-mail Transmission (SMTP)

Configure settings to send an E-mail.
For details, refer to page 2-43.

2.22.6 Network Fax Settings

(This menu item will not be displayed if the Network Fax function is not available.)

I-Fax Advanced Setting

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Fax Settings" ö "Network Fax Setting"
ö "I-Fax Advanced Setting".
(This menu item will not be displayed if the Internet Fax function is not available.)

Item Description Prior check

MDN Request Select "ON".
You can receive an MDN response when an Internet fax is
printed in the receiver side.
By receiving an MDN response, you can obtain informa-
tion on the reception capability of the remote machine.
When an MDN response is received from a remote ma-
chine that is already registered in the address book, the in-
formation on the reception capability that has been
obtained will be overwritten.
DSN Request Select "ON".
You can receive a DSN response when an Internet fax ar-
rives in the mail server of the receiver side.
The DSN request is not issued when MDN is set to "ON".
MDN/DSN Re- Select this check box to specify the MDN/DSN response
sponse Monitoring monitoring time.
Setting

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-75

2.22 Sending Internet faxes
2
Item Description Prior check
Monitoring Time Enter the MDN/DSN response receiving wait time.
An MDN/DSN response is ignored if it does not reach
within this wait time.
Maximum Resolu- Select the highest resolution of read or transfer logs.
tion
Add Content-Type Select whether to add Content-Type information to the
Information MIME header.

Black Compression Level

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Fax Settings" ö "Network Fax Setting"
ö "Black Compression Level".

Item Description Prior check

Black Compres- Select the default setting of the black compression level in
sion Level the black and white sending mode.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-76

2.22 Sending Internet faxes
2
Color/Grayscale Multi-Value Compression Method
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Fax Settings" ö "Network Fax Setting"
ö "Color/Grayscale Multi-Value Compression Method".

Item Description Prior check

Color/Grayscale Select the default setting of the color/grayscale multi-val-
Multi-Value Com- ue compression method in the color sending mode.
pression Method

2.22.7 SMTP over SSL/Start TLS

Configure the settings for SMTP over SSL or Start TLS.
For details, refer to page 2-45.

2.22.8 SMTP Authentication

Configure SMTP authentication settings.
For details, refer to page 2-47.

2.22.9 POP before SMTP

Configure the settings for POP before SMTP.
For details, refer to page 2-47.

2.22.10 POP over SSL

Configure the settings for POP over SSL.
For details, refer to page 2-49.

2.22.11 APOP Authentication

Configure APOP authentication settings.
For details, refer to page 2-50.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-77

2.23 Receiving Internet faxes
2
2.23 Receiving Internet faxes
Configure settings to receive Internet faxes.
To use the Internet fax function, ask your service representative to configure settings. For details, contact
your service representative.
Internet faxing sends and receives the read original as an E-mail attachment file (TIFF format) via Intranet or
Internet. It also allows you to send and receive a colored original.
The Internet fax function establishes a communication via Intranet or Internet; therefore, you can reduce the
communication cost compared with a general Fax communication when frequently handling remote or
overseas communications.
This function performs SSL/TLS encryption or APOP authentication when receiving Internet faxes, assuring
more secure communications.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

TCP/IP Settings

Network Fax Function

Settings

E-Mail RX (POP)

Network Fax Settings

Do you have an SSL APOP?

communication with
the POP server?

Yes No Yes No

POP over SSL APOP Authentication

Finish

d Reference
For details on the Internet fax function, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax
Operations]".

2.23.1 TCP/IP Settings

Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

2.23.2 Network Fax Function Settings

Enables the Internet fax function of this machine.
For details, refer to page 2-73.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-78

2.23 Receiving Internet faxes
2
2.23.3 E-Mail RX (POP)
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "E-mail Setting" ö "E-mail
RX (POP)".

Item Description Prior check

E-mail RX Setting Select "ON".
POP Server Ad- Enter the POP server address. Server address
dress Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255)
If the DNS server has already been configured, you can
enter the host name instead.
If "IPv6" is set to "ON", you can also specify the IPv6 ad-
dress.
Login Name Enter the login name of the POP server (up to 63 charac-
ters).
Password is Select this check box to change the password.
changed.
Password Enter the password to log in to the POP server (up to 15
characters).
Connection Time- Specify the timeout period for a communication with a
out server.
Port Number Enter the port number. Server port number
Default setting: 110
Check for New Select this check box to automatically receive an E-mail.
Messages To manually receive an E-mail, press [Receive I-FAX] in
the Fax/Scan screen of the control panel.
Polling Interval Enter the interval to check the arrival by automatically con-
necting to the POP server.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-79

2.23 Receiving Internet faxes
2
2.23.4 Network Fax Settings
(This menu item will not be displayed if the Network Fax function is not available.)

I-Fax Advanced Setting

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Fax Settings" ö "Network Fax Setting"
ö "I-Fax Advanced Setting".
(This menu item will not be displayed if the Internet Fax function is not available.)

Item Description Prior check

MDN Response Select "ON" to respond to an MDN request (reception
confirmation request) from the remote side.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-80

2.23 Receiving Internet faxes
2
Internet Fax RX Ability
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Fax Settings" ö "Network Fax Setting"
ö "Internet Fax RX Ability".
(This menu item will not be displayed if the Internet Fax function is not available.)
Reference
- The recipient is notified of the RX Ability specified here when this machine sends an MDN response. To
enable the RX Ability, set "MDN Response" to "ON" in "I-Fax Advanced Settings".

Item Description Prior check

Compression Type Select the check box of the compression format that is
available for this machine to receive Internet fax.
All the compression formats available for this machine are
selected in Initial Setting.
Paper Size Select the check box of the paper size that is available for
this machine to receive Internet faxes.
All the paper sizes available for this machine are selected
by default.
Resolution Select the check box of the resolution that is available for
this machine to receive Internet faxes.

2.23.5 POP over SSL

Configure the settings for POP over SSL.
For details, refer to page 2-49.

2.23.6 APOP Authentication

Configure APOP authentication settings.
For details, refer to page 2-50.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-81

2.24 Sending and receiving IP address faxes
2
2.24 Sending and receiving IP address faxes
Configure settings to send and receive IP address faxes.
IP Address Fax means FAX that is available on the IP network. To send a fax, specify the IP address, host
name, or E-mail address of the remote machine.
The SMTP protocol is used to send and receive IP address faxes. Because the SMTP server function of this
machine sends and receives data, no server is required when sending or receiving a fax by specifying the IP
address of the remote machine. (However, the DNS server is required to send or receive a fax by specifying
the host name or E-mail address.)
This machine supports the following two IP address fax operation modes. Switch the operation mode
according to your environment.
- "Mode 1": This mode allows communication between Konica Minolta models capable of transmitting
IP address faxes, and between models compatible with the direct SMTP standard defined by CIAJ
(Communications and Information Network Association of Japan). However, because a unique method
developed by Konica Minolta is used to send a color fax, only the Konica Minolta models can receive
such a color fax. This machine can receive color faxes in any mode.
- "Mode 2": This mode allows communication between Konica Minolta models capable of transmitting
IP address faxes, and between models compatible with the direct SMTP standard defined by CIAJ
(Communications and Information Network Association of Japan). The method compatible with the
direct SMTP standard (Profile-C format) is used to send a color fax. This machine can receive color
faxes in any mode.
To use the IP Address Fax function, check the following.
- Install the optional fax kit FK-502 in this machine.
- To use the IP Address Fax function, ask your service representative to configure settings. For details,
contact your service representative.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

TCP/IP Settings

Network Fax Function Settings

SMTP TX Setting

SMTP RX Setting

Network Fax Settings

Header Information

Finish

d Reference
For details on how to register IP address fax destinations refer to page 2-232.
For details on IP Address Fax, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".

2.24.1 TCP/IP Settings

Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-82

2.24 Sending and receiving IP address faxes
2
2.24.2 Network Fax Function Settings
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "Network Fax Setting" ö
"Network Fax Function Settings".

Item Description Prior check

IP Address Fax Select "ON".
Function Settings

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-83

2.24 Sending and receiving IP address faxes
2
2.24.3 SMTP TX Setting
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "Network Fax Setting" ö
"SMTP TX Setting".

Item Description Prior check

Port Number Enter the port number. Required port
Default setting: 25 number
Connection Time- Enter the timeout period for a communication with a serv-
out er.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-84

2.24 Sending and receiving IP address faxes
2
2.24.4 SMTP RX Setting
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "Network Fax Setting" ö
"SMTP RX Setting".

Item Description Prior check

SMTP RX Select "ON".
Port Number Enter the port number. Required port
Default setting: 25 number
Connection Time- Enter the timeout period for a communication with a serv-
out er.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-85

2.24 Sending and receiving IP address faxes
2
2.24.5 Network Fax Settings
(This menu item will not be displayed if the Network Fax function is not available.)

Black Compression Level

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Fax Settings" ö "Network Fax Setting"
ö "Black Compression Level".

Item Description Prior check

Black Compres- Select the default setting of the black compression level in
sion Level the black and white sending mode.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-86

2.24 Sending and receiving IP address faxes
2
Color/Grayscale Multi-Value Compression Method
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Fax Settings" ö "Network Fax Setting"
ö "Color/Grayscale Multi-Value Compression Method".

Item Description Prior check

Color/Grayscale Select the default setting of the color/grayscale multi-val-
Multi-Value Com- ue compression method in the color sending mode.
pression Method

2.24.6 IP Address Fax Setting

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Fax Settings" ö "Network Fax Setting"
ö "IP Address Fax Setting".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-87

2.24 Sending and receiving IP address faxes
2
Item Description Prior check
Operation mode Select the operation mode for IP address fax according to
your environment.
• "Mode 1": This mode allows communication between
Konica Minolta models capable of transmitting IP ad-
dress faxes, and between models compatible with the
direct SMTP standard defined by CIAJ (Communica-
tions and Information Network Association of Japan).
However, because a unique method developed by
Konica Minolta is used to send a color fax, only the
Konica Minolta models can receive such a color fax.
This machine can receive color faxes in any mode.
• "Mode 2": This mode allows communication between
Konica Minolta models capable of transmitting IP ad-
dress faxes, and between models compatible with the
direct SMTP standard defined by CIAJ (Communica-
tions and Information Network Association of Japan).
The method compatible with the direct SMTP stand-
ard (Profile-C format) is used to send a color fax. This
machine can receive color faxes in any mode.
Send & receive a Select whether or not to accept sending and receiving of Can the recipient
colored original colored originals when selecting "Mode 2" for "Operating machine receive a
Mode". color fax using the
If you select "Restrict", color originals are converted to direct SMTP stand-
black and white before being sent. To send a fax to a ma- ard?
chine that is not capable of receiving a color fax using the
direct SMTP standard, select "Restrict".

2.24.7 Header Information

Register sender information for fax sending.
For details, refer to page 2-273.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-88

2.25 Importing images by TWAIN scan
2
2.25 Importing images by TWAIN scan
Configure settings to use this machine as a scanner.
Using the TWAIN driver enables you to use this machine as a scanner. This function controls this machine
from a computer via the network, and imports scanned data to application on network.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

TCP/IP Settings

SLP Setting

TCP Socket Settings

Network TWAIN

Finish

d Reference
For details on how to install the TWAIN driver, refer to the TWAIN driver manual in the Driver CD-ROM.

2.25.1 TCP/IP Settings

Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

2.25.2 SLP Setting

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "TCP/IP Setting" ö "TCP/IP
Setting".

Item Description Prior check

SLP Select "Enable" to search for this machine using TWAIN.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-89

2.25 Importing images by TWAIN scan
2
2.25.3 TCP Socket Settings
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "TCP Socket Setting".

Item Description Prior check

TCP Socket Select this check box to use the TWAIN driver.
Port Number Enter the port number.

2.25.4 Network TWAIN

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "System Settings" ö "Network TWAIN".

Item Description Prior check

TWAIN Lock Time Enter the time to automatically release the operation lock
using the TWAIN scan function.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-90

2.26 Printing (LPR/Port9100)
2
2.26 Printing (LPR/Port9100)
Configure settings for LPR or Port9100 printing.
LPR printing is performed via the network using the LPR protocol. It is mainly used in UNIX-based operating
systems.
Port9100 printing is performed via the network by directly specifying the RAW port (Port9100) of this machine
connected to the TCP/IP network as a destination printer.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

TCP/IP Settings

(1) LPR printing

(2) Port9100 printing

(1) (2)

LPD Setting RAW Port Number

Finish

d Reference
For details on how to install the printer driver, refer to the "User's Guide [Print Operations]".

2.26.1 TCP/IP Settings

Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

2.26.2 LPD Setting

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "TCP/IP Setting" ö "TCP/IP
Setting".

Item Description Prior check

LPD Select "Enable".

2.26.3 RAW Port Number

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "TCP/IP Setting" ö "TCP/IP
Setting".

Item Description Prior check

RAW Port Number Select the check box of the required port, and enter the
RAW port number.

Reference
- If you select [OK] after changing multiple port numbers together in PageScope Web Connection or on
the control panel, a port number duplication error may be displayed. When this error is displayed, first
change one port number and select [OK]. Then change another one and select [OK].

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-91

2.27 Print (SMB)
2
2.27 Print (SMB)
Configure settings for SMB printing.
A printer can be shared on the Windows network using the SMB protocol. The SMB printing allows a
computer to directly specify this machine running on the Windows network to print information.
To use SMB printing in the IPv6 environment, you must enable the direct hosting service.
To perform the SMB printing from a computer with Windows Vista/Server 2008 installed, you can perform the
name resolution using the LLMNR function even if DNS server is not present. To perform the name resolution
especially in the IPv6-only communication environment under Windows Vista/Server 2008, it will be
convenient to enable the LLMNR function.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

TCP/IP Settings

Print Setting

IPv6 environment?
No Yes

Do you use the WINS serv- Direct Hosting Setting

er?

Yes No

WINS Setting

Do you send data to

Windows Vista/Server
2008?

No Yes

LLMNR Setting

Finish

d Reference
For details on how to install the printer driver, refer to the "User's Guide [Print Operations]".

2.27.1 TCP/IP Settings

Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-92

2.27 Print (SMB)
2
2.27.2 Print Setting
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "SMB Setting" ö "Print
Setting".

Item Description Prior check

Print Setting Select "ON".
NetBIOS Name Enter the NetBIOS name in uppercase letters (up to 15
characters, the only symbol allowed is a hyphen (-)).
Print Service Name Enter a print service name in uppercase letters (up to 12
characters, excluding / \).
Workgroup Enter a workgroup name in uppercase letters (up to 15 The workgroup this
characters, excluding " \ :; , * < > | + = ?). machine belongs to

2.27.3 WINS Setting

When you start SMB printing via the router, you must set up the WINS server.
For details, refer to page 2-36.

2.27.4 Direct Hosting Setting

To use SMB printing in the IPv6 environment, enable the direct hosting service.
For details, refer to page 2-37.

2.27.5 LLMNR Setting

To perform name resolution in the environment configured to communicate with Windows Vista/Server 2008,
and where the DNS server is not running, enable the LLMNR function.
For details, refer to page 2-37.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-93

2.28 Print (IPP)
2
2.28 Print (IPP)
Configure settings for IPP printing.
IPP printing uses the Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) and prints information via the network. Because the IPP
printing allows the print data to be transferred to a network printer using HTTP protocol, you can also output
the data to a remote printer via the Internet.
If you have set the authentication for IPP printing, you can prevent illegal access by a third party.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

TCP/IP Settings

IPP Setting

Do you authorize?

Yes No

IPP Authentication Setting

Finish

d Reference
For details on how to install the printer driver, refer to the "User's Guide [Print Operations]".

2.28.1 TCP/IP Settings

Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-94

2.28 Print (IPP)
2
2.28.2 IPP Setting
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "IPP Setting".

Item Description Prior check

IPP Setting Select "ON".
Accept IPP job Select "ON".
Printer Name Enter a printer name (up to 127 characters).
Printer Location Enter the location of the printer (up to 127 characters).
Printer Information Enter printer information (up to 127 characters).
Printer URI Displays the URI of the printer that can print data using the
IPP.
Support Operation Select the check box of each job to be executed using the
IPP.
Print Job Select whether to allow a print job.
Select this check box to enable IPP printing.
Valid Job Select whether to allow confirmation of a valid job.
Cancel Job Select whether to allow canceling the job.
Open Job At- Select whether to obtain job attributes.
tributes
Open Job Select whether to obtain a list of job attributes.
Open Printer At- Select whether to obtain printer attributes.
tributes

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-95

2.28 Print (IPP)
2
2.28.3 IPP Authentication Setting
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "IPP Setting".

Item Description Prior check

IPP Authentication Select this check box to force an authentication for IPP
Setting printing.
Authentication Select an authentication method.
Method
User Name Enter a user name (up to 20 characters, excluding a colon
(:)).
This entry is required if you have selected "basic" or "di-
gest" for the authentication method.
Password is Select this check box to change the password.
changed
Password Enter the password (up to 20 characters).
This entry is required if you have selected "basic" or "di-
gest" for the authentication method.
realm Enter realm (up to 127 characters).
This entry is required if you have selected "digest" for the
authentication method.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-96

2.29 Print (IPPS)
2
2.29 Print (IPPS)
Configure settings for IPPS printing.
When this machine starts IPP printing, the communication between the computer and this machine is
encrypted using the SSL. The encryption using the SSL can enhance the security during IPP printing.
To use IPPS printing on the Windows Vista/Server 2008 system, check the following points.
- Enter "https://[host-name].[domain-name]/ipp". These [host-name] and [domain-name] must be the
"DNS Host Name" and "DNS Default Domain Name" that you have set for the "TCP/IP Setting".
- Your computer must be able to resolve the name of this machine using the DNS. Register this machine
in the DNS server and configure the DNS settings in your computer in advance.
- If the certificate of this machine is not the one issued by the Certificate Authority (CA), you must register
the device certificate on the Windows Vista system as the Trusted Root Certification Authorities
certificate for local computers.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

TCP/IP Settings

IPP Setting

Device Certificate Setting

Do you authorize?

Yes No

IPP Authentication Setting

Finish

d Reference
For details on how to install the printer driver, refer to the "User's Guide [Print Operations]".

2.29.1 TCP/IP Settings

Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
- To use IPPS printing on the Windows Vista/Server 2008 system, correctly set the "DNS Host Name"
and "DNS Default Domain Name" that have been registered on the DNS server before creating its
certificate. If their settings are incorrect, you cannot establish the communication connection in IPPS.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

2.29.2 IPP Setting

Configure settings for IPP printing.
For details, refer to page 2-95.

2.29.3 Device Certificate Setting

Configure settings for SSL communication.
For details, refer to page 2-15.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-97

2.29 Print (IPPS)
2
2.29.4 IPP Authentication Setting
Configure these settings to force an authentication for IPP printing.
For details, refer to page 2-96.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-98

2.30 Printing (Bonjour)
2
2.30 Printing (Bonjour)
Configure these settings when you connect this machine to a Macintosh computer using the Bonjour protocol
for printing.
Before starting Bonjour protocol communication between this machine and a Macintosh computer, configure
the Bonjour protocol for this machine.

d Reference
For details on how to install the printer driver, refer to the "User's Guide [Print Operations]".

Bonjour Settings
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "Bonjour Setting".

Item Description Prior check

Bonjour Select "ON".
Bonjour Name Enter a Bonjour name that is displayed as the name of
connected device (up to 63 characters).

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-99

2.31 Printing (AppleTalk)
2
2.31 Printing (AppleTalk)
Configure these settings when you connect this machine to a Macintosh computer using the AppleTalk
protocol for printing.
Before starting AppleTalk protocol communication between this machine and a Macintosh computer, set the
AppleTalk protocol for this machine.

d Reference
For details on how to install the printer driver, refer to the "User's Guide [Print Operations]".

AppleTalk Settings
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "AppleTalk Setting".

Item Description Prior check

AppleTalk Select "ON".
Printer Name Enter a printer name to be displayed on the selector (up to
31 characters, excluding = and ~).
Zone Name Enter a name of zone this machine belongs to (up to 31
characters).
Current Zone The current zone name is displayed.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-100

2.32 Printing (Netware)
2
2.32 Printing (Netware)
Configure settings for printing in a NetWare environment.
Before you start printing in a NetWare environment, you must set the NetWare file system on this machine.

d Reference
For details on how to install the printer driver, refer to the "User's Guide [Print Operations]".
The current NetWare connection can be checked if necessary. For details, refer to page 2-105.

2.32.1 NetWare Settings

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "NetWare Setting" ö
"NetWare Setting".
The required items depend on your operating environment. Set the items by referring to the following figure.

In Remote Printer mode using the NetWare 4.x Bindery Emulation

0 When you use the Bindery Emulation, make sure that the Bindery Emulation has been enabled on the
NetWare server.

1 From the client, log in the NetWare file system as Bindery with the administrator authority.

2 Start Pconsole.

3 Select "Quick Setup" from "Available Options" list box, and press the [Enter] key.

4 Fill in "Print Server Name", "Printer Name", and "Print Queue Name". Set the "Type" of the printer to
"Other/Unknown", and save them.

5 Terminate Pconsole by pressing the [Esc] key.

6 Load the PSERVER.NLM file on the NetWare Server console.

Then, configure the following settings in "NetWare Setting".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-101

2.32 Printing (Netware)
2
Item Description Prior check
IPX Setting Select "ON".
Ethernet Frame Select a frame type to be used. Frame type
Type
NetWare Print Select "Nprinter/Rprinter".
Mode
Print Server Name Enter a print server name to be operated as the Nprint- The print server
er/Rprinter (up to 63 characters, excluding / \ :; , * [ ] < > | name specified in
+ = ? .). Step 4
Printer Number Enter the Nprinter/Rprinter number.

In Print Server mode using the NetWare 4.x Bindery Emulation

0 When you use the Bindery Emulation, make sure that the Bindery Emulation has been enabled on the
NetWare server.
0 When you select the Print Server mode, the IPX protocol must already be loaded on the NetWare server.

1 From the client, log in the NetWare file system as Bindery with the administrator authority.

2 Start Pconsole.

3 Select "Quick Setup" from "Available Options" list box, and press the [Enter] key.

4 Fill in "Print Server Name", "Printer Name", and "Print Queue Name". Set the "Type" of the printer to
"Other/Unknown", and save them.

5 Terminate Pconsole by pressing the [Esc] key.

Then, configure the following settings in "NetWare Setting".

Item Description Prior check

IPX Setting Select "ON".
Ethernet Frame Select a frame type to be used. Frame type
Type
NetWare Print Select "PServer".
Mode
Print Server Name Enter a print server name to be operated as Pserver (up to The print server
63 characters, excluding / \ :; , * [ ] < > | + = ? .). name specified in
Step 4
Print Server Pass- Enter a print server password if necessary (up to 63 char-
word acters).
Polling Interval Set a job inquiry interval.
Bindery/NDS Set- Select "Bindery/NDS Setting".
ting
File Server Name Enter the priority file server name to be used in the Bindery
emulation mode (up to 47 characters, excluding /\ :; , * [ ]
< > | + = ? .).

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-102

2.32 Printing (Netware)
2
In NetWare 4.x Remote Printer mode (NDS)
1 From the client, log in the NetWare file system with administrator authority.

2 Start NWAdmin.

3 Select an organization or department container for the print service, and select "Print Services Quick
Setup" from the Tools menu.

4 Fill in "Print Server Name", "Printer Name", "Print Queue Name", and "Print Queue Volume". Then, set
the "Type" of the printer to "Other/Unknown" and save them.

5 Load the PSERVER.NLM file on the NetWare Server console.

Then, configure the following settings in "NetWare Setting".

Item Description Prior check

IPX Setting Select "ON".
Ethernet Frame Select a frame type to be used. Frame type
Type
NetWare Print Select "Nprinter/Rprinter".
Mode
Print Server Name Enter a print server name to be operated as the Nprint- The print server
er/Rprinter (up to 63 characters, excluding / \ :; , * [ ] < > | name specified in
+ = ? .). Step 4
Printer Number Enter the Nprinter/Rprinter number.

In the NetWare 4.x/5.x/6 Print Server mode (NDS)

0 When you select the Print Server mode, the IPX protocol must already be loaded on the NetWare server.

1 From the client, log in the NetWare file system with administrator authority.

2 Start NWAdmin.

3 Select an organization or department container for the print service, and select "Print Services Quick
Setup (non-NDPS)" from the Tools menu.

4 Fill in "Print Server Name", "Printer Name", "Print Queue Name", and "Print Queue Volume". Then, set
the "Type" of the printer to "Other/Unknown" and click [Create].
Then, configure the following settings in "NetWare Setting".

Item Description Prior check

IPX Setting Select "ON".
Ethernet Frame Select a frame type to be used. Frame type
Type
NetWare Print Select "PServer".
Mode
Print Server Name Enter a print server name to be operated as Pserver (up to The print server
63 characters, excluding / \ :; , * [ ] < > | + = ? .). name specified in
Step 4
Print Server Pass- Enter a print server password if necessary (up to 63 char-
word acters).
Polling Interval Set a job inquiry interval.
Bindery/NDS Set- Select "NDS".
ting
NDS Context Enter an NDS context name for print server connection (up
Name to 191 characters, excluding / \ :; , * [ ] < > | + = ?).

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-103

2.32 Printing (Netware)
2
Item Description Prior check
NDS Tree Name Enter an NDS tree name for print server connection (up to
63 characters, excluding / \ :; , * [ ] < > | + = ?).

For NetWare 5.x/6 Novell Distributed Print Service (NDPS)

0 Before starting the NDPS setting, make sure that an NDPS broker and NDPS manager have already
been created and loaded.
0 Make sure that the TCP/IP protocol has been set on the NetWare server, an IP address of this machine
has been set, and this machine has already been started.

1 From the client, log in the NetWare file system with administrator authority.

2 Start NWAdmin.

3 Right-click the "Organization" and "Organizational unit" containers for printer agent creation, and select
"NDPS Printer" from Create.

4 Enter a "printer name" in the "NDPS Printer Name" field.

5 Select "Create a New Printer Agent" in the "Printer Agent Source" field, and click "Create".

6 Confirm the printer agent name, and browse and register the NDPS manager in the "NDPS Manager
Name" field.

7 Set the "Gateway Types" to "Novell Printer Gateway", and register it.

8 In the "Configure Novell NDPS for Printer Agent" window, set the Printer to "(None)" and the port hander
to "Novell Port Handler", and register the settings.

9 Set the "Connection type" to "Remote (LPR on IP)" and register the setting.

10 For the host address, enter the IP address of this machine you have configured. Enter "Print" for the
printer name, and then press "Finish" to register the settings.

11 When printer driver registration windows appear, select "None" for each OS and finish the registration.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-104

2.32 Printing (Netware)
2
2.32.2 NetWare Status
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "NetWare Setting" ö
"NetWare Status".
The current NetWare connection can be checked if necessary.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-105

2.33 Using the WS print function
2
2.33 Using the WS print function
Configure the following settings when you print data using the Web services function of Windows
Vista/Server 2008.
The Web services function can automatically detect this network-connected machine and install it as a WS
printer. When you select this machine (installed as the WS printer), you can use the HTTP for communication
and print data.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

TCP/IP Settings

Web Service Common Set-

tings

Print Setting

Finish

d Reference
For details on how to install the printer driver, refer to the "User's Guide [Print Operations]".

2.33.1 TCP/IP Settings

Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

2.33.2 Web Service Common Settings

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "Web Service Settings" ö
"Web Service Common Settings".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-106

2.33 Using the WS print function
2
Item Description Prior check
Friendly Name Enter a Friendly Name (up to 62 characters).
Publication Service If you use this machine in an environment where NetBIOS
is disabled or only the IPv6 protocol communication is
used by the Windows Vista or Server 2008 system, set this
item to "Enable".

2.33.3 Print Setting

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "Web Service Settings" ö
"Print Setting".

Item Description Prior check

Print Function Select "ON".
Printer Name Enter a printer name (up to 63 characters, excluding a co-
lon ! \ ,).
Printer Location Enter the location of the printer (up to 63 characters).
Printer Information Enter printer information (up to 63 characters).

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-107

2.34 Using Data Saved in a Cellular Phone or PDA
2
2.34 Using Data Saved in a Cellular Phone or PDA
Configure settings to wirelessly connect this machine to a cellular phone or PDA with the Bluetooth function
installed and to use data stored in such a terminal.
You can print data saved in a cellular phone or PDA or save data in a User Box of this machine. Once data
is saved in a User Box, it can be sent to an external device if necessary.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.
Reference
- To use this function, install the optional "local connection kit EK-605" in this machine.

Bluetooth Setting

System Connection Setting

Finish

d Reference
For details on printing data saved in a cellular phone or PDA or save data in a User Box of this machine, refer
to the "User's Guide [Print Operations]".
For details on using the saved data in User Boxes of this machine, refer to the "User's Guide [Box
Operations]".

2.34.1 Bluetooth Setting

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "Bluetooth Setting".

Item Description Prior check

Bluetooth Select "Enable".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-108

2.34 Using Data Saved in a Cellular Phone or PDA
2
2.34.2 System Connection Setting
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "System Settings" ö "System Connection
Setting".

Item Description Prior check

Bluetooth Print Select "ON".
Settings This item is not displayed when "Bluetooth" is set to "Dis-
able".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-109

2.35 Using the WS scan function
2
2.35 Using the WS scan function
Configure the following settings when you scan data using the Web services function of Windows
Vista/Server 2008.
The Web services function can automatically detect this network-connected machine and install it as a WS
scanner. When you select this machine (installed as the WS scanner), you can use the HTTP for
communication and scan data.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

TCP/IP Settings

Web Service Common Settings

Scanner Settings

Finish

d Reference
For details on the WS scan functions, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax
Operations]".

2.35.1 TCP/IP Settings

Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

2.35.2 Web Service Common Settings

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "Web Service Settings" ö
"Web Service Common Settings".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-110

2.35 Using the WS scan function
2
Item Description Prior check
Friendly Name Enter a Friendly Name (up to 62 characters).
Publication Service If you use this machine in an environment where NetBIOS
is disabled or only the IPv6 protocol communication is
used by the Windows Vista or Server 2008 system, set this
item to "Enable".
The Publication Service function can detect up to 512
destinations, including those detected with the NetBIOS
service.

2.35.3 Scanner Settings

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "Web Service Settings" ö
"Scanner Settings".

Item Description Prior check

Scan Function Select "ON".
Scanner Name Enter a scanner name (up to 63 characters).
Printer Location Enter a scanner location (up to 63 characters).
Scanner Informa- Enter scanner information (up to 63 characters).
tion
Connection Time- Enter a connection timeout.
out

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-111

2.36 Using Web services to secure communication from Vista/Server 2008 to this machine via SSL
2
2.36 Using Web services to secure communication from Vista/Server
2008 to this machine via SSL
Configure settings to use the encrypted SSL communication from a computer running on the Windows
Vista/Server 2008 to this machine in a Web services environment. Security of Web services communication
can be enhanced using the SSL protocol encryption.
When you configure the SSL communication settings, check the following points.
- To use the encrypted SSL communication between this machine and the computer, you must set the
bidirectional SSL communication between them. Configure both the following settings and the settings
for "Using Web services to establish an SSL communication from this machine to Vista/Server 2008".
- Your computer must be able to resolve the name of this machine using the DNS. Register this machine
in the DNS server and configure the DNS settings in your computer in advance.
- If the certificate of this machine is not the one issued by the Certificate Authority (CA), you must register
the device certificate on the Windows Vista system as the Trusted Root Certification Authorities
certificate for local computers.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

TCP/IP Settings

Device Certificate Setting

Web Service Common Set-

tings

Finish

2.36.1 TCP/IP Settings

Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

2.36.2 Device Certificate Setting

Configure settings for SSL communication.
For details, refer to page 2-15.

2.36.3 Web Service Common Settings

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "Web Service Settings" ö
"Web Service Common Settings".

Item Description Prior check

Friendly Name Enter a Friendly Name (up to 62 characters).
SSL Settings Select "ON".
Publication Service If you use this machine in an environment where NetBIOS
is disabled or only the IPv6 protocol communication is
used by the Windows Vista or Server 2008 system, set this
item to "Enable".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-112

2.37 Using Web services to establish an SSL communication from this machine to Vista/Server 2008
2
2.37 Using Web services to establish an SSL communication from this
machine to Vista/Server 2008
Configure settings to use the encrypted SSL communication from this machine to a computer running on the
Windows Vista/Server 2008 in a Web services environment. Security of Web services communication can be
enhanced using the SSL protocol encryption.
When you configure the SSL communication settings, check the following points.
- To use the encrypted SSL communication between this machine and the computer, you must set the
bidirectional SSL communication between them. Configure both the following settings and the settings
for "Using Web services to secure communication from Vista/Server 2008 to this machine via SSL".
- Create a certificate at the computer first, and then associate the TCP/IP communication port (the
default port number is 5358).
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

TCP/IP Settings

Web Service Common Set-

tings

Finish

2.37.1 TCP/IP Settings

Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

2.37.2 Web Service Common Settings

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "Web Service Settings" ö
"Web Service Common Settings".

Item Description Prior check

Friendly Name Enter a Friendly Name (up to 62 characters).
SSL Settings Select "ON".
Publication Service If you use this machine in an environment where NetBIOS
is disabled or only the IPv6 protocol communication is
used by the Windows Vista or Server 2008 system, set this
item to "Enable".
The Publication Service function can detect up to 512
destinations, including those detected with the NetBIOS
service.
Certificate Verifica- Specify how to validate a certificate.
tion Level Settings
Validity Period Select whether to check that the target certificate is within
the validity period.
Key Usage Select whether to check that the certificate is used ac-
cording to the purpose approved by the issuer.
Chain Select whether to check that the certificate chain (certifi-
cation path) is correct.
The chain is validated by referencing the external certifi-
cates managed on this machine. For details, refer to
page 2-210.
Expiration Date Select whether to check that the target certificate is within
Confirmation the validity period.
The OCSP service and CRL (Certificate Revocation List)
are checked in this order when the expiration date of the
certificate is checked.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-113

2.37 Using Web services to establish an SSL communication from this machine to Vista/Server 2008
2
Certificate Verification Settings
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Security" ö "Certificate Verification
Settings".

Item Description Prior check

Certificate Verifica- Select "ON" to validate the certificate.
tion Settings
Timeout Enter a timeout period for expiration date confirmation. Do you confirm the
expiration date?
OCSP Service Select this check box to use the OCSP service.
URL Enter the URL of the OCSP service (up to 511 characters).
If this item is left blank, the machine accesses the URL of
the OCSP service embedded in the certificate. If the URL
of the OCSP service is not embedded in the certificate, an
error will occur.
Proxy Server Ad- To confirm the expiration date via a proxy server, enter its Server address
dress address.
Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255)
If the DNS server has already been configured, you can
enter the host name instead.
If "IPv6" is set to "ON", you can also specify the IPv6 ad-
dress.
Proxy Server Port Enter the port number of a proxy server. Server port number
Number
User Name Enter the user name to log in to the proxy server (up to 63
characters).
Password is Select this check box to change the password.
changed.
Password Enter the password to log in to the proxy server (up to 63
characters).
Address not using To enable expiration date confirmation, specify an ad-
Proxy Server dress that does not use the proxy server depending on
your environment.
If the DNS server has already been configured, you can
enter the host name instead.
If "IPv6" is set to "ON", you can also specify the IPv6 ad-
dress.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-114

2.38 Displaying this machine on the network map
2
2.38 Displaying this machine on the network map
Configure settings to display this machine on the network map in Windows Vista or Server 2008.
When the LLTD function of this machine is enabled, the network position of this machine can be displayed
on the network map. Also, when you click the icon of this machine on the network map, you can access
PageScope Web Connection.
The network map is very useful for checking the location and information of this machine and for network
troubleshooting.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

TCP/IP Settings

LLTD Setting

Finish

2.38.1 TCP/IP Settings

Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

2.38.2 LLTD Setting

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "LLTD Setting".

Item Description Prior check

LLTD Setting Select "Enable".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-115

2.39 Monitoring this machine by SNMP Manager
2
2.39 Monitoring this machine by SNMP Manager
Configure settings to monitor this machine using the SNMP manager.
Using the SNMP manager, you can communicate with the SNMP agent of this machine and get, manage,
and supervise this machine information via the network. The SNMP can be used in the TCP/IP environment
or IPX/SPX environment.
Also, you can send this machine status information to others using the SNMP TRAP function. For details,
refer to page 2-122.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

(1) Use the TCP/IP

(2) Use the IPX/SPX

(1) (2)

TCP/IP Settings NetWare Settings

SNMP Settings

Finish

2.39.1 TCP/IP Settings

Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

2.39.2 NetWare Settings

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "NetWare Setting" ö
"NetWare Setting".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-116

2.39 Monitoring this machine by SNMP Manager
2
Item Description Prior check
IPX Setting Select "ON".
Ethernet Frame Select a frame type to be used. Frame type
Type

2.39.3 SNMP Settings

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "SNMP Setting".

Item Description Prior check

SNMP Setting Select "ON". The protocol you use
When you use the SNMP, select whether to use "SNMP (TCP/IP or IPX/SPX)
v1/v2c (IP)", "SNMP v3(IP)", or "SNMP v1 (IPX)".
You can select "SNMP v1 (IPX)" only when the IPX is ena-
bled.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-117

2.39 Monitoring this machine by SNMP Manager
2
Item Description Prior check
UDP Port Setting Enter a UDP port number.
Default setting: 161
SNMP v1/v2c Set- Configure the settings for SNMP v1/v2c.
tings
Read Community Enter a community name used for reading (up to 15 char-
Name acters, excluding space and \).
Write Community Enter a community name used for reading and writing (up
Name to 15 characters).
SNMP v3 Setting Set the settings for SNMP v3.
Context Name Enter a context name (up to 63 characters, excluding
space and \).
Discovery User Enter a context name for detection (up to 32 characters,
Name excluding space and \).
Read User Name Enter a user name of the read-only user (up to 32 charac-
ters, excluding space and \).
Security Level Select a security level of the read-only user.
Password is Select this check box to change the password.
changed.
auth-password Enter the password of the read-only user for authentica-
tion (up to 8 to 32 characters, excluding space and \).
Password is Select this check box to change the password.
changed.
priv-password Enter the privacy password of the read-only user to be
used for privacy (encryption) (up to 8 to 32 characters, ex-
cluding space and \).
Write User Name Enter a user name used of the read and write-only user (up
to 32 characters, excluding space and \).
Security Level Select a security level of the read and write-only user.
auth-password Enter the password of the read and write-only user for au-
thentication (up to 8 to 32 characters, excluding space
and \).
Password is Select this check box to change the password.
changed.
priv-password Enter the privacy password of the read and write-only user
to be used for privacy (encryption) (up to 8 to 32 charac-
ters, excluding space and \).
Password is Select this check box to change the password.
changed.
Encryption Algo- Select an encryption algorithm.
rithm
Authentication Select an authentication method.
Method
Device Name Enter the name of this machine (up to 255 characters).
Device Location Enter the location to install this machine (up to 255 char-
acters).
Administrator Enter the administrator name (up to 255 characters).
Name

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-118

2.40 Reporting the status of this machine (by E-mail)
2
2.40 Reporting the status of this machine (by E-mail)
Configure settings to report the status of this machine to the administrator by E-mail.
If an alarm has occurred on this machine, it can be reported to the specified destination by E-mail.
A combination of POP before SMTP authentication, APOP authentication, SMTP authentication and SSL/TLS
encryption can be used for notification by E-mail.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

TCP/IP Settings

E-mail Transmis-
sion (SMTP)

Status Notifica-
tion Setting

Do you have an Do you use SMTP POP before SMTP?

SSL/TLS communi- authentication?
cation with the
SMTP server?

Yes No Yes No Yes No

SMTP over SMTP Authenti- POP before SMTP

SSL/Start TLS cation

(1) POP over SSL?

(2) APOP?

Yes No

(1)POP over SSL

(2)APOP Authenti-
cation

Finish

2.40.1 TCP/IP Settings

Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-119

2.40 Reporting the status of this machine (by E-mail)
2
2.40.2 E-mail Transmission (SMTP)
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "E-mail Setting" ö "E-mail
Transmission (SMTP)".

Item Description Prior check

E-mail TX Setting Select the "E-mail TX Setting" check box.
E-mail Notification Select "ON".
SMTP Server Ad- Enter the SMTP server address. Server address
dress Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255)
If the DNS server has already been configured, you can
enter the host name instead.
If "IPv6" is set to "ON", you can also specify the IPv6 ad-
dress.
Port Number Enter the port number. Server port number
Default setting: 25
Connection Time- Specify the timeout period for a communication with a
out server.
Max Mail Size Select whether to limit the size of an E-mail to be sent.
Server Capacity Enter the SMTP server capacity. A mail that exceeds the Server reception limit
upper limit of the server capacity will be discarded.
If an E-mail is divided, this setting is made invalid.
Admin. E-mail Ad- Displays the E-mail address of the administrator.
dress If the administrator address has not been specified, enter
the E-mail address of the administrator by selecting "Sys-
tem Settings" and "Machine Setting".
Binary Division Select this check box to divide an E-mail. Restoration function
If the E-mail software that received an E-mail does not of E-mail software
have a restoration function, you may not be able to read
the E-mail.
Divided Mail Size Enter the divided mail size to divide an E-mail. Server reception limit

2.40.3 Status Notification Setting

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Maintenance" ö "Status Notification
Setting" ö "E-mail" ö [Edit].

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-120

2.40 Reporting the status of this machine (by E-mail)
2
Item Description Prior check
Notification ad- Enter the destination E-mail address. Notification address
dress
Replenish Paper Sends a notification when the paper tray is empty.
Tray
JAM Sends a notification when a page has been jammed.
PM Call Sends a notification when the periodical inspection is re-
quired.
Replace Staples Sends a notification when there are no staples remaining.
Replenish Toner Sends a notification when the toner is empty.
Finisher Tray Full Sends a notification when the capacity of the finisher tray
has been exceeded.
Service Call Sends a notification when a service call has occurred.
Job Finished Sends a notification when the job has finished.
Hole-Punch Scrap Sends a notification when you need to empty the punch
Box Full scrap box.
Waste Toner Box Sends a notification when the waste toner box needs to be
Full replaced.
Imaging Unit Yield Sends a notification when the imaging unit (IU) needs to
be replaced.
Fusing Unit Yield Sends a notification when the fusing unit needs to be re-
placed.
Transfer Roller Unit Sends a notification when the transfer roller unit needs to
Yield be replaced.
Transfer Belt Unit Sends a notification when the transfer belt needs to be re-
Yield placed.
Ozon Filter Yield Sends a notification when the ozon filter needs to be re-
placed.

2.40.4 SMTP over SSL/Start TLS

Configure the settings for SMTP over SSL or Start TLS.
For details, refer to page 2-45.

2.40.5 SMTP Authentication

Configure SMTP authentication settings.
For details, refer to page 2-47.

2.40.6 POP before SMTP

Configure the settings for POP before SMTP.
For details, refer to page 2-47.

2.40.7 POP over SSL

Configure the settings for POP over SSL.
For details, refer to page 2-49.

2.40.8 APOP Authentication

Configure APOP authentication settings.
For details, refer to page 2-50.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-121

2.41 Reporting the status of this machine (TRAP)
2
2.41 Reporting the status of this machine (TRAP)
Configure settings to report the status of this machine to the administrator using the SNMP TRAP functions.
If an alarm has occurred on this machine, it can be reported to the specified IP address or IPX address by
the SNMP TRAP.
To use the SNMP TRAP functions, you must set the SNMP in advance. For details, refer to page 2-116.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

(1) Notification to IP address

(2) Notification to IPX ad-
dress
(1) (2)

TCP/IP Settings NetWare Settings

TRAP Settings

Status Notification Setting

Finish

2.41.1 TCP/IP Settings

Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

2.41.2 NetWare Settings

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "NetWare Setting" ö
"NetWare Setting".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-122

2.41 Reporting the status of this machine (TRAP)
2
Item Description Prior check
IPX Setting Select "ON".
Ethernet Frame Select a frame type to be used. Frame type
Type

2.41.3 TRAP Settings

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "SNMP Setting".

Item Description Prior check

Allow Setting Select "Allow".
Trap Setting when Select whether to enable TRAP transmission at the time of
Authentication authentication failure.
Fails

2.41.4 Status Notification Setting

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Maintenance" ö "Status Notification
Setting" ö "IP (IPX) Address" ö [Edit].

Item Description Prior check

Notification ad- If the destination has an "IP address", enter it. If the DNS Notification address
dress server has already been configured, you can enter the
host name instead."If IPv6" is set to "ON", you can also
specify the IPv6 address.
If the destination has an "IPX address", enter it using an 8-
digit hexadecimal value.
Port Number If the destination has an "IP address", enter its port
number.
Node Address If the destination has an "IPX address", enter the node ad-
dress using a 12-digit hexadecimal value.
Community Name Enter a community name (up to 15 characters).
Replenish Paper Sends a notification when the paper tray is empty.
Tray
JAM Sends a notification when a page has been jammed.
PM Call Sends a notification when the periodical inspection is re-
quired.
Replace Staples Sends a notification when there are no staples remaining.
Replenish Toner Sends a notification when the toner is empty.
Finisher Tray Full Sends a notification when the capacity of the finisher tray
has been exceeded.
Service Call Sends a notification when a service call has occurred.
Job Finished Sends a notification when the job has finished.
Hole-Punch Scrap Sends a notification when you need to empty the punch
Box Full scrap box.
Waste Toner Box Sends a notification when the waste toner box needs to be
Full replaced.
Imaging Unit Yield Sends a notification when the imaging unit (IU) needs to
be replaced.
Fusing Unit Yield Sends a notification when the fusing unit needs to be re-
placed.
Transfer Roller Unit Sends a notification when the transfer roller unit needs to
Yield be replaced.
Transfer Belt Unit Sends a notification when the transfer belt needs to be re-
Yield placed.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-123

2.41 Reporting the status of this machine (TRAP)
2
Item Description Prior check
Ozon Filter Yield Sends a notification when the ozon filter needs to be re-
placed.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-124

2.42 Reporting the counter information of this machine (by E-mail)
2
2.42 Reporting the counter information of this machine (by E-mail)
Configure settings to report the counter information of this machine by E-mail.
You can send the counter information being managed on this machine to the specified destination by E-mail.
A combination of POP before SMTP authentication, APOP authentication, SMTP authentication and SSL/TLS
encryption can be used for notification by E-mail.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

TCP/IP Settings

E-mail Transmis-
sion (SMTP)

Total Counter No-

tification Setting

Do you have an Do you use SMTP POP before SMTP?

SSL/TLS communi- authentication?
cation with the
SMTP server?

Yes No Yes No Yes No

SMTP over SMTP Authenti- POP before SMTP

SSL/Start TLS cation

(1) POP over SSL?

(2) APOP?

Yes No

(1)POP over SSL

(2)APOP Authenti-
cation

Finish

2.42.1 TCP/IP Settings

Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-125

2.42 Reporting the counter information of this machine (by E-mail)
2
2.42.2 E-mail Transmission (SMTP)
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "E-mail Setting" ö "E-mail
Transmission (SMTP)".

Item Description Prior check

E-mail TX Setting Select the "E-mail TX Setting" check box.
Total Counter Noti- Select "ON".
fication
SMTP Server Ad- Enter the SMTP server address. Server address
dress Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255)
If the DNS server has already been configured, you can
enter the host name instead.
If "IPv6" is set to "ON", you can also specify the IPv6 ad-
dress.
Port Number Enter the port number. Server port number
Default setting: 25
Connection Time- Specify the timeout period for a communication with a
out server.
Max Mail Size Select whether to limit the size of an E-mail to be sent.
Server Capacity Enter the SMTP server capacity. A mail that exceeds the Server reception limit
upper limit of the server capacity will be discarded.
If an E-mail is divided, this setting is made invalid.
Admin. E-mail Ad- Displays the E-mail address of the administrator.
dress If the administrator address has not been specified, enter
the E-mail address of the administrator by selecting "Sys-
tem Settings" and "Machine Setting".
Binary Division Select this check box to divide an E-mail. Restoration function
If the E-mail software that received an E-mail does not of E-mail software
have a restoration function, you may not be able to read
the E-mail.
Divided Mail Size Enter the divided mail size to divide an E-mail. Server reception limit

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-126

2.42 Reporting the counter information of this machine (by E-mail)
2
2.42.3 Total Counter Notification Setting
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Maintenance" ö "Total Counter
Notification Setting".

Item Description Prior check

Model Name Enter a model name to be included in the notification mail
message (up to 20 characters).
Schedule Setting Specify the conditions for the notification schedule. Notification schedule
Schedules 1 and 2 can be registered with different set-
tings.
Register Notifica- Enter the destination E-mail address (up to 320 charac- Destination
tion Address ters).
In addition, select a notification schedule.
Send notice after If "ON" is selected, a notification is tested when you press
setting complete [OK].

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-127

2.42 Reporting the counter information of this machine (by E-mail)
2
2.42.4 SMTP over SSL/Start TLS
Configure the settings for SMTP over SSL or Start TLS.
For details, refer to page 2-45.

2.42.5 SMTP Authentication

Configure SMTP authentication settings.
For details, refer to page 2-47.

2.42.6 POP before SMTP

Configure the settings for POP before SMTP.
For details, refer to page 2-47.

2.42.7 POP over SSL

Configure the settings for POP over SSL.
For details, refer to page 2-49.

2.42.8 APOP Authentication

Configure APOP authentication settings.
For details, refer to page 2-50.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-128

2.43 Restricting users of this machine (MFP authentication)
2
2.43 Restricting users of this machine (MFP authentication)
Configure settings to restrict users who can use this machine by MFP authentication.
You can configure the user authentication and account track settings to restrict use of this machine. User
authentication is suitable for managing individual users, but account track is suitable for managing groups of
users.
You can use a combination of user authentication and account track for management of each user for each
department. You can use this function to assign the counter to both the department and user counters, and
to aggregate the resulting values of both counters.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

General Settings

Administrative Setting

(1) User authentication

(2) Account track
(3) Synchronize user au-
thentication with account
track
(1) (2) (3)

User Registration Account Track Registration Account Track Registration

User Registration

Finish

2.43.1 General Settings

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "User Auth/Account Track" ö "General
Settings".
(This menu item will not be displayed when PageScope Authentication Manager is used for authentication.)

Item Description Prior check

User Authentica- Select "ON (MFP)".
tion

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-129

2.43 Restricting users of this machine (MFP authentication)
2
Item Description Prior check
Public User Access Select whether to allow the public user access. Do you permit the
If "ON (With Login)" is selected, the public user can use public user access?
this machine by selecting "Public User Access" in the lo-
gin page to log in to the machine.
If "ON (Without Login)" is selected, the public user can use
this machine without logging in to the machine in the login
page.
Account Track To enable account track, select "ON". Do you use the ac-
count track func-
tion?
Account Track In- To use the account track function, select its authentication
put Method method.
This setting is required when you only use the account
track function.
Synchronize User To synchronize user authentication with account track and Do you synchronize
Authentication & manage users for each account track, select "Synchro- user authentication
Account Track nize". with account track?
Once you specify the account name of the user at user
registration, you will be bale to log in by entering only the
user name. If you have omitted the account name, the
user must specify the account name when logging in for
the first time. The account name that the user specify at
the first login time will be registered as the account name
of the user.
Number of Enter a number of user counters to be assigned if user au-
Counters As- thentication and account track are enabled.
signed for Users You can aggregate the counter by user or account track,
and assign up to 1,000 counters to users and account
tracks. For example, if the number of user counters to be
assigned is set to 950, you can register up to 50 account
tracks.
When Number of Select the operation that is performed when the job count
Jobs Reach Maxi- of each user or department has reached its limit.
mum This limit must be set during user registration or account
track registration.

Reference
- If the Enhanced Security Mode is enabled, you cannot select "OFF" for the General Settings. Also, you
cannot allow the public user access.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-130

2.43 Restricting users of this machine (MFP authentication)
2
2.43.2 Administrative Setting
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "User Auth/Account Track" ö "User
Authentication Setting" ö "Administrative Setting".
(This menu item will not be displayed if user authentication is disabled.)

Item Description Prior check

ID & Print Select whether to process all print jobs requested from a Do you want to proc-
registered user as ID & print jobs. ess all print jobs re-
If you select "ON", all print jobs requested from a regis- quested from a
tered user are processed as "ID & print" jobs even when registered user as ID
ID & Print is not enabled on the printer driver. & Print jobs?
If you select "OFF", print jobs are processed as ID & print
jobs only when "ID & Print" is enabled on the printer driver.
A print job requested from a registered user is processed
as a normal one if "ID & Print" is not enabled on the printer
driver.
Public User Select the operation required when receiving a job without
authentication information (a job for which printing is in-
structed while user authentication or account track is not
enabled on the printer driver) or receiving a public user's
job.
If you select "Print Immediately", the received job is print-
ed as it is.
If you select "Save", the received job is saved in the ID &
Print User Box.
ID & Print Opera- Select the operating mode when using the ID & Print func-
tion Settings tion on an optional Authentication Unit.
Select "Print All Jobs" to print all jobs of the target user
that are saved in the ID & Print User Box by one authenti-
cation operation.
Select "Print Each Job" to print one job of the target user
that is saved in the ID & Print User Box by one authentica-
tion operation.
Default Operation Select the default operation you want to apply after Au-
Selection thentication has been completed on the authentication
unit (success in login).
If you select "Begin Printing", ID & print jobs are executed
after authentication has been completed.
If you select "Print & Access", ID & print jobs are executed
after authentication has been completed, and you can log
in to the basic window.
If you select "Access", you can log in to the basic window
after authentication has been completed. In this case, ID
& print jobs are not executed.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-131

2.43 Restricting users of this machine (MFP authentication)
2
Reference
- For details on the ID & print function, refer to the "User's Guide Print Operations".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-132

2.43 Restricting users of this machine (MFP authentication)
2
2.43.3 User Registration
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "User Auth/Account Track" ö "User
Authentication Setting" ö "User Registration" ö [New Registration].
(This menu item will not be displayed when PageScope Authentication Manager is used for authentication.)

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-133

2.43 Restricting users of this machine (MFP authentication)
2
Item Description Prior check
No. Select a registration numbering system.
If you specify the registration number, enter the number
directly.
User Name Enter a user name (up to 64 characters).
E-mail Address Enter the E-mail address of the user (up to 320 charac-
ters).
Password is Select this check box to change the password.
changed This item is displayed when editing the registered informa-
tion.
User Password Enter a password (up to 64 characters, excluding space
and ").
Retype User Pass- Reenter the password for confirmation (up to 64 charac-
word ters).
Account Name Enter an account name of the user.
Before you specify an account name, you must register
the account.
This item is displayed if user authentication and account
track are synchronized.
If you have omitted the account name, the user must
specify the user and account name when the user log in
for the first time. The account name that the user specify
at the first login time will be registered as the account
name of the user.
If the account information is changed after the account
name has been specified, the user and the account will be
dissociated.
Specify Icon From [Search from List], select an icon for the user.
Temporarily stop Select whether to temporarily disable a registered user.
use This item is available when temporarily disabling regis-
tered users without deleting them.
If you select "Stop Job", the target user cannot log in to or
use this machine.
This function is available when the MFP authentication is
enabled.
Function Permis- Specify whether to permit "Copy", "Scan", "Save to Exter-
sion nal Memory", "Scan a document in external memory",
"Fax", "Print", "User Box", "Print Scan/Fax TX", "Manual
Destination Input", "Cellular Phone/PDA", and "Register
biometric/IC card information".
Output Permission Select whether to allow Color and Black printing.
(Print)
Output Permission Select whether to allow the user to send color images.
(TX)
Max. Allowance Specify the maximum numbers of printed sheets and User
Set Boxes.
To specify the limit, select the appropriate check box and
enter the desired limit value.
Limiting Access to Restrict address book entries the user can access.
Destinations To specify the reference allowed groups, select this check
box and select groups from the list. You can select one or
more reference allowed groups.
To specify the access allowed level, select the check box
and specify the access allowed level.
Before you specify the reference allowed groups, you
must register reference allowed groups. For details, refer
to page 2-212.

Reference
- If "Password Rules" is enabled, you cannot enter the password with less than characters. If a user
password containing less than eight characters has already been registered, change the password so
that it contains eight characters before enabling "Password Rules".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-134

2.43 Restricting users of this machine (MFP authentication)
2
- If you permit the public user access, you can configure the Function Permission and Limiting Access
to Destinations settings for the public user. For details, refer to page 2-216.
- By default, the sheets printed in the single color/2 color mode are counted as being printed in color. To
restrict use of the color printing or color image transmission functions, you can change this behavior to
treat printing in the single color/2 color mode as monochrome printing if necessary. For details, refer to
page 2-218.
- Whether to allow the "Save to External Memory" function can be specified when "Save Document" is
set to "ON" in "System Settings" ö "User Box Settings" ö "External Memory Function Settings".
Whether to allow the "External Memory Document Scan" function can be specified when "USB to User
Box" is set to "ON" in "External Memory Function Settings". For details, refer to page 2-199.
- When "Security Settings" ö "Security Details" ö "Manual Destination Input" is set to "Restrict" in
"Administrator Settings" on the Control Panel, the user cannot manually enter the address regardless
of the setting of this function.
- To connect this machine to a cellular phone or PDA, install the optional Local Interface Kit EK-605 in
this machine. Whether to allow the "Mobile/PDA" function can be specified when "Bluetooth" is set to
"Enable" in "Network" ö "Bluetooth Setting" and "Bluetooth Print Settings" is set to "ON" in "System
Settings" ö "System Connection Setting".
- Whether to allow the "Biometric/IC Card Information Registration" function can be specified when
"Biometric/IC Card Information Registration" is set to "Allow" in "Security" ö "Restrict User Access"
while the optional authentication unit is installed.

2.43.4 Account Track Registration

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "User Auth/Account Track" ö "Account
Track Setting" ö [New].
(This menu item will not be displayed when PageScope Authentication Manager is used for authentication.)

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-135

2.43 Restricting users of this machine (MFP authentication)
2
Item Description Prior check
No. Select a registration numbering system.
If you specify the registration number, enter the number
directly.
Account Name Enter an account name (up to 8 characters, excluding
space and ").
Password is Select this check box to change the password.
changed This item is displayed when editing the registered informa-
tion.
Password Enter a password (up to 8 characters, excluding space
and ").
Retype Password Reenter the password (up to 8 characters).
Temporarily stop Select whether to temporarily disable a registered ac-
use count. This item is available when temporarily disabling
registered accounts without deleting them.
If you select "Stop Job", the target account cannot log in
to or use this machine. If you disable an account regis-
tered as a user's account name, users who belong to the
disabled account also cannot log in to this machine.
Output Permission Select whether to allow color or black printing.
(Print)
Output Permission Select whether to allow the user to send color images.
(TX)
Max. Allowance Specify the maximum numbers of printed sheets and User
Set Boxes.
To specify the limit, select the appropriate check box and
enter the desired limit value.

Reference
- If "Password Rules" is enabled, you cannot enter the password with less than characters. If a user
password containing less than eight characters has already been registered, change the password so
that it contains eight characters before enabling "Password Rules".
- By default, the sheets printed in the single color/2 color mode are counted as being printed in color. To
restrict use of the color printing or color image transmission functions, you can change this behavior to
treat printing in the single color/2 color mode as monochrome printing if necessary. For details, refer to
page 2-218.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-136

2.44 Restricting users of this machine (Active Directory)
2
2.44 Restricting users of this machine (Active Directory)
Configure settings to restrict users who use this machine with Active Directory.
These settings are required if you wish to use the user authentication with Active Directory on the Windows
Server. You can restrict the functions available to each user.
You can also restrict users who use this machine using Active Directory authentication in an IPv6 environment
configured by the Active Directory function of Windows Server 2008.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

TCP/IP Settings

External Server Settings

General Settings

Administrative Setting

Default Function Permis-

sion

Date/Time Setting

Finish

2.44.1 TCP/IP Settings

Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
- To use Active Directory, specify the DNS server being linked to the Active Directory in the DNS server
settings on this machine.
- To perform Active Directory authentication in an IPv6 environment configured by the Active Directory
function of Windows Server 2008, configure IPv6. For details on the IPv6 settings, refer to page 2-159.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-137

2.44 Restricting users of this machine (Active Directory)
2
2.44.2 External Server Settings
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "User Auth/Account Track" ö "External
Server Settings" ö [Edit].

Item Description Prior check

No. Displays the registration number.
External Server Enter the name of an external authentication server (up to
Name 32 characters).
External Server Select "Active Directory".
Type
Default Domain Enter the default domain name of Active Directory (up to Default Domain
Name 64 characters). Name

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-138

2.44 Restricting users of this machine (Active Directory)
2
2.44.3 General Settings
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "User Auth/Account Track" ö "General
Settings".
(This menu item will not be displayed when PageScope Authentication Manager is used for authentication.)

Item Description Prior check

User Authentica- Select "ON (External Server)".
tion
Public User Access Select whether to allow the public user access. Do you permit the
If "ON (With Login)" is selected, the public user can use public user access?
this machine by selecting "Public User Access" in the lo-
gin page to log in to the machine.
If "ON (Without Login)" is selected, the public user can use
this machine without logging in to the machine in the login
page.
Ticket Hold Time Enter a time to hold the Kerberos authentication tickets.
Setting (Active Di-
rectory)
Account Track To enable account track, select "ON". Do you use the ac-
To select "ON", specify the authentication method first, count track func-
and then register accounts in "Account Track Settings". tion?
Synchronize User To synchronize user authentication with account track and Do you synchronize
Authentication & manage users for each account track, select "Synchro- user authentication
Account Track nize". with account track?
To synchronize, specify the account name when logging
in for the first time. The account name that the user specify
at the first login time will be registered as the account
name of the user.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-139

2.44 Restricting users of this machine (Active Directory)
2
2.44.4 Administrative Setting
Configure settings to use or operate the ID & Print function.
For details, refer to page 2-131.

2.44.5 Default Function Permission

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "User Auth/Account Track" ö "User
Authentication Setting" ö "Default Function Permission".
(This menu item will not be displayed when PageScope Authentication Manager is used for authentication.)

Item Description Prior check

Copy Configure the default settings for function permissions to
users who are authenticated on the external server.
Scan If a user not registered on this machine is authenticated on
Save to External the external server, the user will be registered on this ma-
Memory chine with the function permissions that you configure
here.
External Memory Once the function permissions of a user have been regis-
Document Scan tered on this machine, you can edit them in "User Regis-
Fax tration".

Print
User Box
Print Scan/Fax TX
Manual Destination
Input
Mobile/PDA

Reference
- Whether to allow the "Save to External Memory" function can be specified when "Save Document" is
set to "ON" in "System Settings" ö "User Box Settings" ö "External Memory Function Settings".
Whether to allow the "External Memory Document Scan" function can be specified when "USB to User
Box" is set to "ON" in "External Memory Function Settings". For details, refer to page 2-199.
- When "Security Settings" ö "Security Details" ö "Manual Destination Input" is set to "Restrict" in
"Administrator Settings" on the Control Panel, the user cannot manually enter the address regardless
of the setting of this function.
- To connect this machine to a cellular phone or PDA, install the optional Local Interface Kit EK-605 in
this machine. Whether to allow the "Mobile/PDA" function can be specified when "Bluetooth" is set to
"Enable" in "Network" ö "Bluetooth Setting" and "Bluetooth Print Settings" is set to "ON" in "System
Settings" ö "System Connection Setting".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-140

2.44 Restricting users of this machine (Active Directory)
2
2.44.6 Date/Time Setting
To use Active Directory, specify the date and time of this machine.
- You cannot log in to Active Directory if the system time of this machine and Active Directory is extremely
different. Specify the correct date and time for this machine to match the system time of Active
Directory.
For details, refer to page 2-31.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-141

2.45 Restricting users of this machine (Windows domain or workgroup)
2
2.45 Restricting users of this machine (Windows domain or
workgroup)
Configure settings to restrict users who can use this machine by NTLM authentication.
These settings are required if you wish to use NTLM authentication when using the Windows NT 4.0 system
or when using Active Directory (NT-compatible domain environment) in the Windows Server system. You can
restrict the functions available to each user.
You can also restrict users who use this machine by NTLM authentication in an IPv6 environment configured
by the Active Directory function (NT-compatible domain environment) of Windows Server 2008.
To use NTLM authentication in the IPv6 environment, you must enable the Direct Hosting service. To resolve
the names using a DNS server, prepare the DNS server and configure the DNS settings of this machine.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

TCP/IP Settings

External Server Settings

General Settings

Administrative Setting

Default Function Permis-

sion

Client Setting

In an IPv6 environment?
No Yes

Do you use a WINS server? Direct Hosting Setting

Yes No

WINS Setting

Finish

2.45.1 TCP/IP Settings

Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
- To perform NTLM authentication in an IPv6 environment configured by the Active Directory function
(NT-compatible domain environment) of Windows Server 2008, configure IPv6. For details on the IPv6
settings, refer to page 2-159.
- To use NTLM authentication in the IPv6 environment, you must enable the Direct Hosting service. To
resolve the names using a DNS server, prepare the DNS server and configure the DNS settings of this
machine.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-142

2.45 Restricting users of this machine (Windows domain or workgroup)
2
2.45.2 External Server Settings
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "User Auth/Account Track" ö "External
Server Settings" ö [Edit].

Item Description Prior check

No Displays the registration number.
External Server Enter the name of an external authentication server (up to
Name 32 characters).
External Server Select "NTLM v1" or "NTLM v2".
Type NTLMv2 is applied on the Windows NT 4.0 (Service Pack
4) and later.
Default Domain Enter the NTLM default domain name (up to 64 charac- Default Domain
Name ters). Name
The default domain name must be uppercase letters.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-143

2.45 Restricting users of this machine (Windows domain or workgroup)
2
2.45.3 General Settings
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "User Auth/Account Track" ö "General
Settings".
(This menu item will not be displayed when PageScope Authentication Manager is used for authentication.)

Item Description Prior check

User Authentica- Select "ON (External Server)".
tion
Public User Access Select whether to allow the public user access. Do you permit the
If "ON (With Login)" is selected, the public user can use public user access?
this machine by selecting "Public User Access" in the lo-
gin page to log in to the machine.
If "ON (Without Login)" is selected, the public user can use
this machine without logging in to the machine in the login
page.
Account Track To enable account track, select "ON". Do you use the ac-
To select "ON", specify the authentication method first, count track func-
and then register accounts in "Account Track Settings". tion?
Synchronize User To synchronize user authentication with account track and Do you synchronize
Authentication & manage users for each account track, select "Synchro- user authentication
Account Track nize". with account track?
To synchronize, specify the account name when logging
in for the first time. The account name that the user specify
at the first login time will be registered as the account
name of the user.

2.45.4 Administrative Setting

Configure settings to use or operate the ID & Print function.
For details, refer to page 2-131.

2.45.5 Default Function Permission

Configure the default settings for function permissions to users who are authenticated on the external server.
For details, refer to page 2-140.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-144

2.45 Restricting users of this machine (Windows domain or workgroup)
2
2.45.6 Client Setting
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "SMB Setting" ö "Client
Setting".

Item Description Prior check

User Authentica- Select "ON".
tion (NTLM) If you set this option to "OFF" when NTLM authentication
is used, the user authentication method will be switched
to the MFP authentication.

2.45.7 WINS Setting

When you start NTLM authentication via the router, you must set up the WINS server.
For details, refer to page 2-36.

2.45.8 Direct Hosting Setting

To use NTLM authentication in the IPv6 environment, you must enable the direct hosting service.
For details, refer to page 2-37.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-145

2.46 Restricting users of this machine (NDS over IPX/SPX)
2
2.46 Restricting users of this machine (NDS over IPX/SPX)
Configure settings to restrict users who can use this machine with NDS over IPX/SPX.
These settings are required if you use the NetWare 5.1 or later and use the NDS authentication in the IPX/SPX
environment. You can restrict the functions available to each user.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

External Server Settings

General Settings

Administrative Setting

Default Function Permis-

sion

NetWare Settings

Finish

2.46.1 External Server Settings

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "User Auth/Account Track" ö "External
Server Settings" ö [Edit].

Item Description Prior check

No. Displays the registration number.
External Server Enter the name of an external authentication server (up to
Name 32 characters).

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-146

2.46 Restricting users of this machine (NDS over IPX/SPX)
2
Item Description Prior check
External Server Select "NDS over IPX/SPX".
Type
Default NDS Tree Enter the default NDS tree name (up to 63 characters).
Name
Default NDS Con- Enter the default NDS context name (up to 191 charac-
text Name ters).

2.46.2 General Settings

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "User Auth/Account Track" ö "General
Settings".
(This menu item will not be displayed when PageScope Authentication Manager is used for authentication.)

Item Description Prior check

User Authentica- Select "ON (External Server)".
tion
Public User Access Select whether to allow the public user access. Do you permit the
If "ON (With Login)" is selected, the public user can use public user access?
this machine by selecting "Public User Access" in the lo-
gin page to log in to the machine.
If "ON (Without Login)" is selected, the public user can use
this machine without logging in to the machine in the login
page.
Account Track To enable account track, select "ON". Do you use the ac-
To select "ON", specify the authentication method first, count track func-
and then register accounts in "Account Track Settings". tion?
Synchronize User To synchronize user authentication with account track and Do you synchronize
Authentication & manage users for each account track, select "Synchro- user authentication
Account Track nize". with account track?
To synchronize, specify the account name when logging
in for the first time. The account name that the user specify
at the first login time will be registered as the account
name of the user.

2.46.3 Administrative Setting

Configure settings to use or operate the ID & Print function.
For details, refer to page 2-131.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-147

2.46 Restricting users of this machine (NDS over IPX/SPX)
2
2.46.4 Default Function Permission
Configure the default settings for function permissions to users who are authenticated on the external server.
For details, refer to page 2-140.

2.46.5 NetWare Settings

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "NetWare Setting" ö
"NetWare Setting".

Item Description Prior check

IPX Setting Select "ON".
Ethernet Frame Select a frame type to be used. Frame type
Type
User Authentica- Select "ON".
tion Setting

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-148

2.47 Restricting users of this machine (NDS over TCP/IP)
2
2.47 Restricting users of this machine (NDS over TCP/IP)
Configure settings to restrict users who can use this machine with NDS over TCP/IP.
These settings are required if you use the NetWare 5.1 or later and use NDS authentication in the TCP/IP
environment. You can restrict the functions available to each user. Apply the latest service pack to each
NetWare version.
To use the authentication with NDS over TCP/IP, you must specify the DNS server in the DNS sever settings
of this machine. During user authentication, the tree name and context name are inquired to the specified
DNS server to obtain the IP address of the NDS authentication server.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

TCP/IP Settings

External Server Settings

General Settings

Administrative Setting

Default Function Permis-

sion

Finish

2.47.1 TCP/IP Settings

Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
- To use the authentication with NDS over TCP/IP, you must specify the DNS server in the DNS sever
settings of this machine.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-149

2.47 Restricting users of this machine (NDS over TCP/IP)
2
2.47.2 External Server Settings
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "User Auth/Account Track" ö "External
Server Settings" ö [Edit].

Item Description Prior check

No Displays the registration number.
External Server Enter the name of an external authentication server (up to
Name 32 characters).
External Server Select "NDS over TCP/IP".
Type
Default NDS Tree Enter the default NDS tree name (up to 63 characters).
Name
Default NDS Con- Enter the default NDS context name (up to 191 charac-
text Name ters).

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-150

2.47 Restricting users of this machine (NDS over TCP/IP)
2
2.47.3 General Settings
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "User Auth/Account Track" ö "General
Settings".
(This menu item will not be displayed when PageScope Authentication Manager is used for authentication.)

Item Description Prior check

User Authentica- Select "ON (External Server)".
tion
Public User Access Select whether to allow the public user access. Do you permit the
If "ON (With Login)" is selected, the public user can use public user access?
this machine by selecting "Public User Access" in the lo-
gin page to log in to the machine.
If "ON (Without Login)" is selected, the public user can use
this machine without logging in to the machine in the login
page.
Account Track To enable account track, select "ON". Do you use the ac-
To select "ON", specify the authentication method first, count track func-
and then register accounts in "Account Track Settings". tion?
Synchronize User To synchronize user authentication with account track and Do you synchronize
Authentication & manage users for each account track, select "Synchro- user authentication
Account Track nize". with account track?
To synchronize, specify the account name when logging
in for the first time. The account name that the user specify
at the first login time will be registered as the account
name of the user.

2.47.4 Administrative Setting

Configure settings to use or operate the ID & Print function.
For details, refer to page 2-131.

2.47.5 Default Function Permission

Configure the default settings for function permissions to users who are authenticated on the external server.
For details, refer to page 2-140.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-151

2.48 Restricting users of this machine (LDAP)
2
2.48 Restricting users of this machine (LDAP)
Configure settings to restrict users who can access to this machine using the LDAP server.
These settings are required if you use the LDAP server for user authentication. You can restrict the functions
available to each user.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.
Reference
- To use the same LDAP server for both user authentication and destination search, the certificate
verification settings of the LDAP server for user authentication specified in "External Server Settings"
are determined according to the certificate verification settings of the LDAP server for destination
search specified in "Network" ö "LDAP Setting" ö "Setting Up LDAP". For details on LDAP server
settings for destination search and certificate verification settings, refer to page 2-60.

TCP/IP Settings

External Server Settings

General Settings

Administrative Setting

Default Function Permis-

sion

Do you have an SSL

communication with the
LDAP server?

Yes No

LDAP over SSL

Finish

2.48.1 TCP/IP Settings

Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-152

2.48 Restricting users of this machine (LDAP)
2
2.48.2 External Server Settings
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "User Auth/Account Track" ö "External
Server Settings" ö [Edit].

Item Description Prior check

No Displays the registration number.
External Server Enter the name of an external authentication server (up to
Name 32 characters).
External Server Select "LDAP".
Type
Server Address Specify the LDAP server address. Server address
Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255)
If the DNS server has already been configured, you can
enter the host name instead.
If "IPv6" is set to "ON", you can also specify the IPv6 ad-
dress.
Port No. Enter the port number.
Default setting: 389
Search Base Enter the search starting point in the directory structure Search base
under the LDAP server (up to 255 characters).
This search function also covers subdirectories under the
entered starting point.
Timeout Enter the timeout period for LDAP search.
General Settings Select the authentication method to log in to the LDAP Server authentica-
server. tion method
Select the same authentication method as that used on
the LDAP server.
Search Attributes Enter attributes to be used for search of user account (up
to 64 characters, the only symbol allowed is a hyphen (-)).

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-153

2.48 Restricting users of this machine (LDAP)
2
2.48.3 General Settings
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "User Auth/Account Track" ö "General
Settings".
(This menu item will not be displayed when PageScope Authentication Manager is used for authentication.)

Item Description Prior check

User Authentica- Select "ON (External Server)".
tion
Public User Select whether to allow the public user access. Do you permit the
If "ON (With Login)" is selected, the public user can use public user access?
this machine by selecting "Public User Access" in the lo-
gin page to log in to the machine.
If "ON (Without Login)" is selected, the public user can use
this machine without logging in to the machine in the login
page.
Account Track To enable account track, select "ON". Do you use the ac-
To select "ON", specify the authentication method first, count track func-
and then register accounts in "Account Track Settings". tion?
Synchronize User To synchronize user authentication with account track, Do you synchronize
Authentication & select "Synchronize". user authentication
Account Track with account track?

2.48.4 Administrative Setting

Configure settings to use or operate the ID & Print function.
For details, refer to page 2-131.

2.48.5 Default Function Permission

Configure the default settings for function permissions to users who are authenticated on the external server.
For details, refer to page 2-140.

2.48.6 LDAP over SSL

External Server Settings

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "User Auth/Account Track" ö "External
Server Settings" ö [Edit].

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-154

2.48 Restricting users of this machine (LDAP)
2
Item Description Prior check
Enable SSL Select this check box to encrypt an SSL communication Does the server sup-
between this machine and the LDAP server. port SSL?
Port No. (SSL) Enter the port number to be used for SSL communication. Server port number

Setting Up LDAP (Certificate Verification Level Settings)

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "LDAP Setting" ö "Setting
Up LDAP" ö [Edit].
Reference
- To validate the certificate, in "Setting Up LDAP", register the same information as that for the LDAP
server specified in "External Server Settings", and then specify the certificate verification level. For
details, refer to page 2-62.

Item Description Prior check

Certificate Verifica- To verify the server certificate, configure settings to verify
tion Level Settings the certificate.
Validity Period Select whether to check that the server certificate is within
the validity period.
CN Select whether to check that the CN of the server certifi-
cate matches the server address.
Key Usage Select whether to check that the server certificate is used
according to the purpose approved by the issuer.
Chain Select whether to check that the server certificate chain
(certification path) is correct.
The chain is validated by referencing the external certifi-
cates managed on this machine. For details, refer to
page 2-210.
Expiration Date Select whether to check that the server certificate is within
Confirmation the validity period.
The OCSP service and CRL (Certificate Revocation List)
are checked in this order when the expiration date of the
certificate is checked.

Certificate Verification Settings

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Security" ö "Certificate Verification
Settings".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-155

2.48 Restricting users of this machine (LDAP)
2
Item Description Prior check
Certificate Verifica- Select "ON" to verify the server certificate.
tion Settings
Timeout Enter a timeout period for expiration date confirmation. Do you confirm the
expiration date?
OCSP Service Select this check box to use the OCSP service.
URL Enter the URL of the OCSP service (up to 511 characters).
If this item is left blank, the machine accesses the URL of
the OCSP service embedded in the certificate. If the URL
of the OCSP service is not embedded in the certificate, an
error will occur.
Proxy Server Ad- To confirm the expiration date via a proxy server, enter its Server address
dress address.
Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255)
If the DNS server has already been configured, you can
enter the host name instead.
If "IPv6" is set to "ON", you can also specify the IPv6 ad-
dress.
Proxy Server Port Enter the port number of a proxy server. Server port number
Number
User Name Enter the user name to log in to the proxy server (up to 63
characters).
Password is Select this check box to change the password.
changed.
Password Enter the password to log in to the proxy server (up to 63
characters).
Address not using To enable expiration date confirmation, specify an ad-
Proxy Server dress that does not use the proxy server depending on
your environment.
If the DNS server has already been configured, you can
enter the host name instead.
If "IPv6" is set to "ON", you can also specify the IPv6 ad-
dress.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-156

2.49 Filtering IP addresses
2
2.49 Filtering IP addresses
Configure settings to enable IP address filtering.
With IP address filtering, you can restrict access from the specified IP addresses. You can specify both IP
addresses that are allowed to access this machine and IP addresses that are not allowed to access this
machine.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

TCP/IP Settings

IP Filtering

Finish

Reference
- You cannot specify the IPv6 address using IP address filtering.

2.49.1 TCP/IP Settings

Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

2.49.2 IP Filtering
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "TCP/IP Setting" ö "IP
Filtering".

Item Description Prior check

Permit Access To specify addresses you permit access from, select
"Enable".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-157

2.49 Filtering IP addresses
2
Item Description Prior check
Set 1 to 5 Enter the start and end addresses of ranges you permit Address ranges that
access from. you permit access
Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255) from
Deny Access To specify addresses you deny access from, select "Ena-
ble".
Set 1 to 5 Specify the start and end addresses of ranges you deny Address ranges that
access from. you deny access
Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255) from

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-158

2.50 Communicating using IPv6
2
2.50 Communicating using IPv6
Configure settings for IPv6 communication.
These settings are required if you want use this machine with an IPv6 address assigned. You can use IPv6
together with IPv4, but you cannot use IPv6 alone.
When you use this machine in an IPv6 environment, the following restrictions apply.
- Printing with SMB is not supported (but it is allowed for the Direct Hosting service).
- No scanned data can be sent with SMB (but it is allowed for the Direct Hosting service).
- SMB browsing is not supported (available for Publication Service).
- NTLM authentication is not supported (but it is allowed for the Direct Hosting service).
- You cannot use the IP filtering function.
- You cannot use the installer of the printer driver (available for Windows Vista or Server 2008).
- You cannot display PageScope Web Connection in Flash.

d Reference
For details on the Direct Hosting service, refer to the sections listed below.
Sending scanned data to a computer on network (p. 2-34)
Print (SMB) (p. 2-92)
Restricting users of this machine (Windows domain or workgroup) (p. 2-142)

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-159

2.50 Communicating using IPv6
2
TCP/IP Setting
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "TCP/IP Setting" ö "TCP/IP
Setting".

Item Description Prior check

TCP/IP Select "ON".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-160

2.50 Communicating using IPv6
2
Item Description Prior check
IPv6 Select "ON".
Auto IPv6 Setting To obtain the IPv6 address automatically, select "ON". Do you obtain the
IPv6 address auto-
matically?
DHCPv6 Setting To use DHCPv6 to obtain the IPv6 address, select "ON". Do you use
DHCPv6?
Link-Local Address Displays the link-local address generated from the MAC
address.
Global Address If you do not obtain the IPv6 address automatically, enter IPv6 address
the IPv6 global address.
Prefix Length If you do not obtain the IPv6 address automatically, enter Prefix length
the prefix length of the IPv6 global address.
Gateway Address If you do not obtain the IPv6 address automatically, enter Gateway address
the IPv6 gateway address.
DNS Server Setting Configure the DNS server settings as necessary.
(IPv6)
DNS Server Auto Select whether to obtain the DNS server address auto- Can be obtained au-
Obtain matically. tomatically with
This setting is required if DHCPv6 is enabled. DHCPv6?
Primary DNS Serv- Enter the address of the primary DNS server if you do not Server address
er obtain the DNS server address automatically.
Secondary DNS Specify the addresses of the secondary DNS servers. Server address
Server 1 and 2

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-161

2.51 Communicating using IPsec
2
2.51 Communicating using IPsec
Configure settings for IPsec communication.
The IPsec-based communication can prevent a data falsification and reveal of each IP packet. The
communication can be secured even if you use the transport and application layers that do not support
encryption.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

TCP/IP Settings

IPsec

IKE

SA

Peer

Finish

2.51.1 TCP/IP Settings

Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-162

2.51 Communicating using IPsec
2
2.51.2 IPsec
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "TCP/IP Setting" ö "IPsec".

Item Description Prior check

IPsec Select "ON".

2.51.3 IKE

IKE
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "TCP/IP Setting" ö "IPsec".

Item Description Prior check

Key Validity Period Enter a validation period of the common key that is used
for encrypted communication.
When this period has expired, a new key is created. This
can secure the communication.
Diffie-Hellman Select the Diffie-Hellman group.
Group

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-163

2.51 Communicating using IPsec
2
IKE Setting
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "TCP/IP Setting" ö "IPsec"
ö "IKE" ö [Edit].
(Up to four groups can be registered for the IKE.)

Item Description Prior check

Encryption Algo- Select an encryption algorithm to be used for creation of
rithm the common key.
Authentication Al- Select an authentication algorithm to be used for creation
gorithm of the common key.

2.51.4 SA

SA
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "TCP/IP Setting" ö "IPsec".

Item Description Prior check

Lifetime After Es- Enter a validation period of the common key that is used
tablishing SA for encrypted communication.
When this period has expired, a new key is created. This
can secure the communication.

SA Setting
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "TCP/IP Setting" ö "IPsec"
ö "SA" ö [Edit].
(Up to eight groups can be registered for the SA.)

Item Description Prior check

Security Protocol Select a security protocol to use.
ESP Encryption Al- If you have set the Security Protocol to "ESP", select the
gorithm ESP encryption algorithm.
ESP Authentication If you have set the Security Protocol to "ESP", select the
Algorithm ESP authentication algorithm.
AH Authentication If you have set the Security Protocol to "AH", select the AH
Algorithm authentication algorithm.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-164

2.51 Communicating using IPsec
2
2.51.5 Peer
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "TCP/IP Setting" ö "IPsec"
ö "Peer" ö [Edit].
(Up to 10 peers can be registered.)

Item Description Prior check

Perfect Forward To increase the IKE security level, select "ON".
Secrecy If you have selected "ON", the communication time in-
creases.
Peer Enter the IP address of the peer. IP address of the
If "IPv6" is set to "ON", you can also specify the IPv6 ad- peer
dress.
Pre-Shared Key Enter the Pre-Shared Key text to be shared with the peer
Text (up to 64 characters).
This text must be the same as that used at the peer.
Encapsulation Select an IPsec operation mode.
Mode

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-165

2.52 Using IEEE802.1X authentication
2
2.52 Using IEEE802.1X authentication
If you use this machine in a wired LAN environment having the IEEE802.1x authentication system, you must
configure the supplicant (authentication client) function of this machine.
Using IEEE802.1x authentication can restrict any device not permitted by the administrator to connect to this
LAN environment. Configure settings to fit your environment.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

TCP/IP Settings

Device Certificate Setting

IEEE802.1X Authentication
Setting

Certificate validation

IEEE802.1X Authentication
Trial

Finish

2.52.1 TCP/IP Settings

Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

2.52.2 Device Certificate Setting

Register the client certificate (device certificate) on this machine, based on the EAP authentication method
to be used.
- If EAP-Type is "EAP-TLS", you must register the device certificate.
- If EAP-Type is "EAP-TTLS" or "PEAP", you may be required to register the device certificate according
to your applications.
For details on device certificate registration, refer to page 2-15.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-166

2.52 Using IEEE802.1X authentication
2
2.52.3 IEEE802.1X Authentication Setting
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "IEEE802.1x Authentication
Setting" ö "IEEE802.1x Authentication Setting".

Item Description Prior check

Authentication Sta- The authentication status is shown as follows.
tus • Authenticated: The authentication has completed.
• Authenticating: The authentication is in progress.
• Unauthenticated: Not authenticated status
• Authentication Failed: The authentication has failed.
• Failed to Retrieve Status: No authentication status
could be obtained.
When you press [Refresh], the authentication status is up-
dated.
IEEE802.1X Au- Select "ON".
thentication Set-
ting
Supplicant Setting Configure settings required in order for this machine,
which is a supplicant (authentication client), to receive au-
thentication from the authentication server.
Configure settings to fit your environment.
User ID Enter a user ID (up to 128 characters).
This user ID is used for all EAP-Type options.
Password is Select this check box to change the password.
changed.
Password Enter the password (up to 128 characters).
The password is used for all EAP-Type options other than
"EAP-TLS".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-167

2.52 Using IEEE802.1X authentication
2
Item Description Prior check
EAP-Type Select an EAP authentication method. EAP authentication
If you select "Depend on Server", the EAP-Type provided method
by the authentication server will be used for authentica-
tion. Configure the supplicant settings as required for this
machine according to the EAP-Type provided by the au-
thentication server.
Do not set this item to "OFF".
EAP-TTLS Configure settings for EAP-TTLS.
anonymous Enter an anonymous name to be used for EAP-TTLS au-
thentication (up to 128 characters).
This item is available if EAP-Type is set to "EAP-TTLS" or
"Depend on Server".
Inner Authentica- Select an EAP-TTLS inner authentication protocol.
tion Protocol This item is available if EAP-Type is set to "EAP-TTLS" or
"Depend on Server".
Server ID Enter a server ID (up to 64 characters). Do you verify CN of
This setting is required if you very the CN of the server cer- the server certifi-
tificate. cate?
Client Certificates Select whether to encrypt authentication information us-
ing client certificates of this machine. You can configure
this setting when client certificates are registered in this
machine.
If EAP-Type is "EAP-TLS", the client certificates are al-
ways required.
This setting can be configured even if EAP-Type is set to
"EAP-TTLS" or "PEAP".
Encryption Select an encryption strength level for encrypted commu-
Strength nication with TLS.
• Low: Keys of any length are used for communication.
• Mid: Keys that are more than 56 bits in length are used
for communication.
• High: Keys that are more than 128 bits in length are
used for communication.
This item is available if EAP-Type is set to anything other
than "OFF" or "EAP-MD5".
Network Stop Time If an authentication process does not succeed within the
specified time, all network communication will stop. To
specify the delay between the start of an authentication
process and the stop of network communication, select
this box.
Stop Time Specify the delay (sec.) between the start of an authenti-
cation process and the stop of network communication.
To restart the authentication process after network com-
munication has stopped, turn the main power of this ma-
chine off and on again.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-168

2.52 Using IEEE802.1X authentication
2
2.52.4 Certificate validation

IEEE802.1X Authentication Setting

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "IEEE802.1x Authentication
Setting" ö "IEEE802.1x Authentication Setting".

Item Description Prior check

Certificate Verifica- To verify the server certificate, configure settings to verify
tion Level Settings the certificate.
Validity Period Select whether to check that the server certificate is within
the validity period.
CN Select whether to check that the CN of the server certifi-
cate matches the server address.
To check the CN, specify "Server ID".
Chain Select whether to check that the server certificate chain
(certification path) is correct.
The chain is validated by referencing the external certifi-
cates managed on this machine. For details, refer to
page 2-210.

Certificate Verification Settings

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Security" ö "Certificate Verification
Settings".

Item Description Prior check

Certificate Verifica- Select "ON" to verify the server certificate.
tion Settings

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-169

2.52 Using IEEE802.1X authentication
2
2.52.5 IEEE802.1X Authentication Trial
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "IEEE802.1x Authentication
Setting" ö "IEEE802.1X Authentication Trial".

Item Description Prior check

Authentication Sta- The authentication status is shown as follows.
tus • Authenticated: The authentication has completed.
• Authenticating: The authentication is in progress.
• Unauthenticated: Not authenticated status
• Authentication Failed: The authentication has failed.
• Failed to Retrieve Status: No authentication status
could be obtained.
When you press [Refresh], the authentication status is up-
dated.
[Authentication Tri- Click this button to attempt authentication immediately.
al]

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-170

2.53 Using applications that communicate with this machine with TCP Socket
2
2.53 Using applications that communicate with this machine with TCP
Socket
Configure setting for TCP Socket of this machine.
TCP Socket is used for data communication between this machine and application software running on the
computer.
If you have registered the device certificate on this machine, you can encrypt TCP Socket communications
between the application software and this machine with SSL.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

TCP/IP Settings

Do you use SSL communi-

cation?

Yes No

Device Certificate Setting

TCP Socket Settings

Finish

Reference
- If you use PageScope Authentication Manager for authentication, configure the TCP Socket setting to
use SSL/TLS.
- If authentication is performed by the external server when using applications that communicate with
this machine using TCP Socket, configure the TCP Socket setting to use SSL/TLS.

2.53.1 TCP/IP Settings

Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

2.53.2 Device Certificate Setting

Configure settings for SSL communication.
For details, refer to page 2-15.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-171

2.53 Using applications that communicate with this machine with TCP Socket
2
2.53.3 TCP Socket Settings
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "TCP Socket Setting".

Item Description Prior check

TCP Socket Select this check box.
Port Number Enter the port number.
Use SSL/TLS To use the SSL/TLS, select the "Use SSL/TLS" check box. Do you use
SSL/TLS?
Port Number (SSL) Enter the port number to be used for SSL communication.

Reference
- If Enhanced Security Mode is enabled, "Use SSL/TLS" is automatically enabled.
- If you select [OK] after changing multiple port numbers together in PageScope Web Connection or on
the control panel, a port number duplication error may be displayed. When this error is displayed, first
change one port number and select [OK]. Then change another one and select [OK].

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-172

2.54 Linking an OpenAPI system with this machine
2
2.54 Linking an OpenAPI system with this machine
Configure the OpenAPI settings of this machine.
These settings are required when you want to link an OpenAPI system with this machine.
If you have registered the device certificate on this machine and if you use this machine as a communication
server, you can encrypt OpenAPI communications from the client to this machine using SSL. Also, this
machine can request the OpenAPI client for a submission of the client certificate. When the client connects
to this machine, the submitted client certificate is verified and the client can be authenticated.
When this machine communicates as a client and when the certificate is submitted by the server, this
machine can verify the submitted certificate.
If the OpenAPI connection application supports the SSDP function, you can notify the application that the
OpenAPI service has started on this machine by using the SSDP function of this machine. If the OpenAPI
service is searched by the SSDP function in application, a response will be returned when this machine
satisfies relevant search conditions.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure.

TCP/IP Settings

SSDP Settings

Do you use SSL communica-

tion?

Yes No

Device Certificate Setting

OpenAPI Setting

Do you validate the certificate?

Yes No

Certificate validation

Finish

Reference
- If you use PageScope Authentication Manager for authentication, configure the OpenAPI setting to use
SSL/TLS.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-173

2.54 Linking an OpenAPI system with this machine
2
2.54.1 TCP/IP Settings
Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

2.54.2 SSDP Settings

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "SSDP Setting".

Item Description Prior check

SSDP You can notify the application that the OpenAPI service Does the application
has started on this machine, if the OpenAPI connection support the SSDP
application supports the SSDP function and it is set to function?
"ON".
If the OpenAPI service is searched by the SSDP function
in the application, a response will be returned when this
machine satisfies relevant search conditions.
Multi-Cast TTL Enter TTL (Time To Live) for SSDP multi-cast packet.
Setting The value is decremented by one each time a communi-
cation is established via the router. When the value reach-
es 0, packets are discarded.

2.54.3 Device Certificate Setting

Configure settings for SSL communication.
For details, refer to page 2-15.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-174

2.54 Linking an OpenAPI system with this machine
2
2.54.4 OpenAPI Setting
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "OpenAPI Setting".

Item Description Prior check

Use SSL/TLS To use SSL encryption, select "SSL Only" or "SSL/Non- Do you use
SSL". SSL/TLS?
Port Number Enter the port number.
Port Number (SSL) Enter the port number to be used for SSL communication.

Reference
- If the enhanced security mode is enabled, "Use SSL/TLS" is automatically set to "SSL Only".
- When you use PageScope Authentication Manager for authentication from the printer driver, set
"System Connection" ö "OpenAPI Settings" ö "Authentication" to "OFF" in administrator settings on
the control panel.
- If you select [OK] after changing multiple port numbers together in PageScope Web Connection or on
the control panel, a port number duplication error may be displayed. When this error is displayed, first
change one port number and select [OK]. Then change another one and select [OK].

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-175

2.54 Linking an OpenAPI system with this machine
2
2.54.5 Certificate validation

Certificate Verification Level Settings

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "OpenAPI Setting".

Item Description Prior check

Certificate Verifica- Specify how to validate a certificate.
tion Level Settings
Client Certificates Specify whether to request for client certificates. Do you request for
If you authenticate the client by requesting for its certifi- client certificates?
cate (verification of client certificate), select "Request".
Validity Period Select whether to check that the target certificate is within
the validity period.
CN Select whether to check that the CN of the certificate
matches the server address.
Key Usage Select whether to check that the certificate key is being
used properly.
Chain Select whether to check that the certificate chain (certifi-
cation path) is correct.
The chain is validated by referencing the external certifi-
cates managed on this machine. For details, refer to
page 2-210.
Expiration Date Select whether to check the target certificate for valida-
Confirmation tion.
The OCSP service and CRL (Certificate Revocation List)
are checked in this order when the expiration date of the
certificate is checked.

Certificate Verification Settings

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Security" ö "Certificate Verification
Settings".

Item Description Prior check

Certificate Verifica- Select "ON" to validate the certificate.
tion Settings

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-176

2.54 Linking an OpenAPI system with this machine
2
Item Description Prior check
Timeout Enter a timeout period for expiration date confirmation. Do you confirm the
expiration date?
OCSP Service Select this check box to use the OCSP service.
URL Enter the URL of the OCSP service (up to 511 characters).
If this item is left blank, the machine accesses the URL of
the OCSP service embedded in the certificate. If the URL
of the OCSP service is not embedded in the certificate, an
error will occur.
Proxy Server Ad- To confirm the expiration date via a proxy server, enter its Server address
dress address.
Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255)
If the DNS server has already been configured, you can
enter the host name instead.
If "IPv6" is set to "ON", you can also specify the IPv6 ad-
dress.
Proxy Server Port Enter the port number of a proxy server. Server port number
Number
User Name Enter the user name to log in to the proxy server (up to 63
characters).
Password is Select this check box to change the password.
changed.
Password Enter the password to log in to the proxy server (up to 63
characters).
Address not using To enable expiration date confirmation, specify an ad-
Proxy Server dress that does not use the proxy server depending on
your environment.
If the DNS server has already been configured, you can
enter the host name instead.
If "IPv6" is set to "ON", you can also specify the IPv6 ad-
dress.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-177

2.55 Using the FTP server and WebDAV server functions
2
2.55 Using the FTP server and WebDAV server functions
Configure settings to use the FTP server and WebDAV server functions of this machine.
These settings are required when you use an application that links with this machine as an FTP client or a
WebDAV client.
If you use this machine as the WebDAV server, you can encrypt the communication from the application with
SSL for security enhancement.
Use the following flowchart to configure settings.

TCP/IP Settings

(1) FTP server

(2) WebDAV server

(1) (2)

FTP Server Settings Do you use SSL communi-

cation?

No Yes

Device Certificate Setting

WebDAV Server Settings

Finish

2.55.1 TCP/IP Settings

Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to page 2-6.

2.55.2 Device Certificate Setting

Configure settings for SSL communication.
For details, refer to page 2-15.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-178

2.55 Using the FTP server and WebDAV server functions
2
2.55.3 FTP Server Settings
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "FTP Setting" ö "FTP Server
Settings".

Item Description Prior check

FTP Server Select "ON".

Reference
- If Enhanced Security Mode is enabled, this item is set to "OFF".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-179

2.55 Using the FTP server and WebDAV server functions
2
2.55.4 WebDAV Server Settings
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Network" ö "WebDAV Setting" ö
"WebDAV Server Settings".

Item Description Prior check

WebDAV Settings Select "ON".
SSL Settings To use the SSL/TLS protocol, select "SSL Only" or Do you use SSL?
"SSL/Non-SSL".
Password is Select this check box to change the password.
changed.
Current Password Enter the currently specified password (up to 8 charac-
ters).
This item is not displayed when the default is not changed.
New Password Enter the password used to access the WebDAV server
(up to 8 characters, excluding space and ").
Retype New Pass- Reenter the password for confirmation (up to 8 charac-
word ters).
[Initial Password] To initialize the existing password, click this button.
Default setting: sysadm

Reference
- Before you use the SSL protocol, register the device certificate. For details, refer to page 2-15.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-180

2.56 Settings under "Maintenance"
2
2.56 Settings under "Maintenance"
This section explains other configurable items under "Maintenance" of PageScope Web Connection.

2.56.1 Checking the counter of this machine

Check the counter information being managed on this machine.

Meter Count
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Maintenance" ö "Meter Count".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-181

2.56 Settings under "Maintenance"
2
2.56.2 Checking the machine ROM version
Check the ROM version of this machine.

ROM Version
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Maintenance" ö "ROM Version".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-182

2.56 Settings under "Maintenance"
2
2.56.3 Importing and exporting the machine configuration information
You can save (export) the configuration information being stored in this machine to the computer. You can
also write (import) the information from the computer to this machine.

Import/Export
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Maintenance" ö "Import/Export".

Item Description
Device Setting Import or export the device settings.
Counter Export the counter information.
The counter can only be exported.
Authentication Infor- Back up or restore the entire authentication data.
mation You can also import or export the user registration information and authenti-
cation data. When the optional authentication unit is used on this machine, you
can import or export the authentication data.
When you export the authentication data, you can set a password as required.
The specified password is required for importing the authentication informa-
tion.
If you use PageScope Authentication Manager for authentication, this item is
not displayed.
Address Back up or restore the full destination data. Also import or export the informa-
tion of each destination.
When you export the destination information, you can set a password as re-
quired. The specified password is required for importing the destination infor-
mation.
Copy Protect/Stamp Import or export the Copy Protect/Stamp data.
List of Inhibited Codes Import or export the list of inhibited codes of our deprecated OpenAPI con-
nection applications.

Reference
- You cannot edit exported files.
- If you export the E-mail addresses with certificates and then import them, you must register the
certificate information after importing them.
- For details on the list of inhibited codes, contact your service representative.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-183

2.56 Settings under "Maintenance"
2
2.56.4 Using the timer functions
Configure the Power Save and Weekly Timer functions.
There are two types of power saving mode: Low Power and Sleep. More electric power will be saved in the
Sleep mode when compared with the Low Power mode. However, the Sleep mode takes more time to warm
up this machine than the Low Power mode. Select the mode appropriate to your application.
The Weekly Timer function allows you to specify the time before transition to the Sleep mode in units of days
or weeks. You can control the power saving according to your application.

Power Save Setting

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Maintenance" ö "Timer Setting" ö
"Power Save Setting".

Item Description
Low Power Mode Set- Enter a time interval before transition to the Low Power mode since the last
ting operation of this machine.
Sleep Mode Setting Enter a time interval before transition to the Sleep mode since the last opera-
tion of this machine.
Power Save Key If you do not operate this machine for a long time, you can forcibly switch this
machine to the power saving mode by pressing the [Power Save] key on the
control panel.
Select the mode this machine will transition to when you press the [Power
Save] key.
Enter Power Save Specify how to return to the Power Save mode after printout of the fax docu-
Mode ment that was received in the Power Save mode.
Setting this item to "Immediately" returns this machine immediately after re-
ceiving a fax while it is not being used (in the night for example), thus saving
the electric power more efficiently.
If you set this item to "Normal", this machine returns to the Power Save mode
after the specified transition time has elapsed.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-184

2.56 Settings under "Maintenance"
2
Weekly Timer Setting
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Maintenance" ö "Timer Setting" ö
"Weekly Timer Setting".

Item Description
Use Weekly Timer To use the Weekly Timer function, select this check box and specify the oper-
ation date and time.
Specify dates or days of every week when the Weekly Timer function is acti-
vated. You can also specify both dates and days of the week at the same time.
Click [Setting], and then specify the days when Weekly Timer operates in the
displayed window.
Use Power Save To use the Power Save function, select this check box and specify the OFF
Time and the Power Save End Time.
Use Overtime Pass- Specify the overtime password to restrict the users who can temporarily use
word this machine while it is being placed in the Sleep mode by the Weekly Timer
function.
To specify the overtime password, select this check box and enter the pass-
word (up to eight characters, excluding + and ").

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-185

2.56 Settings under "Maintenance"
2
2.56.5 Displaying a network error code
If an error has occurred on the network, its error code can be displayed.
Configure this item if you wish to check the network error codes for troubleshooting and other purposes.

d Reference
For details on the network error codes, refer to page 3-17.

Network Error Code Display Setting

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Maintenance" ö "Network Error Code
Display Setting".

Item Description
Error Code Display Select "ON".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-186

2.56 Settings under "Maintenance"
2
2.56.6 Initializing the configuration information
You can initialize the network settings (to the factory defaults), reset the controller, and delete the entire
destination information.

Network Setting Clear

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Maintenance" ö "Reset" ö "Network
Setting Clear".
(If Enhanced Security Mode is enabled, this menu item will not be displayed.)
If you click [Clear], the network settings of this machine are cleared to the factory defaults.

Reset
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Maintenance" ö "Reset" ö "Reset".
If you click [Reset], the controller is reset.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-187

2.56 Settings under "Maintenance"
2
Format All Destination
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Maintenance" ö "Reset" ö "Format All
Destination".
If you click [Format], the entire destination data being registered on this machine is erased.

2.56.7 Enhancing the functions of this machine

To enhance the functions of this machine by registering the optional License kit, you can obtain a request
code and enable the functions.
(This menu item will not be displayed if the extension memory supplied together with the optional upgrade
kit UK-203 is not installed.)

d Reference
For details on the license code acquisition and function enabling, refer to the "Quick Guide
[Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations]".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-188

2.56 Settings under "Maintenance"
2
Get Request Code
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Maintenance" ö "License Setting" ö
"Get Request Code".
If you click [OK], a request code is issued.

Install License
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Maintenance" ö "License Settings" ö
"Install License".

Item Description
Function Code Enter the function code.
License Code Enter the license code.
[OK] Click this button to enable the function.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-189

2.56 Settings under "Maintenance"
2
2.56.8 Registering and editing font/macro
You can register or delete fonts or macros to or from this machine.

Edit Font/Macro
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Maintenance" ö "Edit Font/Macro".

Item Description
[New Registration] Click this button to add a font or macro.
Font Type Select a type of font or macro and click [Go], and the list of fonts or macro of
the selected type is displayed.
Type Displays the type of each registered font/macro.
Location Displays the location to save the registered font or macro.
Name Displays the name of the registered font or macro.
ID Displays the ID of the registered font or macro.
Delete Click this button to delete the selected font/macro.

New registration window

Item Description
Type Select a type of font/macro to be added.
ID Enter the ID of the font/macro.
This ID is required if you have set the "Type" to "PCL Font" or "PCL Macro"
and if you have selected the "Manual Set" check box.
If you enter an ID that has already been used, the existing ID will be overwritten
by it.
Location Select the storage location of the font/macro.

2.56.9 Outputting job logs

You can create and download log data (accounting log, counting log, or audit log) of the jobs that were
executed in this machine. For details on viewing downloaded job logs, contact your service representative.
(This menu is not displayed when "Security Settings" ö "Security Details" ö "Job Log Settings" is set to
"OFF" in the administrator settings on the control panel.)
Reference
- For details on "Job Log Settings", refer to the "User' s Guide [Copy Operations]".
- If the job log writing area has reached the upper limit, output job logs.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-190

2.56 Settings under "Maintenance"
2
Creating job log data
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Maintenance" ö "Job Log" ö "Create
Job Log".
When you click [OK], the machine starts creating job log data. After data creation has been completed, the
completion page appears, and you can download job log data by pressing "Download Job Log".

Reference
- If you attempt to create job log data when some already exists, a confirmation message is displayed to
check if you want to delete the job log data that is not output in order to create new job log data. When
there is job log data exists, obtain it before creating new job log data.

Downloading job log data

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Maintenance" ö "Job Log" ö "Download
Job Log".
To download job log data, create it in "Create Job Log" in advance.
If you click [OK] when job log data resides, the download page appears. When you click [Download] in the
download page, the machine starts downloading job log data.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-191

2.57 Settings under "System Settings"
2
2.57 Settings under "System Settings"
This section explains other configurable items under "System Settings" of PageScope Web Connection.

2.57.1 Registering machine information

Register the administrator information and the address of this machine.
The registration of this machine is required for E-mail or Internet fax transmissions.

Machine Setting
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "System Settings" ö "Machine Setting".

Item Description
Device Location Enter the installation location of this machine (up to 255 characters).
Administrator Registra- Register the administrator name and contact information of this machine.
tion
Administrator Name Enter the administrator name of this machine (up to 20 characters).
E-mail Address Enter the E-mail address of the administrator (up to 128 characters).
This setting is required for sending E-mail messages. The specified address is
displayed in the From column of the E-mail. If necessary, the address can be
changed to one other than the administrator address from the control panel
prior to E-mail transmission.
Extension No. Enter the extension number of the administrator (up to eight characters).
Input Machine Address Register the device name and E-mail address of this machine.
Device Name Enter the device name (up to 80 characters).
This name is used as a part of an Internet fax subject name.
E-mail Address Enter the E-mail address of this machine (up to 320 characters).
This setting is required when sending Internet faxes.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-192

2.57 Settings under "System Settings"
2
2.57.2 Registering support information
Register the support information for this machine.
This information is displayed on the Online Assistance page in the user mode.

Register Support Information

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "System Settings" ö "Register Support
Information".

Item Description
Contact Name Enter the contact name for the machine (up to 63 characters).
Contact Information Enter the contact name information for the machine such as the phone number
and URL (up to 127 characters).
Product Help URL Enter the URL of the Web page for product information (up to 127 characters).
Corporate URL Enter the URL of the Web page for the manufacturer (up to 127 characters).
Supplies and Accesso- Enter consumables supplier information (up to 127 characters).
ries
Online Help URL Enter the online help URL (up to 127 characters).
<C652>
http://www.pagescope.com/download/webconnection/onlinhelp/
c652/v3/help.html
<C652DS>
http://www.pagescope.com/download/webconnection/onlinehelp/
c652DS/v3/help.html
<C552>
http://www.pagescope.com/download/webconnection/onlinehelp/
c552/v3/help.html
<C552DS>
http://www.pagescope.com/download/webconnection/onlinehelp/
c552DS/v3/help.html
<C452>
http://www.pagescope.com/download/webconnection/onlinehelp/
c452/v3/help.html
Driver URL Enter the driver storage location (up to 127 characters).
Engine Serial Number Displays the serial number of this machine.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-193

2.57 Settings under "System Settings"
2
2.57.3 Configuring the environmental settings for using User Boxes
Configure environmental settings for using User Boxes.
You can configure settings for deleting unused User Boxes, deleting documents saved in User Boxes, or
using external memory functions.

Delete Unused User Box

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "System Settings" ö "User Box Setting"
ö "Delete Unused User Box".
Click [OK] to delete boxes containing no document.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-194

2.57 Settings under "System Settings"
2
Delete Secure Print File
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "System Settings" ö "User Box Setting"
ö "Delete Secure Print File".
Click [OK] to delete documents stored in secure print User Boxes.

Delete Time Setting

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "System Settings" ö "User Box Setting"
ö "Delete Time Setting".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-195

2.57 Settings under "System Settings"
2
Item Description
Auto Delete Secure Select this check box to specify the time before the documents stored in the
Document Secure Print User Box are to be deleted automatically.
Specify days To specify the document deletion timing by day count, select "Specify days",
and specify the number of days before the documents are stored in the Secure
Print User Box are to be deleted automatically.
Specify Time To specify the document deletion timing by hour count, select "Specify Time",
and specify the number of hours before the documents stored in the Secure
Print User Box are to be deleted automatically.
ID & Print Delete Time Select this check box to specify the time before the documents stored in the
ID & Print User Box are to be deleted automatically.
If user authentication settings are not configured, this item will not be dis-
played.
Specify days To specify the document deletion timing by day count, select "Specify days",
and specify the number of days before the documents stored in the ID & Print
User Box are to be deleted automatically.
If you have specified not to delete documents stored in the ID & Print User Box
after they are printed, the specified deleting timing will be reset. After the spec-
ified number of days has elapsed from the date of printing, the document will
be deleted automatically.
Specify Time To specify the document deletion timing by hour count, select "Specify Time",
and specify the number of hours before the documents stored in the ID & Print
User Box are to be deleted automatically.
If you have specified not to delete documents stored in the ID & Print User Box
after they are printed, the specified deleting timing will be reset. After the spec-
ified number of hours has elapsed from the time of printing, the document will
be deleted automatically.

Reference
- Specify whether to delete documents stored in the ID & Print User Box after they are printed in "ID &
Print Delete after Print Setting". For details, refer to page 2-201.

Document Delete Time Setting

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "System Settings" ö "User Box Setting"
ö "Document Delete Time Setting".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-196

2.57 Settings under "System Settings"
2
Item Description
Delete Setting Select whether to specify the time to delete documents in User Boxes.
Specify the deletion timing. This setting is applied to all the documents in Pub-
lic User Boxes, Personal User Boxes and Group User Boxes.
Select "ON" to change the document deletion timing of the registered User
Boxes for which deletion timing is specified respectively to that specified in
this setting. In this case, you cannot specify the time for the user to delete a
document. The document deletion timing specified in this setting is also ap-
plied to newly created boxes. The administrator however can change the tim-
ing regardless of this setting.
Do Not Delete Select this box when documents in User Boxes are not to be deleted.
Specify days To specify the document deletion timing by day count, select "Specify days",
and specify the number of days before the documents stored in User Boxes
are to be deleted automatically.
If you have specified not to delete documents stored in User Boxes after they
are sent or printed, the specified deleting timing will be reset. After the speci-
fied number of days has elapsed from the date of transmission or printing, the
document will be deleted automatically.
Specify Time To specify the document deletion timing by hour count, select "Specify Time",
and specify the number of hours before the documents stored in User Boxes
are to be deleted automatically.
If you have specified not to delete documents stored in User Boxes after they
are sent or printed, the specified deleting timing will be reset. After the speci-
fied number of hours has elapsed from the date of transmission or printing, the
document will be deleted automatically.

Reference
- Specify whether to delete documents stored in User Boxes after they are sent or printed in "Document
Hold Setting". For details, refer to page 2-197.

Document Hold Setting

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "System Settings" ö "User Box Setting"
ö "Document Hold Setting".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-197

2.57 Settings under "System Settings"
2
Item Description
Document Hold Setting Select whether to delete a document automatically after transmitting or print-
ing the document.
When "Hold" is selected, the data of a document can be retained even after
transmitting or printing the document.
Deletion Selection Specify whether to display the page for selecting whether to delete a docu-
Page ment from a User Box after sending or printing it.
This item is available when "Hold" is selected in "Document Hold Setting".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-198

2.57 Settings under "System Settings"
2
External Memory Function Settings
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "System Settings" ö "User Box Setting"
ö "External Memory Function Settings".

Item Description
Save Document Select "ON" when sending scanned data to external memory or sending data
stored in a User Box to external memory.
To prevent data from being stolen, "OFF" is selected as the default setting.
Change it to [ON] to enable this function.
Print Document To print data in external memory, select "ON".
You can print prints only the file formats supported by this machine.
USB to User Box Select "ON" when saving data stored in external memory to a User Box.

Reference
- Do not disconnect the external memory device while handling it.
- To enable "Save Document" (sending data to external memory) and "Scan Document" (saving data
stored in external memory to a User Box), you must permit the use of the function for each user. For
details, refer to page 2-144.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-199

2.57 Settings under "System Settings"
2
User Box Operation
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "System Settings" ö "User Box Setting"
ö "User Box Operation".

Item Description
Allow/Restrict User Select whether to grant the User Box operation permissions to users.
Box Selecting "Restrict" disables users to create, edit or delete User Boxes.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-200

2.57 Settings under "System Settings"
2
ID & Print Delete Time
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "System Settings" ö "User Box Setting"
ö "ID & Print Delete Time".

Item Description
Delete after Print Configure the post-print operation of documents in ID & Print User Boxes.
Selecting "Confirm with User" displays a confirmation message, asking
whether to delete the document that has been printed.
Selecting "Always Delete" deletes the document that has been printed without
displaying a confirmation message.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-201

2.57 Settings under "System Settings"
2
2.57.4 Configuring stamp settings
Register the header and footer information and configure settings for adding the stamp when sending faxes.

Header/Footer Registration
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "System Settings" ö "Stamp Settings" ö
"Header/Footer Registration" ö [Edit].

Item Description
No. Displays the registration number.
Name Enter the registered name (up to 16 characters).
Color Select the stamp color.
Pages Specify whether to print the stamp only on the first page or all pages.
Size Specify the character size used for the stamp.
Text Type Specify the character font used for printing.
Date/Time Setting Select the respective display formats for date and time.
You can make a selection when "Date/Time Setting" of either "Header" or
"Footer" is set to "Print".
Distribution Number Enter the text to be added to the distribution numbers and printed (up to 20
characters). Specify the output method and start number of the distribution
numbers.
When "Number Only" is selected for the output method, two-digit distribution
numbers are displayed in two digits.
If "Put zeros in front (total 8-digits)" is selected, the numbers are always dis-
played in eight digits regardless of the specified number of digits.
You can make a selection when "Distribution Number" of either "Header" or
"Footer" is set to "Print".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-202

2.57 Settings under "System Settings"
2
Item Description
Header/Footer Specify whether to print the following items.
• Header or footer text (up to 40 characters)
• Date/Time Setting
• Distribution Number
• Job Number
• Serial Number (Engine serial No. of this machine)
• User Name/Account Name
To print a distribution number, specify the desired number in "Distribution
Number".
If the User Authentication/Account Track settings are not configured, "User
Name/Account Name" is not printed.

Fax TX settings
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "System Settings" ö "Stamp Settings" ö
"FAX TX Settings".

Item Description
Cancel Setting Select whether to use the stamp function for fax transmissions.
Selecting "Cancel" sends faxes without printing the stamp on the originals.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-203

2.57 Settings under "System Settings"
2
2.57.5 Configuring settings for printing blank pages
Configure settings related to printing blank pages.
You can specify whether to print text on blank pages when the stamp function prints text.

Blank Page Print Settings

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "System Settings" ö "Blank Page Print
Settings".

Item Description
Print Setting Specify whether to print text on blank pages when the stamp function prints
text.

2.57.6 Configuring settings for skipping jobs

Configure settings for skipping jobs.
When the job currently being printed is being halted with a warning message stating the paper is empty, the
mailbin has overflowed, or there is no matching paper, you can configure the machine to skip the job and
print the next job waiting to be printed if it is eligible for printing.
Two settings are provided: One allows you to specify whether to skip the job when the next job is a fax; the
other allows you to specify whether to skip the job when the next job is not a fax.

Skip Job Operation Settings

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "System Settings" ö "Skip Job Operation
Settings".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-204

2.57 Settings under "System Settings"
2
Item Description
Fax Specify whether to skip the job when the next job is a fax.
Other than Fax Specify whether to skip the job when the next job is not a fax.

2.57.7 Disabling Flash View

You can disable the flash view in PageScope Web Connection.
Reference
- Disabling the flash view fixes the view mode to the HTML format.
- Disabling the flash view invalidates Data Management Utility.

Flash View Settings

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "System Settings" ö "Flash View
Settings".

Item Description
Select Flash View To disable the flash view, select "Restrict".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-205

2.57 Settings under "System Settings"
2
2.57.8 Using the Fax Server Communicating in E-Mail Format
When using the fax server communicating in E-mail format, you can configure settings to automatically add
a prefix and suffix to a destination number.

System Connection Setting

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "System Settings" ö "System Connection
Setting".

Item Description
Automatic Prefix/Suffix Select whether to automatically add a prefix and suffix to a destination
Setting number.
To automatically add a prefix and suffix, select "Store Address" ö "Prefix/Suf-
fix", and register the target prefix and suffix in No. 1. For details, refer to
page 2-258.

Reference
If "Automatic Prefix/Suffix Setting" is set to "ON", the following restrictions will be applied.
- "Fax Settings" is not available (excluding "Destination Check Display Function", "Confirm Address
(TX)", and "Confirm Address (Register)").
- "Store Address" ö "Application Registration" are not available.
- "Bulletin Board User Box", "Polling TX User Box", "Memory RX User Box", and "Fax Retransmit User
Box" are not available.
- "Bulletin Board User Box" and "Relay User Box" cannot be registered.
- Confidential RX is not available.
- "Off-Hook" is not available.
- When sending, "Line Settings", "Communication Method Setting", "Fax Header Setting" is not available
in "Communication Setting".
- The Network Fax function is not available.
- "Tone", "Pause"", ""-", and "Line Settings" are not available when registering a fax destination in the
address book.
- You can output "Activity Report", "TX Report", and "RX Report" in "Job History".
- A number excluding a prefix and suffix is displayed in "Address" of "Job History".
- "Address Type" is set to E-mail in "Current Jobs" and "Job History".
- "Meter Count" is updated only when "Scan" is enabled in "Fax/Scan"; however, "Number of Faxed
Sheets" is not updated.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-206

2.57 Settings under "System Settings"
2
2.57.9 Canceling the connection with applications
You can cancel the connection from this machine to the server when an error occurs on the server while
PageScope My Panel Manager.

System Connection Setting

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "System Settings" ö "System Connection
Setting".

Item Description
PageScope My Panel Select "OFF" when canceling the connection from this machine to PageScope
Manager My Panel Manager.
My Spool This setting is not used.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-207

2.57 Settings under "System Settings"
2
2.57.10 Specifying the display mode of the administrator mode
You can select the display mode of the PageScope Web Connection administrator mode from "Tab Function
Display" or "List Function Display".

Display Setting
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "System Settings" ö "Display Setting".

Item Description
Administrator Display Select the display mode of the administrator mode.
Mode

Tab Function Display

List Function Display

Reference
- This manual shows an example where the "List Function Display" is set as the display mode.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-208

2.57 Settings under "System Settings"
2
2.57.11 Configuring Outline PDF Settings
Configure settings to outline graphics when creating an outline PDF.

d Reference
For details on outline PDF, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".

Outline PDF Setting

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "System Settings" ö "Outline PDF
Setting".

Item Description
Outline Graphics Specify the level to scan a graphic (line image) when creating an outline PDF.
The graphic (line image) outlining level becomes higher in the order of "LOW",
"MIDDLE", and "HIGH". If "OFF" is specified, the target graphic (line image)
will not be outlined.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-209

2.58 Settings under "Security"
2
2.58 Settings under "Security"
This section describes other configurable items under "Security" of PageScope Web Connection.

2.58.1 Managing external certificates

You can manage external certificates from this machine.
Root certificates or interim certificate issued by a trusted Certification Authority (CA), certificates issued by a
trusted End Entity (EE), or distrusted certificates can be registered with this machine for management. The
registered external certificates are referenced during chain validation of a certificate, when making sure that
its certificate path has no problems.

External Certificate Setting

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Security" ö "PKI Setting" ö "External
Certificate Setting".

Item Description
Certificate type Select the type of an external certificate you want to display, and click [Change
the display]. Then external certificates of the selected type are displayed in the
list.
[New Registration] Click this button to register a new external certificate.
Click [Browse] in the new registration window to specify a new external certif-
icate to be registered.
Issuer Displays the issuer of an external certificate.
Subject Displays the destination of an external certificate.
Validity Period Displays the validity period of an external certificate.
Detail Check detailed information about an external certificate.
Delete Displays a message asking you to confirm deletion, enables you to delete an
external certificate.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-210

2.58 Settings under "Security"
2
New registration window

Item Description
File Click [Browse] to specify a new external certificate to be registered.
• If "Trusted CA Root Certificate" is selected, register the route certificate of
the trusted CA (certificate authority).
• If "Trusted CA Intermediate Certificate" is selected, register the interim cer-
tificate of the trusted CA (certificate authority).
• If "Trusted EE (End Entity) Certificate" is selected, individually register the
trusted certificates.
• If "Non-Trusted Certificate" is selected, individually register the untrusted
certificates.

Reference

Item Description
Trusted CA Root Certif- You must import the certificate of the CA that issued the certificate in question
icate in this machine in advance, if you wish to validate the chain of a submitted cer-
tificate.
Trusted CA Intermedi- You must import the certificate of the intermediate certificate authority in this
ate Certificate machine in advance, if the submitted certificate is issued by an intermediate
certificate authority. You must also import the root certificate of the CA, which
certifies the intermediate certificate authority, in this machine in advance.
Trusted EE (End Entity) Trusted EE refers to the certificate to be submitted. By importing a certificate
Certificate in this machine in advance, the certificate will be identified as a trusted certif-
icate when it is submitted.
If a certificate is registered as the trusted EE certificate in advance, this ma-
chine will skip validation of the certificate chain when it is submitted and will
recognize it as a trusted certificate.
Non-Trusted Certificate Register non-trusted certificates in this machine.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-211

2.58 Settings under "Security"
2
2.58.2 Limiting accessible destinations for each user
Register and edit reference allowed groups.
When you register a user with this machine, add the user to a reference allowed group. In addition, when you
add a destination to the address book, grant reference access permission only to the reference allowed group
you add the user to. This limits access to the destination to the users in this reference allowed group.
You can also specify the access allowed level of each reference allowed group. Even a user who does not
belong to a group permitted to reference a destination can still reference the destination if the access allowed
level of the user is higher than or equal to that of the group permitted to reference the destination.

d Reference
For details on the registration of users, refer to page 2-133.
For details on the registration of destinations with the address book, refer to page 2-232.

Registering reference allowed groups

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Security" ö "Address Reference Setting"
ö [Edit].

Item Description
No. Displays the registration number.
Reference Allowed Enter the name of the reference allowed group (up to 24 characters).
Group Name
Access Allowed Level Specify the access allowed level of the reference allowed group.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-212

2.58 Settings under "Security"
2
2.58.3 Restricting Registration and Change by a User
You can restrict the registering of addresses or biometric/IC card information and the changing of the From
address by general users.

Restrict User Access

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Security" ö "Restrict User Access".

Item Description
Registering and Select "Restrict" to restrict registering and changing addresses by general us-
Changing Addresses ers.
Register biometric/IC Select "Restrict" to restrict registering biometric/IC card information by users.
card information
Change the "From" Ad- To restrict changing the From address by users when sending an E-mail from
dress this machine, select "Admin. E-mail Address" or "User Address Priority".
If "Admin. E-mail Address" is selected, the administrator's E-mail address is
set as the From address of the E-mail to be sent from this machine.
If "User Address Priority" is selected, the user's E-mail address is set as the
From address when it is registered. However, when the user's E-mail address
is not registered or S/MIME is used to send an E-mail, the administrator's E-
mail address is set as the From address.
If "Allow" is selected, the user can change the From address before sending
an E-mail.

Reference
- If "Enhanced Security Mode" is enabled, "Registering and Changing Addresses" is set to "Restrict".
- "Register biometric/IC card information" is available when the optional authentication unit is installed in
this machine.
- If user authentication is enabled, the default of "Change the "From" Address" is set to "User Address
Priority".

2.58.4 Configuring Copy Security Settings

Configure settings to use the copy guard and password copy functions.
Using the copy guard function enables you to print a copy guard (text with copy inhibit information
embedded) on a document. If an attempt is made to copy a document with a copy guard printed, a warning
message is displayed to disable copying.
Using the password copy function enables you to embed a password in a document. If an attempt is made
to copy a document with a password embedded, the system will prompt you to enter the password. Copying
cannot be performed unless the correct password is entered.
Reference
- To use the copy guard and password copy functions, install the optional security kit SC-507 in this
machine. For DS models, two units of the optional security kit SC-507 must be installed in the machine.
- For details on the copy guard and password copy functions, refer to the "User's Guide [Copy
Operations]".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-213

2.58 Settings under "Security"
2
Copy Security
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Security" ö "Copy Security".
(If the optional security kit SC-507 is not installed, this menu item will not be displayed.)

Item Description
Copy Guard Select "ON" to use the copy guard function.
Password Copy Select "ON" to use the password copy function.

2.58.5 Specifying the automatic logout time of PageScope Web Connection

Configure time before auto logout from the administrator or user mode of PageScope Web Connection.
If no operation is performed for a predefined length of time, the user will automatically be logged out.

Auto Logout
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Security" ö "Auto Logout".

Item Description
Admin. Mode Logout Select the time period before the user will automatically be logged out when
Time no operations have been performed in the administrator mode.
User Mode Logout Select the time period before the user will automatically be logged out when
Time no operations have been performed in the user mode.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-214

2.58 Settings under "Security"
2
2.58.6 Configuring the administrator password
Configure the administrator password of this machine.

Administrator Password Setting

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Security" ö "Administrator Password
Setting".
Reference
- If Enhanced Security Mode is enabled, this menu item will not be displayed.
- If a device certificate has not been registered, this menu item will not be displayed .
- This menu does not appear if "Mode using SSL/TLS" is set to "None" in "Security" ö "PKI Settings"
ö "SSL Settings" when a device certificate is already registered.

Item Description
Password is changed. Select this check box to change the password.
New Administrator Enter a new administrator password (up to 8 characters, excluding space and
Password ").
Retype New Adminis- Enter the new administrator password again for confirmation.
trator Password

Reference
- If "Password Rules" is enabled, you cannot enter the password with less than eight characters. If a user
password containing less than eight characters has already been registered, change the password so
that it contains eight characters before enabling "Password Rules".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-215

2.59 Settings under "User Authentication/Account Track"
2
2.59 Settings under "User Authentication/Account Track"
This section describes other configurable items under "User Authentication/Account Track" of PageScope
Web Connection.

2.59.1 Configuring the function permission of the public user

Configure the function permission and reference permission of the public users.

Public User
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "User Auth/Account Track" ö "User
Authentication Setting" ö "Public User".
(This menu item will not be displayed if the public user access is not permitted.)

Item Description
Function Permission Specify function permissions.
Specify whether to permit "Copy", "Scan", "Save to External Memory", "Scan
a document in external memory", "Fax", "Print", "User Box", "Print Scan/Fax
TX", "Manual Destination Input", "Cellular Phone/PDA", and "Color printing
when color printing is restricted".
If all operations are disabled, no user will not be able to log in to this machine
as the public user.
Output Permission Configure settings to restrict the print functions.
(Print) You can specify whether to permit color and black printing respectively.
Output Permission (TX) Configure settings to restrict the transmission functions.
You can also specify whether to permit the transmission of color images.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-216

2.59 Settings under "User Authentication/Account Track"
2
Item Description
Limiting Access to Des- Restrict address book entries that the public user can reference.
tinations To add the public user to a reference allowed group, select the check box and
click [Search from List]. From the displayed list, select the reference allowed
group to which the public user is added. You can select one or more reference
allowed groups.
To specify the access allowed level, select the check box and specify the ac-
cess allowed level.

Reference
- By default, the sheets printed in the single color/2 color mode are counted as being printed in color. To
restrict use of the color printing or color image transmission functions, you can change this behavior to
treat printing in the single color/2 color mode as monochrome printing if necessary. For details, refer to
page 2-218.
- Whether to allow the "Save to External Memory" function can be specified when "Save Document" is
set to "ON" in "System Settings" ö "User Box Settings" ö "External Memory Function Settings".
Whether to allow the "External Memory Document Scan" function can be specified when "USB to User
Box" is set to "ON" in "External Memory Function Settings". For details, refer to page 2-199.
- When "Security Settings" ö "Security Details" ö "Manual Destination Input" is set to "Restrict" in
"Administrator Settings" on the Control Panel, the user cannot manually enter the address regardless
of the setting of this function.
- To connect this machine to a cellular phone or PDA, install the optional Local Interface Kit EK-605 in
this machine. Whether to allow the "Mobile/PDA" function can be specified when "Bluetooth" is set to
"Enable" in "Network" ö "Bluetooth Setting" and "Bluetooth Print Settings" is set to "ON" in "System
Settings" ö "System Connection Setting".

2.59.2 Specifying the maximum number of Public User Boxes

Specify the maximum number of Public User Boxes.

Public User Box Setting

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "User Auth/Account Track" ö "Public User
Box Setting".

Item Description
Set the maximum Select this check box to specify the maximum number of Public User Boxes.
number of User Boxes
Maximum Number of Enter the maximum number of Public User Boxes (in units of pieces).
User Boxes

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-217

2.59 Settings under "User Authentication/Account Track"
2
2.59.3 Managing single color /2 Color output
When you restrict color printing or restrict the number of sheets printed in color/black, you can specify
whether to count the sheets printed in the single color/2 color mode as being printed in color or in black.
By default, the sheets printed in the single color/2 color mode are counted as being printed in color. When
you treat single and 2 color printing as black printing, you can permit users to print in the single or 2 color
mode while you do not permit the users to print in color.
When you treat single color or 2 color printing as black printing, you can manage only full color printing as
color printing.

User/Account Common Setting

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "User Auth/Account Track" ö
"User/Account Common Setting".

Item Description
Single Color > 2 Color Select whether to treat single color or 2 color printing as "Color" or "Black"
Output Management printing.

2.59.4 Restricting specification of sending destinations

You can restrict specification of sending destinations by users.
Enabling this item disables manual entry of destinations except for recipients of faxes or IP address faxes.
Therefore users can specify sending destinations only by accessing the address book. Enabling this item also
applies the following restrictions.
- Users cannot save documents to User Boxes
- Users cannot transmit documents from User Boxes
- Users cannot use annotation User Boxes
- Users cannot use the image panel
- Users cannot select addresses from the transmission history
- Users cannot use the URL notification function
To restrict users' specification of destinations, it is effective to combine following settings depending on your
operating environments.
- Restrict address registration by users (p. 2-213).
- If you do not want users to use the LDAP server, do not register the LDAP server. (p. 2-60)
- When you permit the public user access, restrict scanning by the public user.(p. 2-216)
- If you are concerned about retrieval of images from User Boxes, do not grant the User Box operation
to users. (p. 2-200)
- If you are concerned about retrieval of images via TCP Socket, disable TCP Socket. (p. 2-171)

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-218

2.59 Settings under "User Authentication/Account Track"
2
d Reference
By configuring "Scan to Authorized Folder Settings" in an environment where user authentication is enabled,
you can restrict the access to SMB destinations registered in the address book. For details, refer to
page 2-40.

Scan to Authorized Folder Settings

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "User Auth/Account Track" ö "Scan to
Authorized Folder Settings".

Item Description
Scan to Authorized To restrict users' specification of sending destinations, select "ON".
Folder Settings

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-219

2.60 Settings under "Box"
2
2.60 Settings under "Box"
This section describes configurable items "Box" of PageScope Web Connection.

d Reference
For details of User Box functions, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]".

2.60.1 Changing User Box settings

You can change settings of created User Boxes or delete them.
In the administrator mode, you can change the settings of a User Box or delete a User Box without entering
the User Box password.

d Reference
Use the user mode to handle documents in User Boxes. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Box
Operations]".

Open User Box

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Box" ö "Open User Box".

Item Description
[User Box Setting] Change the User Box settings.
When PageScope Authentication Manager is used for authentication and you
are logged in to the administrator mode, this item will not appear if you have
selected a Personal User Box.
[Delete User Box] Delete User Boxes.
When PageScope Authentication Manager is used for authentication and you
are logged in to the administrator mode, this item will not appear if you have
selected a Personal User Box.

Changing User Box settings

Item Description
User Box Number Displays the User Box number.
User Box Name Enter the User Box name (up to 20 characters).
Index Select the indexing characters.
Auto Delete Document Specify the time before documents in users boxes are deleted.
Select "Do Not Delete" if you do not delete documents in User Boxes.
To specify the document deletion timing by day count, select "Specify days",
and specify the number of days before documents are to be deleted automat-
ically.
To specify the document deletion timing by hours and minutes, select "Specify
Time", and specify the time before documents are to be deleted automatically.
This item is available when "Delete Setting" is set to "ON" in "System Settings"
ö "User Box Settings" ö "Document Delete Time Setting".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-220

2.60 Settings under "Box"
2
Item Description
User Box Expansion Select whether to add the confidential reception function to the User Box. If
Function is change you add the function, enter the password (up to eight characters).
This item appears when the optional fax kit FK-502 is installed.
User Box Password is To change the User Box password, select this check box and then enter the
changed. new password (up to eight characters, excluding space and double quotation
(")).
User Box Owner is To change the User Box owner, select this check box and then select the User
changed Box Type.
When PageScope Authentication Manager is used for authentication and you
are logged in to the administrator mode, this item will not appear if you have
selected the Public User Box.

2.60.2 Creating new User Boxes

Create new User Boxes.

Create User Box

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Box" ö "Create User Box".

Item Description
User Box Number Specify the User Box number to be created.
If you have selected "Input directly", enter the box number.
User Box Name Enter the User Box name (up to 20 characters).
Use Box Password To use the User Box password, select this check box and then enter the pass-
word (up to eight characters, excluding space and double quotation (")).
Index Select the indexing characters.
Type Select the User Box type.
If "Personal" is selected, specify the owner user name.
If "Group" is selected, specify the owner account track name.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-221

2.60 Settings under "Box"
2
Item Description
Auto Delete Document Specify the time before documents in users boxes are deleted.
Select "Do Not Delete" if you do not delete documents in User Boxes.
To specify the document deletion timing by day count, select "Specify days",
and specify the number of days before documents are to be deleted automat-
ically.
To specify the document deletion timing by hours and minutes, select "Specify
Time", and specify the time before documents are to be deleted automatically.
User Box Expansion Click [Display] to display details of the User Box expansion function.
Function Select whether to add the confidential reception function to the User Box. If
you add the function, enter the password (up to eight characters).
This item appears when the optional fax kit FK-502 is installed.

Reference
- If "Password Rules" is enabled, you cannot enter the password with less than characters. If a user
password containing less than eight characters has already been registered, change the password so
that it contains eight characters before enabling "Password Rules".

2.60.3 Changing System User Box settings

You can change settings of created System User Boxes (Bulletin Board User Boxes, Relay User Boxes or
Annotation User Boxes) or delete them.
(If the optional fax kit FK-502 is installed, Bulletin Board User Boxes and Relay User Boxes can be selected.)

Open System User Box

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "User Box" ö "Open System User Box".
(The following shows a page that is displayed when "Bulletin Board User Box" is selected)

Item Description
[User Box Setting] Change the User Box settings.
When PageScope Authentication Manager is used for authentication and you
are logged in to the administrator mode, this item will not appear if you have
selected a Personal User Box.
[Delete User Box] Delete User Boxes.
When PageScope Authentication Manager is used for authentication and you
are logged in to the administrator mode, this item will not appear if you have
selected a Personal User Box.

Changing settings of "Bulletin Board User Box"

Item Description
User Box Number Displays the User Box number.
User Box Name Enter the User Box name (up to 20 characters).

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-222

2.60 Settings under "Box"
2
Item Description
Auto Delete Document Specify the time before documents in users boxes are deleted.
Select "Do Not Delete" if you do not delete documents in User Boxes.
To specify the document deletion timing by day count, select "Specify days",
and specify the number of days before documents are to be deleted automat-
ically.
To specify the document deletion timing by hours and minutes, select "Specify
Time", and specify the time before documents are to be deleted automatically.
This item is available when "Delete Setting" is set to "ON" in "System Settings"
ö "User Box Settings" ö "Document Delete Time Setting".
User Box Password is To change the User Box password, select this check box and then enter the
changed. new password (up to eight characters, excluding space and double quotation
(")).
User Box Owner is To change the User Box owner, select this check box and then select the User
changed Box Type.
When PageScope Authentication Manager is used for authentication and you
are logged in to the administrator mode, this item will not appear if you have
selected the Public User Box.

Change settings of the "relay user Boxes"

Item Description
User Box Number Displays the User Box number.
User Box Name Enter the User Box name (up to 20 characters).
Relay Address Specify the relay address.
Relay TX Password is To change the relay transmission password, select this check box and then
change enter the new password (up to eight characters).

Changing the settings of "Annotation User Boxes"

Item Description
User Box Number Displays the User Box number.
User Box Name Enter the User Box name (up to 20 characters).
Auto Delete Document Specify the time before documents in users boxes are deleted.
Select "Do Not Delete" if you do not delete documents in User Boxes.
To print the numbers specified in the Annotation User Box without saving a
document in the User Box, select "Do Not Keep".
To specify the document deletion timing by day count, select "Specify days",
and specify the number of days before documents are to be deleted automat-
ically.
To specify the document deletion timing by hours and minutes, select "Specify
Time", and specify the time before documents are to be deleted automatically.
User Box Password is To change the User Box password, select this check box and then enter the
changed. new password (up to eight characters, excluding space and double quotation
(")).
Change Count Up To change the count up, select the check box, and then select the count up.
If the User Box contains documents, this item cannot be configured.
Change Stamp Ele- To change the stamp elements, select this check box, and then specify text,
ments secondary field, date and time, print position, density and number type.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-223

2.60 Settings under "Box"
2
2.60.4 Creating a new System User Box
Create new System User Boxes.
(If the optional fax kit FK-502 is installed, Bulletin Board User Boxes and Relay User Boxes can be selected.)

Create System User Box

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "User Box" ö "Create System User Box".
(The following shows a page that is displayed when "Bulletin Board User Box" is selected)

Creating a "Bulletin Board User Box"

Item Description
User Box Number Specify the User Box number to be created.
If you have selected "Input directly", enter the box number.
User Box Name Enter the User Box name (up to 20 characters).
Use Box Password To use the User Box password, select this check box and then enter the pass-
word (up to 8 characters, excluding space and double quotation (")).
Type Select the User Box type.
If "Personal" is selected, specify the owner user name.
If "Group" is selected, specify the owner account track name.
Auto Delete Document Specify the time before documents in users boxes are deleted.
Select "Do Not Delete" if you do not delete documents in User Boxes.
To specify the document deletion timing by day count, select "Specify days",
and specify the number of days before documents are to be deleted automat-
ically.
To specify the document deletion timing by hours and minutes, select "Specify
Time", and specify the time before documents are to be deleted automatically.

Creating a "Relay User Box"

Item Description
User Box Number Specify the User Box number to be created.
If you have selected "Input directly", enter the box number.
User Box Name Enter the User Box name (up to 20 characters).
Relay Address Specify the relay address.
Relay TX Password Enter the relay TX password (up to eight characters).

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-224

2.60 Settings under "Box"
2
Item Description
Retype Relay TX Pass- Reenter the relay TX password for confirmation (up to eight characters).
word

Creating an "Annotation User Box"

Item Description
User Box Number Specify the User Box number to be created.
If you have selected "Input directly", enter the box number.
User Box Name Enter the User Box name (up to 20 characters).
Use Box Password To use the User Box password, select this check box and then enter the pass-
word (up to 8 characters, excluding space and double quotation (")).
Auto Delete Document Specify the time before documents in users boxes are deleted.
Select "Do Not Delete" if you do not delete documents in User Boxes.
To print the numbers specified in the Annotation User Box without saving a
document in the User Box, select "Do Not Keep".
To specify the document deletion timing by day count, select "Specify days",
and specify the number of days before documents are to be deleted automat-
ically.
To specify the document deletion timing by hours and minutes, select "Specify
Time", and specify the time before documents are to be deleted automatically.
Count Up Select the count up.
Stamp Elements Specify text, secondary field, date and time setting, print position, density, and
number type.

Reference
- If "Password Rules" is enabled, you cannot enter the password with less than characters. If a user
password containing less than eight characters has already been registered, change the password so
that it contains eight characters before enabling "Password Rules".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-225

2.61 Settings under "Print Setting"
2
2.61 Settings under "Print Setting"
This section describes configurable items under "Print Setting" of PageScope Web Connection.

d Reference
For details of printer functions, refer to the "User's Guide [Print Operations]".

2.61.1 Configuring initial settings for the printer function

Configure the initial settings for the printer function.

Basic Setting
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Print Setting" ö "Basic Setting".

Item Description
PDL Setting Select the printer definition language.
Paper Tray Select the primary paper tray.
Output Tray Select the primary output tray.
2-Sided Print Select whether to print in the 2-sided print format.
Bind Direction Select the binding position for 2-sided printing.
Staple Select whether to staple printed sheets. To staple printed sheet, select the
number of staples.
The staple function is available only when the optional finisher is installed.
Punch Select whether to punch printed sheets. To punch printed sheets, select the
number of punched holes.
The punch function is available only when the optional finisher and punch kit
are installed.
Number of Sets Enter the number of copies to be printed.
Default Paper Size Select the paper size.
Original Direction Select the orientation of an image to be printed.
Spool Print Jobs in Select whether to spool print jobs to HDD.
HDD before RIP

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-226

2.61 Settings under "Print Setting"
2
Item Description
Banner Sheet Setting Select whether to print banner sheets for each print job.
Printing banner sheets prevents mixing different printing materials.
Banner Sheet Paper Select the primary paper tray for printing banner sheets.
Setting
No Matching Paper in Select the operation to be taken when there is no appropriate sized paper in
Tray Setting the specified paper tray.
Select "Switch Trays (Tray Priority)" to supply paper from a different paper
tray.
Select "Stop Printing (Tray Fixed)" to stop printing and display a warning mes-
sage.
A4/A3<->LTR/LGR Converts between inch and metric units.
Auto Switch Select whether to print an A4 (Letter)/A3 (Ledger)-sized original by full size
when a paper tray containing Letter (A4)/Ledger (A3)-sized paper is selected.
Selecting "ON" forces full size printing, which may cause images be defective.
Binding Direction Ad- Select the binding position adjustment method used for 2-sided printing.
justment
Line Width Adjustment To adjust the line width so as to make thin lines and small letters easier to see,
select the line breadth.
Gray Background Text To adjust the line width in gray scale background so as to make thin lines and
Correction small letters easier to see, select "ON".
Selecting "OFF" applies the "Line Width Adjustment" setting in gray scale
background.

2.61.2 Configuring the initial settings for the PCL print function
Configure the initial settings for the PCL print function.

PCL Setting
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Print Setting" ö "PCL Setting".

Item Description
Symbol Set Select the symbol set.
Typeface Specify whether to select a font from internal fonts (resident fonts) or from
downloaded fonts (download fonts) when the font being used is not specified.
Font Size Specify either the font pitch or the font point size, depending on the selected
typeface.
Line/Page Enter the number of lines per page.
CR/LF Mapping Select the CR/LF substitution method when printing text data.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-227

2.61 Settings under "Print Setting"
2
2.61.3 Configuring the initial settings for the PS print function
Configure the initial settings for the PS print function.

PS Setting
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Print Setting" ö "PS Setting".

Item Description
PS Error Print Select whether to print error information when an error occurs during PS ras-
terization.
ICC Profile Settings Configure the default settings of RGB color and output profile for photographs,
text, and figures, tables, and graphs respectively, as well as the default setting
for the simulation profile.
Photo Select the default setting for RGB color and output profile for photographs.
Text Specify the default setting of RGB color and output profile for text.
Figure/Table/Graph Select the default setting for RGB color and output profile for figures, tables,
and graphs.
Simulation Profile Select the default setting for simulation profile.
Auto Trapping Select whether to print so as to prevent white space being generated around
a picture.
If white lines appear at borders of colors on a graph or figure, select "ON".
Black Overprint Select whether to print so as to prevent white space being generated around
a black character or figure.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-228

2.61 Settings under "Print Setting"
2
2.61.4 Configuring the initial settings for the TIFF print function
Select this option to configure how to determine the paper size when directly printing TIFF or JPEG image
data.
The direct print function provides three modes: printing data using the direct print function, printing data in
external memory, and printing data in a cellular phone or PDA.

TIFF Setting
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Print Setting" ö "TIFF Setting".

Item Description
Auto Paper Select Configure how to determine the paper size when directly printing image data.
"Auto":
For TIFF/JPEG (JFIF), select this option to calculate the size of the image
based on its resolution and the number of pixels to print the image on paper
that fits the image size. Select this option to print images on paper of the same
size as the image.
For JPEG (EXIF), an image is printed based on the paper size that is specified
in "User Settings" of "Control Panel" ö "Printer Settings" ö "Paper Setting"
ö "Paper Size". An image is enlarged or reduced to fit the paper size.
"Priority Paper Size":
When printing from a cellular phone or PDA, an image is printed based on the
paper size that is specified in "User Settings" of "Control Panel" ö "Cellular
Phone/PDA Setting" ö "Print" ö "Paper" .
When using the direct print function of "PageScope Web Connection" or
printing from the external memory, an image is printed based on the paper size
that is specified in "User Settings" of "Control Panel" ö "Printer Settings" ö
"Paper Setting" ö "Paper Size".
An image is enlarged or reduced to fit the paper size.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-229

2.61 Settings under "Print Setting"
2
2.61.5 Configuring the initial settings for the XPS print function
Configure the initial settings for the XPS print function.

XPS Settings
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Print Setting" ö "XPS Setting".

Item Description
Verify XPS Digital Sig- Select whether to verify a digital signature when printing XPS data.
nature Selecting "ON" prevents printing data whose signature is invalid.
Print XPS Errors Select whether to print an error information when the digital signature of XPS
data is invalid.

2.61.6 Specifying the timeout of the interface

Specify the timeout for interface.

Interface Setting
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Print Setting" ö "Interface Setting".

Item Description
Network Timeout Enter the timeout of network communication.
USB Timeout Enter the timeout of USB communication.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-230

2.61 Settings under "Print Setting"
2
2.61.7 Disabling the direct print function
You can disable the direct print function of PageScope Web Connection which is enabled by default.

Direct Print Settings

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Print Setting" ö "Direct Print Settings".

Item Description
PSWC Direct Print To disable using the direct print function, select "OFF".

2.61.8 Restricting users from obtaining device information using password

You can specify a password to obtain device information from the printer driver and restrict users from
obtaining device information.

d Reference
For details on obtaining device information from the printer driver, refer to the User's Guide Print Operations.

Assign Account to Acquire Device Info

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Printer Setting" ö "Assign Account to
Acquire Device Info".

Item Description
Assign Account to Ac- Select "ON" when using a password to restrict users from obtaining device in-
quire Device Info formation from the printer driver.
Password is changed. Select this check box to change the password.
Password Enter a password (up to 8 characters, excluding space and ").

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-231

2.62 Settings under "Store Address"
2
2.62 Settings under "Store Address"
Register or change the destination addresses for the transmission functions and storage locations for the
User Box functions.

d Reference
When you permit users to register addresses, the users can register or change addresses in the user mode
as well. For details on settings that determine whether to permit address registration, refer to page 2-213.

2.62.1 Registering Address Book

Add new addresses to the address book, change settings of addresses, and register the icon for each
address.
When you have added addresses to the address book in advance, you can select the addresses from the
address book when sending data. You can also register an icon for a registered address.

Address Registration
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Store Address" ö "Address Book" ö
"Store Address".

Item Description
[New Registration] Add new destinations to the address book.
Search by number Select a range of registration numbers, and then click [Go] to display the list of
destinations in the selected range.
Search from Index Select an index, and then click [Go] to display the list of addresses with the
selected index.
No. Displays the registration number.
Function Displays the registered functions.
Name Displays the registered name.
S/MIME Displays whether a certificate is registered with the E-mail address.
Edit Click this button to edit the registered address. The available items are the
same as those for registration.
Delete Delete an address from the address book.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-232

2.62 Settings under "Store Address"
2
Registering a new "E-mail" destination

Item Description
No Specify the registration number of the destination.
If you select "Input directly", enter the registration number.
Name Enter the destination name (up to 24 characters).
Index Select the index character used when searching for the destination.
It is convenient to select the "Main" check box for a frequently used destina-
tion.
E-mail Enter the E-mail address of the destination (up to 320 characters).
Registration of Certifi- Select this check box to register certificate information.
cation Information Click [Browse] to specify the certificate to be registered. Only the DER (Distin-
guished Encoding Rules) formatted file is supported for registration of certifi-
cate information.
To delete the registered certificate information, select "Deletion of Certification
Information".
You cannot register a certificate if the E-mail address of the destination does
not match that of the certificate. Before registering a certificate, check that
those E-mail addresses are the same.
Limiting Access to Des- Click [Display] to display the current settings for limiting access to destina-
tinations tions.
Specify the access allowed level or reference allowed group required to ac-
cess this destination.

Registering a new "FTP destination"

Item Description
No Specify the registration number of the destination.
If you select "Input directly", enter the registration number.
Name Enter the destination name (up to 24 characters).
Index Select the index character used when searching for the destination.
It is convenient to select the "Main" check box for a frequently used destina-
tion.
Host Address Enter the IP address of the destination FTP server.
Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255)
If the DNS server has already been configured, you can enter the host name
instead.
If "IPv6" is set to "ON", you can also specify the IPv6 address.
File Path Specify the destination directory (up to 127 bytes).
User ID Enter the user ID to log in to the destination FTP server (up to 63 bytes).
Password is changed Select this check box to change the password.
This item is displayed when editing the registered information.
Password Enter the password to log in to the destination FTP server (up to 63 bytes, ex-
cluding space and ").
anonymous Select whether to allow anonymous users to access the FTP server.
PASV Mode Select whether to communicate in PASV mode.
Proxy Select whether to use a proxy server.
Port No. Enter the port number.
Limiting Access to Des- Click [Display] to display the current settings for limiting access to destina-
tinations tions.
Specify the access allowed level or reference allowed group required to ac-
cess this destination.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-233

2.62 Settings under "Store Address"
2
Registering a new "SMB destination"

Item Description
No Specify the registration number of the destination.
If you select "Input directly", enter the registration number.
Name Enter the destination name (up to 24 characters).
Index Select the index character used when searching for the destination.
It is convenient to select the "Main" check box for a frequently used destina-
tion.
Host Address Enter the IP address of the destination computer.
In the IPv4 environment, enter the IPv4 address, NetBIOS name, or host name.
Enter the NetBIOS name in uppercase. If the DNS server has already been
configured, you can enter the host name instead. For the host name, specify
a fully-qualified domain name (FQDN).
In the IPv6 environment, enter the IPv6 address or host name. If the DNS serv-
er has already been configured, you can enter the host name instead. Howev-
er, you can also specify the host name in an environment without the DNS
server when resolving the names using the LLMNR function while the destina-
tion computer is Windows Vista/Server 2008.
File Path Specify the destination directory (up to 255 bytes).
User ID Enter the user ID to log in to the destination computer (up to 127 bytes).
Password is changed Select this check box to change the password.
This item is displayed when editing the registered information.
Password Enter the password to log in to the destination computer (up to 127 characters,
excluding space and ").
Limiting Access to Des- Click [Display] to display the current settings for limiting access to destina-
tinations tions.
Specify the access allowed level or reference allowed group required to ac-
cess this destination.

Registering a new "WebDAV destination"

Item Description
No Specify the registration number of the destination.
If you select "Input directly", enter the registration number.
Name Enter the destination name (up to 24 characters).
Index Select the index character used when searching for the destination.
It is convenient to select the "Main" check box for a frequently used destina-
tion.
Host Address Enter the IP address of the destination WebDAV server.
Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255)
If the DNS server has already been configured, you can enter the host name
instead.
If "IPv6" is set to "ON", you can also specify the IPv6 address.
File Path Specify the destination directory (up to 142 bytes).
User ID Enter the user ID to log in to the destination WebDAV server (up to 63 bytes).
Password is changed Select this check box to change the password.
This item is displayed when editing the registered information.
Password Enter the password to log in to the destination WebDAV server (up to 63 bytes,
excluding space and ").
SSL Settings Select whether to use SSL for encryption.
Proxy Select whether to use a proxy server.
Port No. Enter the port number.
Limiting Access to Des- Click [Display] to display the current settings for limiting access to destina-
tinations tions.
Specify the access allowed level or reference allowed group required to ac-
cess this destination.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-234

2.62 Settings under "Store Address"
2
Registering a new "User Box destination"

Item Description
No Specify the registration number of the destination.
If you select "Input directly", enter the registration number.
Name Enter the destination name (up to 24 characters).
Index Select the index character used when searching for the destination.
It is convenient to select the "Main" check box for a frequently used destina-
tion.
User Box Number Select the box number of the destination User Box from User Boxes registered
with this machine.
Limiting Access to Des- Click [Display] to display the current settings for limiting access to destina-
tinations tions.
Specify the access allowed level or reference allowed group required to ac-
cess this destination.

Registering a new "fax destination"

(This registration is available if the optional fax kit FK-502 is installed.)

Item Description
No Specify the registration number of the destination.
If you select "Input directly", enter the registration number.
Name Enter the destination name (up to 24 characters).
Index Select the index character used when searching for the destination.
It is convenient to select the "Main" check box for a frequently used destina-
tion.
Fax Number Enter the fax number of the destination (up to 38 characters).
Confirm Fax Number Enter the fax number again to prevent an incorrect fax number from being reg-
istered.
This item is displayed when "Confirm Address (Register)" is "ON".
Line Setting Select a line to be used.
This item is available when two optional fax kits are installed.
Communication Set- Click [Display] to display the current communication settings.
ting Select whether to enable each of "V34 OFF", "ECM OFF", "International Com-
munication" or "Check Destination".
Limiting Access to Des- Click [Display] to display the current settings for limiting access to destina-
tinations tions.
Specify the access allowed level or reference allowed group required to ac-
cess this destination.

Registering a new "IP address fax destination"

(Registration is possible when the IP address fax function is available.)

Item Description
No Specify the registration number of the destination.
If you select "Input directly", enter the registration number.
Name Enter the destination name (up to 24 characters).
Index Select the index character used when searching for the destination.
It is convenient to select the "Main" check box for a frequently used destina-
tion.
Address Format Select the address format of the destination.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-235

2.62 Settings under "Store Address"
2
Item Description
Address Enter the IP address of the destination IP address fax machine.
If "IP Address" is selected in "Address Format", enter the IP address of the
destination. When using IPv6, you can specify the IPv6 address.
If "Host name" is selected in "Address Format", enter the host name of the
destination. If the DNS server has already been configured, you can enter the
host name instead.
If "E-mail Address" is selected in "Address Format", enter the E-mail address
of the destination. If the DNS server has already been configured, you can en-
ter the E-mail address instead.
Port No. Enter the port number.
Destination Machine Select whether the destination machine is a color or monochrome machine.
Type
Limiting Access to Des- Click [Display] to display the current settings for limiting access to destina-
tinations tions.
Specify the access allowed level or reference allowed group required to ac-
cess this destination.

Registering a new "Internet fax destination"

(Registration is possible when the Internet fax function is available.)

Item Description
No Specify the registration number of the destination.
If you select "Input directly", enter the registration number.
Name Enter the destination name (up to 24 characters).
Index Select the index character used when searching for the destination.
It is convenient to select the "Main" check box for a frequently used destina-
tion.
E-mail Enter the E-mail address of the destination (up to 320 characters).
Resolution Select a resolution the receiver machine supports.
Paper Size Select a paper size the receiver machine supports.
Compression Type Select a compression type the receiver machine supports.
Limiting Access to Des- Click [Display] to display the current settings for limiting access to destina-
tinations tions.
Specify the access allowed level or reference allowed group required to ac-
cess this destination.

Icon
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Store Address" ö "Address Book" ö
"Icon".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-236

2.62 Settings under "Store Address"
2
Item Description
No. Displays the registration number of the destination.
Name Displays the name of the destination.
Specify Icon Select "Specify Icon".
[Search from List] Click this button to display the list of icons. Select the icon you want to regis-
ter.

2.62.2 Registering a group

Register a new group or change the settings of a registered group.
You can register one or more destinations as a group.
When you want to send (broadcast) the same data to multiple destinations, it is convenient to have those
destinations registered as a group. To register a group, you must register the destinations to be added to the
group in advance.

Group
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Store Address" ö "Group".

Item Description
[New Registration] Click this button to register a new group.
Search by number. Select a range of registration numbers, and then click [Go] to display the list of
destinations in the selected range.
No. Displays the registration number.
Name Displays the registered name.
Edit Click this button to edit the registered group. The available items are the same
as those for registration.
Delete Click this button to delete the group.

Registering a "Group" destination

Item Description
Name Enter the destination name (up to 24 characters).
Scan/Fax Address From the list of destinations in the address book, select the destinations you
want to add to the group.
Check Destination Check registered destinations.
Specify Icon Click [Search from List], and then select an icon for a user you want to register
from the displayed list.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-237

2.62 Settings under "Store Address"
2
Item Description
Limiting Access to Des- Click [Display] to display the current settings for limiting access to destina-
tinations tions.
Specify the access allowed level or reference allowed group required to ac-
cess this destination.

2.62.3 Registering a program destination

Register a new program destination and change settings of the destination.
You can register a combination of address information, communication information, and original information
as a program destination.

Program
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Store Address" ö "Program".

Item Description
Page (Displays 12 at Select a page, and then click [Go] to display the list of destinations on the se-
time) lected page.
[Change Page Name] Change the page name.
No. Displays the registration number.
Name Displays the registered name.
S/MIME Displays whether a certificate is registered with the E-mail address.
[Registration] Register a new program destination.
[Edit] Edit a registered program destination. The available items are the same as
those for registration.
[Delete] Delete the program destination.

Registering "E-mail" destinations

Item Description
No. Displays the registration number.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-238

2.62 Settings under "Store Address"
2
Item Description
Name Enter the destination name (up to 24 characters).
Destination Information Specify the destination.
Select "Select from Address Book" or "Direct Input", and then specify the E-
mail destination.
Resolution Select the resolution used for scanning the original.
File Type Select the file type for saving scanned data.
Outline PDF Select whether to use the outline PDF function when "Compact PDF" is select-
ed in "File Type".
File Name Enter the file name (up to 30 characters).
Scan Setting Select whether to save the whole scanned pages in one file, or to divide a file
into specified number of pages when saving the data.
To use the Page Separation function, enter the number of pages for each file.
If the number of original pages is less than the setting of Page Separation, the
original is saved as one file without being separated.
If Page Separation is specified, one E-mail message is sent for each divided
file. To determine whether to use Page Separation, consider the network or
user load.
Subject Specify the subject of the E-mail message.
If you select "Not Specified", the default subject is used. Click [Subject List] to
view the content.
Text Specify the boxy text of the E-mail message.
If you select "Not Specified", the default body text is used. Click [Text List] to
view the content.
File Attachment Setting Select whether to collectively attach all the divided files to one E-mail to send
them (E-mail size: 200MB or less), or to attach each file to one E-mail to send
it (E-mail size: less than 400MB) when "Page Separation" is selected in "Scan
Setting". When attaching each file to one E-mail, E-mails are sent by the
number of divided files.
Simplex/Duplex Select whether to scan one side or both sides of the original.
You can scan one side of the first page of the original, and then scan both
sides of the remaining pages.
Original Type Select the original quality, such as text or photo.
Color Select a color mode. The file formats for saving data may be limited according
to the color mode you select.
Separate Scan Select whether to divide the original to scan.
Density Select the density.
Background Removal Adjust the density of the background.
Scan Size Select the paper size of the original.
If you select Standard Size, select the size and the feed direction.
If you select Custom Size, specify the height and width.
Application Setting Click [Display] to display the current application setting.
Original Direction Select the orientation of the original.
2-Sided Binding Direc- Select the binding position of the original.
tion
Special Original If the original being sent is a mixed original (original with mixed page sizes), a
Z-folded original (original folded in a zigzag shape), or a long original, select
whichever is relevant.
Book Copy Select whether to perform book copying.
Using the book copy function enables you to divide page spreads (such as a
book or catalog) into left and right pages to be scanned individually.
Erase Select whether to erase frames.
Using the frame erase function enables you to erase unwanted areas around
the original, such as transmission information printed on received faxes and
the shadows of punched holes.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-239

2.62 Settings under "Store Address"
2
Item Description
Compose (Date/Time) Specify whether to print the date and time data.
To print the date and time data, configure the date type, time type, print posi-
tion, fine-tune, color, pages, size, and text type settings.
Compose (Page) Select whether to print page numbers.
To print page numbers, configure the starting page number, starting chapter
number, page number type, print position, fine-tune, color, size, and text type
settings.
Compose (Head- Specify whether to print the header and footer.
er/Footer) To print the header and footer, specify the registration number of the header
and footer.
Click [Confirm Registered Contents] to view the registered headers and foot-
ers.
Compose (Stamp) Select whether to print the stamp.
To print the stamp, configure the stamp type (preset stamp or registered
stamp), print position, fine-tune, color, pages, and size settings.
Click [Confirm Registered Contents] to check the registered stamp. To specify
the registered stamp, you must register the stamp with this machine in ad-
vance.
Stamp Composition Select the combine method for combining elements using "Compose" func-
tions.
You can select whether to insert the element as an image or text.
Limiting Access to Des- Click [Display] to display the current settings for limiting access to destina-
tinations tions.
Specify the access allowed level or reference allowed group required to ac-
cess this destination.

Registering "FTP destinations"

Item Description
No. Displays the registration number.
Name Enter the destination name (up to 24 characters).
Destination Information Specify the destination.
Select "Select from Address Book" or "Direct Input", and specify the FTP des-
tination.
Resolution Select the resolution used for scanning the original.
File Type Select the file type for saving scanned data.
Outline PDF Select whether to use the outline PDF function when "Compact PDF" is select-
ed in "File Type".
File Name Enter the file name (up to 30 characters).
Scan Setting Select whether to save the whole scanned pages in one file, or to divide a file
into specified number of pages when saving the data.
To use the Page Separation function, enter the number of pages for each file.
If the number of original pages is less than the setting of Page Separation, the
original is saved as one file without being separated.
Simplex/Duplex Select whether to scan one side or both sides of the original.
You can scan one side of the first page of the original, and then scan both
sides of the remaining pages.
Original Type Select the original quality, such as text or photo.
Color Select a color mode. The file formats for saving data may be limited according
to the color mode you select.
Separate Scan Select whether to divide the original to scan.
Density Select the density.
Background Removal Adjust the density of the background.
Scan Size Select the paper size of the original.
If you select Standard Size, select the size and the feed direction.
If you select Custom Size, specify the height and width.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-240

2.62 Settings under "Store Address"
2
Item Description
Application Setting Click [Display] to display the current application setting.
E-mail Notification Specify whether to notify via E-mail the destination URL defined for saving
scanned data.
To notify the URL, specify the notification addresses. You can select the ad-
dresses from the list by clicking [Search from List].
2-Sided Binding Direc- Select the binding position of the original.
tion
Original Direction Select the orientation of the original.
Special Original If the original being sent is a mixed original (original with mixed page sizes), a
Z-folded original (original folded in a zigzag shape), or a long original, select
whichever is relevant.
Book Copy Select whether to perform book copying.
Using the book copy function enables you to divide page spreads (such as a
book or catalog) into left and right pages to be scanned individually.
Erase Select whether to erase frames.
Using the frame erase function enables you to erase unwanted areas around
the original, such as transmission information printed on received faxes and
the shadows of punched holes.
Compose (Date/Time) Specify whether to print the date and time data.
To print the date and time data, configure the date type, time type, print posi-
tion, fine-tune, color, pages, size, and text type settings.
Compose (Page) Select whether to print page numbers.
To print page numbers, configure the starting page number, starting chapter
number, page number type, print position, fine-tune, color, size, and text type
settings.
Compose (Head- Specify whether to print the header and footer.
er/Footer) To print the header and footer, specify the registration number of the header
and footer.
Click [Confirm Registered Contents] to view the registered headers and foot-
ers.
Compose (Stamp) Select whether to print the stamp.
To print the stamp, configure the stamp type (preset stamp or registered
stamp), print position, fine-tune, color, pages, and size settings.
Click [Confirm Registered Contents] to check the registered stamp. To specify
the registered stamp, you must register the stamp with this machine in ad-
vance.
Stamp Composition Select the combine method for combining elements using "Compose" func-
tions.
You can select whether to insert the element as an image or text.
Limiting Access to Des- Click [Display] to display the current settings for limiting access to destina-
tinations tions.
Specify the access allowed level or reference allowed group required to ac-
cess this destination.

Registering "SMB destinations"

Item Description
No. Displays the registration number.
Name Enter the destination name (up to 24 characters).
Destination Information Specify the destination.
Select "Select from Address Book" or "Direct Input", and then specify the
SMB address.
Resolution Select the resolution used for scanning the original.
File Type Select the file type for saving scanned data.
Outline PDF Select whether to use the outline PDF function when "Compact PDF" is select-
ed in "File Type".
File Name Enter the file name (up to 30 characters).

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-241

2.62 Settings under "Store Address"
2
Item Description
Scan Setting Select whether to save the whole scanned pages in one file, or to divide a file
into specified number of pages when saving the data.
To use the Page Separation function, enter the number of pages for each file.
If the number of original pages is less than the setting of Page Separation, the
original is saved as one file without being separated.
Simplex/Duplex Select whether to scan one side or both sides of the original.
You can scan one side of the first page of the original, and then scan both
sides of the remaining pages.
Original Type Select the original quality, such as text or photo.
Color Select a color mode. The file formats for saving data may be limited according
to the color mode you select.
Separate Scan Select whether to divide the original to scan.
Density Select the density.
Background Removal Adjust the density of the background.
Scan Size Select the paper size of the original.
If you select Standard Size, select the size and the feed direction.
If you select Custom Size, specify the height and width.
Application Setting Click [Display] to display the current application setting.
E-mail Notification Specify whether to notify via E-mail the destination URL defined for saving
scanned data.
To notify the URL, specify the notification addresses. You can select the ad-
dresses from the list by clicking [Search from List].
Original Direction Select the orientation of the original.
2-Sided Binding Direc- Select the binding position of the original.
tion
Special Original If the original being sent is a mixed original (original with mixed page sizes), a
Z-folded original (original folded in a zigzag shape), or a long original, select
whichever is relevant.
Book Copy Select whether to perform book copying.
Using the book copy function enables you to divide page spreads (such as a
book or catalog) into left and right pages to be scanned individually.
Erase Select whether to erase frames.
Using the frame erase function enables you to erase unwanted areas around
the original, such as transmission information printed on received faxes and
the shadows of punched holes.
Compose (Date/Time) Specify whether to print the date and time data.
To print the date and time data, configure the date type, time type, print posi-
tion, fine-tune, color, pages, size, and text type settings.
Compose (Page) Select whether to print page numbers.
To print page numbers, configure the starting page number, starting chapter
number, page number type, print position, fine-tune, color, size, and text type
settings.
Compose (Head- Specify whether to print the header and footer.
er/Footer) To print the header and footer, specify the registration number of the header
and footer.
Click [Confirm Registered Contents] to view the registered headers and foot-
ers.
Compose (Stamp) Select whether to print the stamp.
To print the stamp, configure the stamp type (preset stamp or registered
stamp), print position, fine-tune, color, pages, and size settings.
Click [Confirm Registered Contents] to check the registered stamp. To specify
the registered stamp, you must register the stamp with this machine in ad-
vance.
Stamp Composition Select the combine method for combining elements using "Compose" func-
tions.
You can select whether to insert the element as an image or text.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-242

2.62 Settings under "Store Address"
2
Item Description
Limiting Access to Des- Click [Display] to display the current settings for limiting access to destina-
tinations tions.
Specify the access allowed level or reference allowed group required to ac-
cess this destination.

Registering "WebDAV destinations"

Item Description
No. Displays the registration number.
Name Enter the destination name (up to 24 characters).
Destination Information Specify the destination.
Select "Select from Address Book" or "Direct Input", and then specify the
WebDAV destination.
Resolution Select the resolution used for scanning the original.
File Type Select the file type for saving scanned data.
Outline PDF Select whether to use the outline PDF function when "Compact PDF" is select-
ed in "File Type".
File Name Enter the file name (up to 30 characters).
Scan Setting Select whether to save the whole scanned pages in one file, or to divide a file
into specified number of pages when saving the data.
To use the Page Separation function, enter the number of pages for each file.
If the number of original pages is less than the setting of Page Separation, the
original is saved as one file without being separated.
Simplex/Duplex Select whether to scan one side or both sides of the original.
You can scan one side of the first page of the original, and then scan both
sides of the remaining pages.
Original Type Select the original quality, such as text or photo.
Color Select a color mode. The file formats for saving data may be limited according
to the color mode you select.
Separate Scan Select whether to divide the original to scan.
Density Select the density.
Background Removal Adjust the density of the background.
Scan Size Select the paper size of the original.
If you select Standard Size, select the size and the feed direction.
If you select Custom Size, specify the height and width.
Application Setting Click [Display] to display the current application setting.
E-mail Notification Specify whether to notify via E-mail the destination URL defined for saving
scanned data.
To notify the URL, specify the notification addresses. You can select the ad-
dresses from the list by clicking [Search from List].
Original Direction Select the orientation of the original.
2-Sided Binding Direc- Select the binding position of the original.
tion
Special Original If the original being sent is a mixed original (original with mixed page sizes), a
Z-folded original (original folded in a zigzag shape), or a long original, select
whichever is relevant.
Book Copy Select whether to perform book copying.
Using the book copy function enables you to divide page spreads (such as a
book or catalog) into left and right pages to be scanned individually.
Erase Select whether to erase frames.
Using the frame erase function enables you to erase unwanted areas around
the original, such as transmission information printed on received faxes and
the shadows of punched holes.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-243

2.62 Settings under "Store Address"
2
Item Description
Compose (Date/Time) Specify whether to print the date and time data.
To print the date and time data, configure the date type, time type, print posi-
tion, fine-tune, color, pages, size, and text type settings.
Compose (Page) Select whether to print page numbers.
To print page numbers, configure the starting page number, starting chapter
number, page number type, print position, fine-tune, color, size, and text type
settings.
Compose (Head- Specify whether to print the header and footer.
er/Footer) To print the header and footer, specify the registration number of the header
and footer.
Click [Confirm Registered Contents] to view the registered headers and foot-
ers.
Compose (Stamp) Select whether to print the stamp.
To print the stamp, configure the stamp type (preset stamp or registered
stamp), print position, fine-tune, color, pages, and size settings.
Click [Confirm Registered Contents] to check the registered stamp. To specify
the registered stamp, you must register the stamp with this machine in ad-
vance.
Stamp Composition Select the combine method for combining elements using "Compose" func-
tions.
You can select whether to insert the element as an image or text.
Limiting Access to Des- Click [Display] to display the current settings for limiting access to destina-
tinations tions.
Specify the access allowed level or reference allowed group required to ac-
cess this destination.

Registering a "User Box destination"

Item Description
No. Displays the registration number.
Name Enter the destination name (up to 24 characters).
Destination Information Specify the destination.
Select "Select from Address Book" or "Direct Input", and then specify the User
Box destination.
Resolution Select the resolution used for scanning the original.
File Type Select the file type for saving scanned data.
Outline PDF Select whether to use the outline PDF function when "Compact PDF" is select-
ed in "File Type".
File Name Enter the file name (up to 30 characters).
Scan Setting Select whether to save the whole scanned pages in one file, or to divide a file
into specified number of pages when saving the data.
To use the Page Separation function, enter the number of pages for each file.
If the number of original pages is less than the setting of Page Separation, the
original is saved as one file without being separated.
Simplex/Duplex Select whether to scan one side or both sides of the original.
You can scan one side of the first page of the original, and then scan both
sides of the remaining pages.
Original Type Select the original quality, such as text or photo.
Color Select a color mode. The file formats for saving data may be limited according
to the color mode you select.
Separate Scan Select whether to divide the original to scan.
Density Select the density.
Background Removal Adjust the density of the background.
Scan Size Select the paper size of the original.
If you select Standard Size, select the size and the feed direction.
If you select Custom Size, specify the height and width.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-244

2.62 Settings under "Store Address"
2
Item Description
Application Setting Click [Display] to display the current application setting.
E-mail Notification Specify whether to notify via E-mail the destination URL defined for saving
scanned data.
To notify the URL, specify the notification addresses. You can select the ad-
dresses from the list by clicking [Search from List].
Original Direction Select the orientation of the original.
2-Sided Binding Direc- Select the binding position of the original.
tion
Special Original If the original being sent is a mixed original (original with mixed page sizes), a
Z-folded original (original folded in a zigzag shape), or a long original, select
whichever is relevant.
Book Copy Select whether to perform book copying.
Using the book copy function enables you to divide page spreads (such as a
book or catalog) into left and right pages to be scanned individually.
Erase Select whether to erase frames.
Using the frame erase function enables you to erase unwanted areas around
the original, such as transmission information printed on received faxes and
the shadows of punched holes.
Compose (Date/Time) Specify whether to print the date and time data.
To print the date and time data, configure the date type, time type, print posi-
tion, fine-tune, color, pages, size, and text type settings.
Compose (Page) Select whether to print page numbers.
To print page numbers, configure the starting page number, starting chapter
number, page number type, print position, fine-tune, color, size, and text type
settings.
Compose (Head- Specify whether to print the header and footer.
er/Footer) To print the header and footer, specify the registration number of the header
and footer.
Click [Confirm Registered Contents] to view the registered headers and foot-
ers.
Compose (Stamp) Select whether to print the stamp.
To print the stamp, configure the stamp type (preset stamp or registered
stamp), print position, fine-tune, color, pages, and size settings.
Click [Confirm Registered Contents] to check the registered stamp. To specify
the registered stamp, you must register the stamp with this machine in ad-
vance.
Stamp Composition Select the combine method for combining elements using "Compose" func-
tions.
You can select whether to insert the element as an image or text.
Limiting Access to Des- Click [Display] to display the current settings for limiting access to destina-
tinations tions.
Specify the access allowed level or reference allowed group required to ac-
cess this destination.

Registering "fax destinations"

Item Description
No. Displays the registration number.
Name Enter the destination name (up to 24 characters).
Destination Information Specify the destination.
Select "Select from Address Book" or "Direct Input", and then specify the fax
destination.
Resolution Select the resolution used for scanning the original.
File Type Select the file type for saving scanned data.
Outline PDF Select whether to use the outline PDF function when "Compact PDF" is select-
ed in "File Type".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-245

2.62 Settings under "Store Address"
2
Item Description
Simplex/Duplex Select whether to scan one side or both sides of the original.
You can scan one side of the first page of the original, and then scan both
sides of the remaining pages.
Original Type Select the original quality, such as text or photo.
Separate Scan Select whether to divide the original to scan.
Density Select the density.
Background Removal Adjust the density of the background.
Scan Size Select the paper size of the original.
If you select Standard Size, select the size and the feed direction.
If you select Custom Size, specify the height and width.
Application Setting Click [Display] to display the current application setting.
Timer TX Select whether to perform timer transmission. To perform timer transmission,
enter the send time.
Password TX Select whether to perform password transmission. To perform password
transmission, enter the password.
F-Code Select whether to use the F code for transmission. To use this function, enter
the SUB address and password.
2-Sided Binding Direc- Select the binding position of the original.
tion
Special Original If the original being sent is a mixed original (original with mixed page sizes), a
Z-folded original (original folded in a zigzag shape), or a long original, select
whichever is relevant.
Book Copy Select whether to perform book copying.
Using the book copy function enables you to divide page spreads (such as a
book or catalog) into left and right pages to be scanned individually.
Erase Select whether to erase frames.
Using the frame erase function enables you to erase unwanted areas around
the original, such as transmission information printed on received faxes and
the shadows of punched holes.
Compose (Date/Time) Specify whether to print the date and time data.
To print the date and time data, configure the date type, time type, print posi-
tion, fine-tune, color, pages, size, and text type settings.
Compose (Page) Select whether to print page numbers.
To print page numbers, configure the starting page number, starting chapter
number, page number type, print position, fine-tune, color, size, and text type
settings.
Compose (Head- Specify whether to print the header and footer.
er/Footer) To print the header and footer, specify the registration number of the header
and footer.
Click [Confirm Registered Contents] to view the registered headers and foot-
ers.
Compose (Stamp) Select whether to print the stamp.
To print the stamp, configure the stamp type (preset stamp or registered
stamp), print position, fine-tune, color, pages, and size settings.
Click [Confirm Registered Contents] to check the registered stamp. To specify
the registered stamp, you must register the stamp with this machine in ad-
vance.
Stamp Composition Select the combine method for combining elements using "Compose" func-
tions.
You can select whether to insert the element as an image or text.
Limiting Access to Des- Click [Display] to display the current settings for limiting access to destina-
tinations tions.
Specify the access allowed level or reference allowed group required to ac-
cess this destination.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-246

2.62 Settings under "Store Address"
2
Registering "IP address fax destinations"

Item Description
No. Displays the registration number.
Name Enter the destination name (up to 24 characters).
Destination Information Specify the destination.
Select "Select from Address Book" or "Direct Input", and then specify the IP
address fax.
Resolution Select the resolution used for scanning the original.
File Type Select the file type for saving scanned data.
Outline PDF Select whether to use the outline PDF function when "Compact PDF" is select-
ed in "File Type".
Simplex/Duplex Select whether to scan one side or both sides of the original.
You can scan one side of the first page of the original, and then scan both
sides of the remaining pages.
Original Type Select the original quality, such as text or photo.
Color Select a color mode. The file formats for saving data may be limited according
to the color mode you select.
Separate Scan Select whether to divide the original to scan.
Density Select the density.
Background Removal Adjust the density of the background.
Scan Size Select the paper size of the original.
If you select Standard Size, select the size and the feed direction.
If you select Custom Size, specify the height and width.
Application Setting Click [Display] to display the current application setting.
2-Sided Binding Direc- Select the binding position of the original.
tion
Special Original If the original being sent is a mixed original (original with mixed page sizes), a
Z-folded original (original folded in a zigzag shape), or a long original, select
whichever is relevant.
Book Copy Select whether to perform book copying.
Using the book copy function enables you to divide page spreads (such as a
book or catalog) into left and right pages to be scanned individually.
Erase Select whether to erase frames.
Using the frame erase function enables you to erase unwanted areas around
the original, such as transmission information printed on received faxes and
the shadows of punched holes.
Compose (Date/Time) Specify whether to print the date and time data.
To print the date and time data, configure the date type, time type, print posi-
tion, fine-tune, color, pages, size, and text type settings.
Compose (Page) Select whether to print page numbers.
To print page numbers, configure the starting page number, starting chapter
number, page number type, print position, fine-tune, color, size, and text type
settings.
Compose (Head- Specify whether to print the header and footer.
er/Footer) To print the header and footer, specify the registration number of the header
and footer.
Click [Confirm Registered Contents] to view the registered headers and foot-
ers.
Compose (Stamp) Select whether to print the stamp.
To print the stamp, configure the stamp type (preset stamp or registered
stamp), print position, fine-tune, color, pages, and size settings.
Click [Confirm Registered Contents] to check the registered stamp. To specify
the registered stamp, you must register the stamp with this machine in ad-
vance.
Stamp Composition Select the combine method for combining elements using "Compose" func-
tions.
You can select whether to insert the element as an image or text.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-247

2.62 Settings under "Store Address"
2
Item Description
Limiting Access to Des- Click [Display] to display the current settings for limiting access to destina-
tinations tions.
Specify the access allowed level or reference allowed group required to ac-
cess this destination.

Registering "Internet fax destinations"

Item Description
No. Displays the registration number.
Name Enter the destination name (up to 24 characters).
Destination Information Specify the destination.
Select "Select from Address Book" or "Direct Input", and then specify the In-
ternet fax destination.
Resolution Select the resolution used for scanning the original.
File Type Select the file type for saving scanned data.
Outline PDF Select whether to use the outline PDF function when "Compact PDF" is select-
ed in "File Type".
Subject Specify the subject of the E-mail message.
If you select "Not Specified", the default subject is used. Click [Subject List] to
view the content.
Text Specify the boxy text of the E-mail message.
If you select "Not Specified", the default body text is used. Click [Text List] to
view the content.
Simplex/Duplex Select whether to scan one side or both sides of the original.
You can scan one side of the first page of the original, and then scan both
sides of the remaining pages.
Original Type Select the original quality, such as text or photo.
Color Select a color mode. The file formats for saving data may be limited according
to the color mode you select.
Separate Scan Select whether to divide the original to scan.
Density Select the density.
Background Removal Adjust the density of the background.
Scan Size Select the paper size of the original.
If you select Standard Size, select the size and the feed direction.
If you select Custom Size, specify the height and width.
Application Setting Click [Display] to display the current application setting.
2-Sided Binding Direc- Select the binding position of the original.
tion
Special Original If the original being sent is a mixed original (original with mixed page sizes), a
Z-folded original (original folded in a zigzag shape), or a long original, select
whichever is relevant.
Book Copy Select whether to perform book copying.
Using the book copy function enables you to divide page spreads (such as a
book or catalog) into left and right pages to be scanned individually.
Erase Select whether to erase frames.
Using the frame erase function enables you to erase unwanted areas around
the original, such as transmission information printed on received faxes and
the shadows of punched holes.
Compose (Date/Time) Specify whether to print the date and time data.
To print the date and time data, configure the date type, time type, print posi-
tion, fine-tune, color, pages, size, and text type settings.
Compose (Page) Select whether to print page numbers.
To print page numbers, configure the starting page number, starting chapter
number, page number type, print position, fine-tune, color, size, and text type
settings.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-248

2.62 Settings under "Store Address"
2
Item Description
Compose (Head- Specify whether to print the header and footer.
er/Footer) To print the header and footer, specify the registration number of the header
and footer.
Click [Confirm Registered Contents] to view the registered headers and foot-
ers.
Compose (Stamp) Select whether to print the stamp.
To print the stamp, configure the stamp type (preset stamp or registered
stamp), print position, fine-tune, color, pages, and size settings.
Click [Confirm Registered Contents] to check the registered stamp. To specify
the registered stamp, you must register the stamp with this machine in ad-
vance.
Stamp Composition Select the combine method for combining elements using "Compose" func-
tions.
You can select whether to insert the element as an image or text.
Limiting Access to Des- Click [Display] to display the current settings for limiting access to destina-
tinations tions.
Specify the access allowed level or reference allowed group required to ac-
cess this destination.

Registering "Group destinations"

Item Description
No. Displays the registration number.
Name Enter the destination name (up to 24 characters).
Destination Information Specify the destination.
Click [Search from List] to select the group to be registered as a program des-
tination.
Click [Check Destination] to check registered destinations.
Resolution Select the resolution used for scanning the original.
File Type Select the file type for saving scanned data.
Outline PDF Select whether to use the outline PDF function when "Compact PDF" is select-
ed in "File Type".
File Name Enter the file name (up to 30 characters).
Scan Setting Select whether to save the whole scanned pages in one file, or to divide a file
into specified number of pages when saving the data.
To use the Page Separation function, enter the number of pages for each file.
If the number of original pages is less than the setting of Page Separation, the
original is saved as one file without being separated.
Subject Specify the subject of the E-mail message.
If you select "Not Specified", the default subject is used. Click [Subject List] to
view the content.
Text Specify the boxy text of the E-mail message.
If you select "Not Specified", the default body text is used. Click [Text List] to
view the content.
File Attachment Setting Select whether to collectively attach all the divided files to one E-mail to send
them (E-mail size: 200MB or less), or to attach each file to one E-mail to send
it (E-mail size: less than 400MB) when "Page Separation" is selected in "Scan
Setting". When attaching each file to one E-mail, E-mails are sent by the
number of divided files.
Simplex/Duplex Select whether to scan one side or both sides of the original.
You can scan one side of the first page of the original, and then scan both
sides of the remaining pages.
Original Type Select the original quality, such as text or photo.
Color Select a color mode. The file formats for saving data may be limited according
to the color mode you select.
Separate Scan Select whether to divide the original to scan.
Density Select the density.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-249

2.62 Settings under "Store Address"
2
Item Description
Background Removal Adjust the density of the background.
Scan Size Select the paper size of the original.
If you select Standard Size, select the size and the feed direction.
If you select Custom Size, specify the height and width.
Application Setting Click [Display] to display the current application setting.
E-mail Notification Specify whether to notify via E-mail the destination URL defined for saving
scanned data.
To notify the URL, specify the notification addresses. You can select the ad-
dresses from the list by clicking [Search from List].
Timer TX Select whether to perform timer transmission. To perform timer transmission,
enter the send time.
Original Direction Select the orientation of the original.
2-Sided Binding Direc- Select the binding position of the original.
tion
Special Original If the original being sent is a mixed original (original with mixed page sizes), a
Z-folded original (original folded in a zigzag shape), or a long original, select
whichever is relevant.
Book Copy Select whether to perform book copying.
Using the book copy function enables you to divide page spreads (such as a
book or catalog) into left and right pages to be scanned individually.
Erase Select whether to erase frames.
Using the frame erase function enables you to erase unwanted areas around
the original, such as transmission information printed on received faxes and
the shadows of punched holes.
Compose (Date/Time) Specify whether to print the date and time data.
To print the date and time data, configure the date type, time type, print posi-
tion, fine-tune, color, pages, size, and text type settings.
Compose (Page) Select whether to print page numbers.
To print page numbers, configure the starting page number, starting chapter
number, page number type, print position, fine-tune, color, size, and text type
settings.
Compose (Head- Specify whether to print the header and footer.
er/Footer) To print the header and footer, specify the registration number of the header
and footer.
Click [Confirm Registered Contents] to view the registered headers and foot-
ers.
Compose (Stamp) Select whether to print the stamp.
To print the stamp, configure the stamp type (preset stamp or registered
stamp), print position, fine-tune, color, pages, and size settings.
Click [Confirm Registered Contents] to check the registered stamp. To specify
the registered stamp, you must register the stamp with this machine in ad-
vance.
Stamp Composition Select the combine method for combining elements using "Compose" func-
tions.
You can select whether to insert the element as an image or text.
Limiting Access to Des- Click [Display] to display the current settings for limiting access to destina-
tinations tions.
Specify the access allowed level or reference allowed group required to ac-
cess this destination.

Registering a "No Destination" entry

Item Description
No. Displays the registration number.
Name Enter the destination name (up to 24 characters).
Resolution Select the resolution used for scanning the original.
File Type Select the file type for saving scanned data.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-250

2.62 Settings under "Store Address"
2
Item Description
Outline PDF Select whether to use the outline PDF function when "Compact PDF" is select-
ed in "File Type".
File Name Enter the file name (up to 30 characters).
Scan Setting Select whether to save the whole scanned pages in one file, or to divide a file
into specified number of pages when saving the data.
To use the Page Separation function, enter the number of pages for each file.
If the number of original pages is less than the setting of Page Separation, the
original is saved as one file without being separated.
Subject Specify the subject of the E-mail message.
If you select "Not Specified", the default subject is used. Click [Subject List] to
view the content.
Text Specify the boxy text of the E-mail message.
If you select "Not Specified", the default body text is used. Click [Text List] to
view the content.
File Attachment Setting Select whether to collectively attach all the divided files to one E-mail to send
them (E-mail size: 200MB or less), or to attach each file to one E-mail to send
it (E-mail size: less than 400MB) when "Page Separation" is selected in "Scan
Setting". When attaching each file to one E-mail, E-mails are sent by the
number of divided files.
Simplex/Duplex Select whether to scan one side or both sides of the original.
You can scan one side of the first page of the original, and then scan both
sides of the remaining pages.
Original Type Select the original quality, such as text or photo.
Color Select a color mode. The file formats for saving data may be limited according
to the color mode you select.
Separate Scan Select whether to divide the original to scan.
Density Select the density.
Background Removal Adjust the density of the background.
Scan Size Select the paper size of the original.
If you select Standard Size, select the size and the feed direction.
If you select Custom Size, specify the height and width.
Application Setting Click [Display] to display the current application setting.
E-mail Notification Specify whether to notify via E-mail the destination URL defined for saving
scanned data.
To notify the URL, specify the notification addresses. You can select the ad-
dresses from the list by clicking [Search from List].
Timer TX Select whether to perform timer transmission. To perform timer transmission,
enter the send time.
Password TX Select whether to perform password transmission. To perform password
transmission, enter the password.
F-Code Select whether to use the F code for transmission. To use this function, enter
the SUB address and password.
Original Direction Select the orientation of the original.
2-Sided Binding Direc- Select the binding position of the original.
tion
Special Original If the original being sent is a mixed original (original with mixed page sizes), a
Z-folded original (original folded in a zigzag shape), or a long original, select
whichever is relevant.
Book Copy Select whether to perform book copying.
Using the book copy function enables you to divide page spreads (such as a
book or catalog) into left and right pages to be scanned individually.
Erase Select whether to erase frames.
Using the frame erase function enables you to erase unwanted areas around
the original, such as transmission information printed on received faxes and
the shadows of punched holes.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-251

2.62 Settings under "Store Address"
2
Item Description
Compose (Date/Time) Specify whether to print the date and time data.
To print the date and time data, configure the date type, time type, print posi-
tion, fine-tune, color, pages, size, and text type settings.
Compose (Page) Select whether to print page numbers.
To print page numbers, configure the starting page number, starting chapter
number, page number type, print position, fine-tune, color, size, and text type
settings.
Compose (Head- Specify whether to print the header and footer.
er/Footer) To print the header and footer, specify the registration number of the header
and footer.
Click [Confirm Registered Contents] to view the registered headers and foot-
ers.
Compose (Stamp) Select whether to print the stamp.
To print the stamp, configure the stamp type (preset stamp or registered
stamp), print position, fine-tune, color, pages, and size settings.
Click [Confirm Registered Contents] to check the registered stamp. To specify
the registered stamp, you must register the stamp with this machine in ad-
vance.
Stamp Composition Select the combine method for combining elements using "Compose" func-
tions.
You can select whether to insert the element as an image or text.
Limiting Access to Des- Click [Display] to display the current settings for limiting access to destina-
tinations tions.
Specify the access allowed level or reference allowed group required to ac-
cess this destination.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-252

2.62 Settings under "Store Address"
2
2.62.4 Registering Temporary One-Touch Destination
The Temporary One-Touch function temporarily registers destinations and the operating procedures of
transmission.
Unlike program destinations, registration information of a temporary one-touch destination is deleted when
transmitting data to the destination registered as a temporary one-touch, or turning off the power of this
machine.
Reference
- You cannot register a temporary one-touch destination when "Security Settings" ö "Security Details"
ö "Manual Destination Input" is set to "Restrict" in the "administrator settings" on the "control panel".

Temporary One-Touch
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Store Address" ö "Temporary One-
Touch".

d Reference
The temporary one-touch destination to be registered is the same as the registered program address.
However, "Registration of Certification Information" and "Limiting Access to Destinations" are not available
for temporary one-touch destinations. For details on registration for temporary one-touch destinations, refer
to page 2-238.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-253

2.62 Settings under "Store Address"
2
2.62.5 Registering the E-mail subject and body
Register the subject and message body used for sending E-mail messages or Internet faxes.

Subject
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Store Address" ö "Subject" ö [Edit].

Item Description
No. Displays the registration number.
Subject Register the subject of the E-mail message (up to 96 bytes).

Text
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Store Address" ö "Text" ö [Edit].

Item Description
No. Displays the registration number.
Text Register the E-mail body (up to 384 bytes).

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-254

2.62 Settings under "Store Address"
2
2.62.6 Using a fax server
To use this machine with fax servers, register applications and servers using the applications.
You can register up to five applications and servers. You can also configure custom items for each registered
application.

Registering applications
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Store Address" ö "Application
Registration" ö [New/Edit].
Reference
- The "Application Registration" menu is displayed when the optional fax kit FK-502 is not installed.
- Only when the optional fax kit FK-502 is not installed, and the Internet fax function is disabled,
registered applications can be displayed and operated from the control panel of this machine.
PageScope Web Connection provides the following templates. Each template provides different custom
items predefined for each application.
For WalkUp Fax

No. Button name Function Name Keyboard Default Val- Option

Type ue
1 Sender Name (CS) Name ASCII Walkup -
2 Fax Number (CS) PersonalFax ASCII - -
Number
3 TEL Number (CS) PersonalVoice ASCII - -
Number
4 Subject Subject ASCII - -
5 Billing Code1 BillingCode1 ASCII - -
6 Billing Code2 BillingCode2 ASCII - -

For Fax with Account

No. Button name Function Name Keyboard Default Val- Option

Type ue
1 User ID ID ASCII Walkup -
2 Sender Name (CS) Name ASCII - -
3 Password Password ASCII - -
4 Password Auth# Authentication - - None
5 Subject Subject ASCII - -
6 Billing Code1 BillingCode1 ASCII - -
7 Billing Code2 BillingCode2 ASCII - -
8 CoverSheet Type CoverSheet - - -
9 Hold For Preview HoldForPreview - - No

For Secure Docs

No. Button name Function Name Keyboard Default Val- Option

Type ue
1 User ID ID ASCII Walkup -
2 Password Password ASCII - -
3 Password Auth# Authentication - - None
4 Delivery Method Delivery - - Secure
5 Subject Subject ASCII - -
6 Billing Code1 BillingCode1 ASCII - -

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-255

2.62 Settings under "Store Address"
2
No. Button name Function Name Keyboard Default Val- Option
Type ue
7 Billing Code2 BillingCode2 ASCII - -
8 CoverSheet Type CoverSheet - - -
9 Document PW DocumentPassword ASCII - -

For Certified Delivery

No. Button name Function Name Keyboard Default Val- Option

Type ue
1 User ID ID ASCII Walkup -
2 Password Password ASCII - -
3 Password Auth# Authentication - - None
4 Delivery Method Delivery - - Secure
5 Subject Subject ASCII - -
6 Billing Code1 BillingCode1 ASCII - -
7 Billing Code2 BillingCode2 ASCII - -
8 CoverSheet Type CoverSheet - - -
9 Document PW DocumentPassword ASCII - -

After selecting the template type, configure the following settings.

Item Description
No. Displays the registration number of the application.
Application Name Enter the application name (up to 16 characters).
Host Address Enter the host address of the server using the application (up to 15 characters).
File Path Enter the destination file path (up to 96 characters).
User ID Enter the user ID used to log in to the server (up to 47 characters).
Password is changed Select this check box to change the password.
Password Enter the password used to log in to the server (up to 31 characters).
anonymous Select whether to enable anonymous access.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-256

2.62 Settings under "Store Address"
2
Item Description
PASV Mode Select whether to enable the PASV mode.
Proxy Select whether to enable the proxy.
Port No. Enter the port number.
[Next] Click this button to display the custom items list. Click [Edit] of the item you
want to add or change. The function setting page is displayed.

Function Setting

Item Description
No. Displays the number of the selected item.
Button name Enter the button name (up to 16 characters).
Function Name Select the function name.
The required setting items differ depending on the selected function.
Message on Panel Enter the name displayed on the control panel (up to 32 characters).
Display Method Select the display method on the control panel.
Default value Enter the default value.
To hide the default value, select the "Input string shown as ****" check box.
The allowable number of characters differ depending on the selected function.
Keyboard Type Select the keyboard type to display on the control panel.
Options Configure options for Authentication.
(when "Authentication"
is selected)
Options (when "Deliv- Configure options for Delivery.
ery" is selected)
Options Configure options for Hold For Preview.
(when "Hold For Pre-
view" is selected)
Input Type Select the time specification.
(when "DelaySendDa-
taTime" is selected)
Default Select whether to display the device time.
(when "DelaySendDa-
taTime" is selected)

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-257

2.62 Settings under "Store Address"
2
2.62.7 Simplifying entering E-mail addresses
Register prefixes and suffixes to simplify entering E-mail addresses.
Registration of domain names and other data in Prefix/Suffix enables you to retrieve registered strings when
entering an E-mail address, allowing the prompt address entry.

Prefix/Suffix
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Store Address" ö "Prefix/Suffix" ö [Edit].

Item Description
No. Displays the registration number.
Prefix Enter a Prefix (up to 20 characters).
Suffix Enter a Suffix (up to 64 characters).

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-258

2.63 Settings under "Fax Settings"
2
2.63 Settings under "Fax Settings"
This section describes other configurable items under "Fax Settings" of PageScope Web Connection.
(Displayed when the optional fax kit is installed.)

d Reference
For details on the fax function, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".

2.63.1 Configuring Header/Footer Position settings

Configure settings to print the sender and the reception information on the fax to the recipient.

Header/Footer Position
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Fax Settings" ö "Header/Footer
Position".

Item Description
Header Position Specify the position of the sender information to be added on a fax document
sent from this machine. The added sender information is printed as a part of
the image on the document received by the recipient.
If you select "OFF", the sender information will not be added.
Print Receiver's Name* Specify the items to be added as the sender information.
If you select "ON", sender name, destination fax number (To: xxxxx), transmis-
sion start date and time, transmission number, and the number of pages are
added as the sender information.
If you select "OFF", sender name, fax ID of this machine, transmission start
date and time, transmission number, and the number of pages are added as
the sender information.
Footer Position Specify the position of the reception information (reception time and reception
number) to be printed on a fax document received by this machine.
If you select "OFF", the reception information will not be printed.

* This item is not displayed for Hong Kong or USA models.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-259

2.63 Settings under "Fax Settings"
2
2.63.2 Configuring settings for telephone and fax lines
Configure settings related to telephone and fax lines including the telephone dialing method, fax receive
mode, and number of incoming calls.

Line Parameter Setting

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Fax Settings" ö "Line Parameter Setting".

Item Description
Dialing Method Select a dialing method.
Improper configuration of the dialing method may hamper a successful phone
call.
Receive Mode Select a receive mode.
If you select "Auto RX", faxes are received automatically.
If you expect frequent phone calls, for example if an external telephone is con-
nected to this machine, set this mode to "Manual RX".
Number of RX Call Specify the number of quasi-ring back tone count between fax arrival and the
Rings start of reception.
Number of Redials Specify the number of automatic redials when this machine cannot connect to
the destination because the line is busy.
Redial Interval Specify the interval of redials for automatic redialing.
TEL/FAX Auto Switch Specify whether to automatically switch telephone and fax when an external
telephone is connected to this machine.
This item is displayed for Taiwan models.
External TEL Calling Specify whether to output the telephone calling monitor sound from this ma-
Monitor Sound chine when an external telephone is connected to this machine.
This item is available when TEL/FAX auto switching is enabled.
External TEL Calling Specify the period from the time an incoming call is received to the time when
Time an external telephone is called when an external telephone is connected to this
machine.
This item is available when TEL/FAX auto switching is enabled.
Line Monitor Sound Specify whether to hear the line sound from the speaker during communica-
tion.
Line Monitor Sound Specify the speaker volume.
Vol.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-260

2.63 Settings under "Fax Settings"
2
2.63.3 Configuring settings to send or receive faxes
Configure settings related to transmission and reception of faxes including file handling at the time of a polling
transmission and printing method at the time of reception of a fax.

TX/RX settings
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Fax Settings" ö "TX/RX Settings".

Item Description
Duplex Print (RX) Select whether to print a received fax on both side of sheets.
Letter/Ledger over Specify whether to use paper in inch-sized paper first when printing received
A4/A3 faxes.
This item is not displayed for Taiwan models.
Print Paper Selection Select the priority order of paper trays used to print received faxes.
If you select "Priority Size", received faxes are printed on paper of the priori-
tized size. If the prioritized size is not specified, received faxes are printed on
paper of the nearest size.
If you select "Fixed Size", receive faxes are always printed on paper of the
specified size.
If "Tray Selection for RX Print" is set to other than "Auto", this item will be set
to "Auto Select".
Print Paper Size Select the size of paper used to print received faxes.
Incorrect User Box No. Select an action to be taken when the unregistered User Box number is spec-
Entry ified when a fax is received by using User Boxes.
Rx from Rejected Fax This item is not available.
No
Tray Selection for RX If you want to fix the paper tray used to print received faxes, select the paper
Print try.
If "Print Paper Selection" is set to other than "Auto Select", this item will be set
to "Auto".
Min. Reduction for RX Specify a reduction ratio of received faxes.
Print When a receive fax does not fit within the standard paper size, this setting is
used to adjust the size.
Print Separate Fax Select whether to divide a received fax into two or more pages when the doc-
Pages ument is larger than the standard paper size.
File After Polling TX Specify whether to delete a file after completing polling transmission of the file.
No. of Sets (RX) If you need two or more sets of a received fax, specify the number of sets.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-261

2.63 Settings under "Fax Settings"
2
Item Description
RX Setting for each Specify whether to receive a fax for each line.
Line This item is available when two optional fax kit FK-502 are installed. This item
is not displayed when "Line 2 Setting" is set to "TX Only" in "Multi Line Set-
tings".
Sender Setting for each Specify whether to register sender information for each line.
Line This item is available when two optional fax kit FK-502 are installed. This item
is not displayed when "Line 2 Setting" is set to "RX Only" in "Multi Line Set-
tings".

2.63.4 Configuring settings for the fax functions

Configure settings related to the fax functions.

Function ON/OFF Setting

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Fax Settings" ö "Function Setting" ö
"Function ON/OFF Setting".

Item Description
F-Code TX Select whether to use the F-code transmission function.
This function sends documents to a specific User Box of a remote machine by
entering the SUB address and the sender ID. To use the F-Code for transmis-
sion, the remote machine must support the F-Code function.
Relay RX Select whether to use this machine as a relay distribution station.
A relay distribution station broadcasts documents received from a relay in-
struction station to the relay distribution destinations.
To use the relay distribution function, you must register a relay User Box.
Relay Printing Specify whether to print relayed documents after the relay distribution.
Destination Check Dis- Select whether to display the list of the specified destinations when sending a
play Function fax.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-262

2.63 Settings under "Fax Settings"
2
Item Description
Confirm Address (TX) Specify whether to require re-entry of a fax destination for confirmation pur-
poses when the user specifies the destination by directly entering the fax
number.
By having the user enter it twice, you can prevent the destination from being
incorrectly entered.
Confirm Address (Reg- Specify whether to require re-entry of a fax destination for confirmation pur-
ister) poses when adding the destination with the address book.
By having the user enter it twice, you can prevent the destination from being
incorrectly entered and registered.

Memory RX Setting
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Fax Settings" ö "Function Setting" ö
"Memory RX Setting".
Reference
- The Memory RX function stores received documents in the Memory RX User Box, and prints them when
required.

Item Description
Fax Line 1 Select whether to perform the forced memory reception via fax line 1.
This item is available when two optional fax kit FK-502 are installed while "RX
Setting for each Line" is set to "ON" in "TX/RX Settings".
Fax Line 2 Select whether to perform the forced memory reception via fax line 2.
This item is available when two optional fax kit FK-502 are installed while "RX
Setting for each Line" is set to "ON" in "TX/RX Settings".
Password is changed. Select this check box to change the password.
Memory RX User Box Enter the password for the Memory RX User Box (up to eight characters).
Password

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-263

2.63 Settings under "Fax Settings"
2
Closed network RX
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Fax Settings" ö "Function Setting" ö
"Closed Network RX".
Reference
- The Closed area Rx function accepts only transmissions from recipient machines with a matching
password. It is available only when the remote machine is one of our models and supports the closed
network reception (with password) function.

Item Description
Password is changed. Select this check box to change the password.
Closed Network RX Enter the password for the closed network reception (four digits).
Password

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-264

2.63 Settings under "Fax Settings"
2
Forward TX Setting
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Fax Settings" ö "Function Setting" ö
"Forward TX Setting".
Reference
- The Forward TX function transfers the received document to a pre-specified destination.
- This function cannot be configured together with "PC-Fax RX Setting", "TSI User Box Setting", or
"Memory RX Setting".
- The Forward TX Setting can be configured for each line when receiving faxes for each line (two optional
fax kit FK-502 are installed while "RX Setting for each Line" is set to "ON" in "TX/RX Settings").

Item Description
Forward TX Setting Specify whether to use the forward transmission function.
Output Method Select an output function.
Select "Forward & Print" to forward received faxes as well as printing them on
this machine.
Select "Forward & Print (If TX Fails)" to print received faxes on this machine if
they cannot be forwarded.
Forward Destination Specify the forward destination of received faxes.
Specify the destination using one of the three methods: "Select from Address
Book", "Select from Group", and "Direct Input".
Line Setting If two fax kit FK-502 are installed, specify the line used to forward received fax-
es.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-265

2.63 Settings under "Fax Settings"
2
Incomplete TX Hold
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Fax Settings" ö "Function Setting" ö
"Incomplete TX Hold".
Reference
- The Fax Retransmit function temporarily saves documents, which were not sent within the specified
number of times for attempts to send, in the fax retransmit User Box. You can use this function to open
the fax retransmit User Box later to manually redial.

Item Description
Incomplete TX Hold Specify whether to temporarily retain the fax that even the auto-redialing func-
tion has failed to send for such reasons as a communications error or the re-
cipient machine being busy, in the Fax Retransmit User Box.
File Storage Duration Specify a duration to retain the file.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-266

2.63 Settings under "Fax Settings"
2
PC-FAX RX Setting
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Fax Settings" ö "Function Setting" ö
"PC-FAX RX Setting".
Reference
- The PC-Fax RX function saves a document received as a fax in a User Box of this machine. You can
print and send saved data. Data is saved in the Memory RX User Box or a specified User Box.
- This function cannot be configured together with "TSI User Box Setting", "Forward TX Setting", or
"Memory RX Setting".
- The PC-Fax RX setting can be configured for each line when receiving faxes for each line (two optional
fax kit FK-502 are installed while "RX Setting for each Line" is set to "ON" in "TX/RX Settings").

Item Description
PC-Fax RX Setting Specify whether to permit receiving PC-FAX.
Receiving User Box Select a receiving User Box destination of PC-FAX.
Destination
Print Specify whether to print received faxes after completing the reception.
Password Check Select this check box to check the password.
Communication Pass- Enter the communication password. (up to eight characters)
word

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-267

2.63 Settings under "Fax Settings"
2
TSI User Box Setting
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Fax Settings" ö "Function Setting" ö
"TSI User Box Setting".
Reference
- The TSI distribution function automatically distributes the document received with the sender fax
number (TSI) to the forwarding destination specified for each sender.
- This function cannot be configured together with "PC-Fax RX Setting", "Forward TX Setting", or
"Memory RX Setting".
- The TSI User Box Setting can be configured for each line when receiving faxes for each line (two
optional fax kit FK-502 are installed while "RX Setting for each Line" is set to "ON" in "TX/RX Settings").

Item Description
TSI User Box Setting Select whether to enable the TSI distribution.
This function distributes received faxes to each phone number based on the
TSI (telephone numbers information) of the fax transmitter.
Action when TSI User Select an action to be taken when receiving unregistered TSI information.
Box is not set. If you select "Automatically Print", the received document is printed. If you se-
lect "Memory RX User Box", the received document is saved in the Memory
RX User Box.
If you select "Specified User Box" and specify a User Box in "Select from User
Box No.", the received document is saved in the specified user box. For the
destination User Box, a Public, Personal, or Group User Box can be specified.
Print Specify whether to print received faxes after completing the reception.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-268

2.63 Settings under "Fax Settings"
2
TSI User Box Registration
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Fax Settings" ö "Function Setting" ö
"TSI User Box Registration" ö [Registration].
Reference
- The forwarding destinations can be registered for each line when receiving faxes for each line (two
optional fax kit FK-502 are installed while "RX Setting for each Line" is set to "ON" in "TX/RX Settings").

Item Description
No. Displays the registration number.
Sender (TSI) Enter the fax ID of the sender (TSI: telephone numbers information).
Forwarding Destination Specify forwarding destinations for each TSI.
Specify the destination using one of the three methods: "Select from Address
Book", "Select from Group", and "Select from User Box No".

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-269

2.63 Settings under "Fax Settings"
2
2.63.5 Configuring PBX connection settings
Configure settings for PBX connection.

PBX Connection Setting

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Fax Settings" ö "PBX Connection
Setting".

Item Description
PBX Connection Set- Select this check box when you connect this machine to a PBX line.
ting
Outside Line Enter the outside line number.
When a fax number registered in the address book or a program destination is
specified as an outside line, the outside line number specified in this setting is
dialed prior to the fax number.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-270

2.63 Settings under "Fax Settings"
2
2.63.6 Configuring settings to print fax reports
Configure settings to print fax reports.

Report Settings
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Fax Settings" ö "Report Settings".

Item Description
Activity Report Select the output method of activity reports.
Output Time Settings When you set the output timing of activity reports to "Daily" or "100/Daily",
specify the report output time.
TX Result Report Select the output conditions for transmission result reports.
Sequential TX Report Specify whether to print sequential transmission reports.
Timer Reservation TX Specify whether to print timer reservation transmission reports.
Report
Confidential RX Report Specify whether to print confidential reception reports.
Bulletin TX Report Specify whether to print Bulletin transmission reports.
Relay TX Result Report Specify whether to print relay transmission result reports.
Relay Request Report Specify whether to print relay request reception reports.
PC-Fax TX Error Report Specify whether to print PC-FAX transmission error reports.
Broadcast Result Re- Select the output method of broadcast result reports.
port
TX Result Report Specify whether to view the transmission result report check pages.
Check

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-271

2.63 Settings under "Fax Settings"
2
Item Description
Remarks Print Setting Configure settings to print remarks for activity reports.
If you select "Normal Print", the line status or sending setting will be printed.
If User Authentication or Account Track is not enabled, the mode is set to
"Normal Print".
If you select "Print User Name", the user name will be printed. This item is
available when User Authentication is enabled.
If you select "Print Account Name", the account name will be printed. This item
is available when Account Track is enabled.
Network Fax RX Error Specify whether to print reception error reports when using the network fax
Report function.
MDN Message Specify whether to print a report when receiving the response to a MDN re-
quest.
DSN Message Specify whether to print a report when receiving the response to a DSN re-
quest.
Print E-mail Message Specify whether to print the message body of an E-mail message received
Body successfully.

2.63.7 Using extension lines

If two fax kit FK-502 are installed, configure settings for the second line.

Multi Line Settings

In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Fax Settings" ö "Multi Line Settings".

Item Description
Line Parameter Setting Configure line parameters for the extension line.
Dialing Method Select a dialing method for the extension line.
Number of RX Call Specify the number of quasi-ring back tone count between fax arrival and the
Rings start of reception.
Line Monitor Sound Specify whether to hear the line sound from the speaker during communica-
tion.
Function Setting Configure settings for the extension line function.
PC-FAX TX Setting Select the line used for PC-FAX transmission.
Multi Line Usage Set- Configure the operation settings of Line 2 (an extension line).
tings

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-272

2.63 Settings under "Fax Settings"
2
Item Description
Line 2 Setting Specify the communication method for Line 2 (an extension line).
You can specify TX Only, RX Only, or TX and RX only for an extension line.
Sender Fax No. Enter the sender Fax number. Usually enter the fax number of the fax machine.
The registered fax number is printed as the sender information on the fax re-
ceived by the recipient.

2.63.8 Registering the Sender Name and Fax ID

You can register the sender name and fax ID of this machine.
Reference
- The sender name can be registered for each line when registering sender information for each line (two
optional fax kit FK-502 are installed while "Sender Setting for each Line" is set to "ON" in "TX/RX
Settings").

Header Information
In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select "Fax Settings" ö "Header Information".

Item Description
Sender Fax No. Enter the fax ID (up to 20 numerals, including #, *, +, and space).
Normally enter the fax number of this machine.
This setting is not required when sending an Internet fax.
For 1 lines: Specify the default sender name to be used for line 1.
Default If the sender name is not specified when sending a fax, the default specified
For 2 lines: in this item is printed on an original.
Line 1 Default

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-273

2.63 Settings under "Fax Settings"
2
Item Description
Line 2 Default Specify the default sender name to be used for line 2.
If the sender name is not specified when sending a fax, the default specified
in this item is printed on an original.
This item is available when two optional fax kit FK-502 are installed while
"Sender Setting for each Line" is set to "ON" in "TX/RX Settings".
Sender Name Displays the registered sender name.
[Edit] Click this button to register or edit the sender name.
[Delete] Click this button to delete the registered sender name.

Edit window

Item Description
No. Displays the registration number.
Sender Name Enter the sender name (up to 30 characters).

Reference
- The header position can be specified as required. If necessary, you can configure settings to prevent
sender information from being printed. For details, refer to page 2-259.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-274

2.64 Using Data Management Utility
2
2.64 Using Data Management Utility
Manage copy protect data, stamp data, or font/macro data from a computer on the network using Data
Management Utility of PageScope Web Connection.

2.64.1 Starting up Data Management Utility

Start up Data Management Utility from the PageScope Web Connection login page.
Reference
- To use Data Management Utility, install Flash Player.
- To manage font or macro data, install Flash Player Ver.9.0 or later using Internet Explorer.
- You cannot start up multiple Data Management Utilities at the same time.

1 In the login page, select the desired Data Management Utility.

2 Enter the administrator password of this machine.

Data Management Utility starts up.

d Reference
For details on "Manage Copy Protect Data", refer to page 2-276.
For details on "Manage Stamp Data", refer to page 2-278.
For details on "Manage Font/Macro", refer to page 2-280.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-275

2.64 Using Data Management Utility
2
2.64.2 Managing copy protect data
Manage copy protect data to be added to this machine.
Copy Protect proves that a document is a copied one by highlighting a character string on the document
when a printed or copied document has been recopied. This function is available when preventing highly
confidential documents from being copied secondarily.
Reference
- You cannot edit or delete copy protect data that is registered in this machine at shipment.

Copy protect list

When "Manage Copy Protect Data" starts up, the registered copy protect data is listed.
(You can register up to eight copy protect data items.)

Item Description
[System] Displays the system page.
In the system page, you can perform screen operations such as Auto Protect
Setting, Export, Import, or Exit.
For details, refer to page 2-277.
Displays the help that is available when managing copy protect data.

[Edit] Displays the copy protect editing screen.

In this page, you can edit the registered copy protect data or register new one.
For details, refer to page 2-277.
[Delete] Deletes the registered copy protect data.
Copy protect data is not displayed in the copy protect list page; however, data
is not actually deleted until it is written to this machine by clicking [Export to
the device]. To cancel data deletion, click [Undo] unless [Export to the device]
is selected.
[Export to the device] Writes copy protect data to this machine.
After newly registering, editing, or deleting copy protect data, click [Export to
the device]. If you do not click [Export to the device], the edited contents are
not updated.
[Undo] Discards the edited contents and return to the previous state.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-276

2.64 Using Data Management Utility
2
System
In the System page, you can perform screen operations such as Auto Protect Setting, Export, Import, or Exit.

Item Description
Auto Protect Setting Displays the window that prohibits operations when the specified time has
elapsed after the user paused operations. This prevents a third person from
handling the system without the user's permission if the user leaves the seat
while displaying the setting page.
To use the Auto Protect function, specify the timeout period ranging from a
time the user paused operations to a time the Auto Protect page appears.
Export Backs up copy protect data defined in this machine in a file.
To export data, click [OK] in the Confirmation screen.
Import Reads copy protect data backed up in a file, and writes its contents to this ma-
chine.
To import data, specify the file to be imported, and click [OK].
If there is copy protect data currently edited, it will be overwritten by the im-
ported copy protect data.
Exit Exits the application.
The Confirmation screen appears. Click [OK].

Edit
Edit copy protect data.
You can specify the text, font, character size and style, and rotation angle required to use Copy Protect. You
can edit data while checking the result in the preview.

Item Description
Copy Protect Name Enter a copy protect name (up to 16 characters).
Copy Protect Text Enter the text to be displayed as copy protect data (up to 32 characters).
Font Name Specify the desired font for copy protect text.
Font Size Specify the desired font size for copy protect text.
Bold Select this check box to specify the bold type for copy protect text.
Italic Select this check box to specify the Italic type for copy protect text.
Rotation Angle Specify the rotation angle for a copy protect text.
You can enter a slider or numeric value to adjust the text rotation angle in 1-
degree steps.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-277

2.64 Using Data Management Utility
2
2.64.3 Managing stamp Data
Manage stamp data to be added to this machine.
You can register or delete a stamp image in this machine.
Reference
- You cannot edit or delete stamp data that is registered in this machine at shipment.

Stamp list
When "Manage Stamp Data" starts up, the registered stamp data is listed.
(You can register up to eight stamp data items.)

Item Description
[System] Displays the system page.
In the system page, you can perform screen operations such as Auto Protect
Setting, Export, Import, or Exit.
For details, refer to page 2-279.
Displays the help to use when managing stamp data.

[Edit] Displays the stamp editing screen.

In this page, you can edit the registered stamp data or register new one.
For details, refer to page 2-279.
[Delete] Deletes the registered stamp data.
Stamp data is not displayed in the stamp list page; however, data is not actu-
ally deleted until it is written to this machine by clicking [Export to the device].
To cancel data deletion, click [Undo] unless [Export to the device] is selected.
[Export to the device] Writes stamp data to this machine.
After newly registering, editing, or deleting stamp data, click [Export to the de-
vice]. If you do not click [Export to the device], the edited contents are not up-
dated.
[Undo] Discards the edited contents and return to the previous state.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-278

2.64 Using Data Management Utility
2
System
In the system page, you can perform screen operations such as Auto Protect Setting, Export, Import, or Exit.

Item Description
Auto Protect Setting Displays the window that prohibits operations when the specified time has
elapsed after the user paused operations. This prevents a third person from
handling the system without the user's permission if the user leaves the seat
while displaying the setting page.
To use the Auto Protect function, specify the timeout period ranging from a
time the user paused operations to a time the Auto Protect page appears.
Export Backs up stamp data defined in this machine in a file.
To export data, click [OK] in the Confirmation screen.
Import Reads stamp data backed up in a file, and writes its contents to this machine.
To import data, specify the file to be imported, and click [OK].
If there is stamp data currently edited, it is overwritten by the imported copy
protect data.
Exit Exits the application.
The Confirmation screen appears. Click [OK].

Edit
Edit stamp data.
You can specify an image and enlargement factor for stamp data. You can edit data while checking the result
in the preview.

Item Description
Stamp Name Enter a stamp name (up to 16 characters).
Stamp image file Click [Scan] to specify a bit map image to be used as a stamp, and click [OK].
Zoom Magnification Specify the enlargement factor of a stamp image.
You can enter a slider or numeric value to adjust the enlargement factor in
steps of 1%.
Preview Enlarges a stamp image. You can check the image details.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-279

2.64 Using Data Management Utility
2
2.64.4 Managing font or macro
Manage font or macro data to be added to this machine.
You can register or delete fonts or macros to or from this machine.
Reference
- To manage font or macro data, install Flash Player Ver.9.0 or later using Internet Explorer.

Font/Macro List
When "Manage Font/Macro" starts up, the registered font or macro data is listed.

Item Description
[System] Displays the system page. In the system page, you can perform screen oper-
ations such as Auto Protect Setting or Exit. For details, refer to page 2-281.
Displays the help that is available when managing font or macro data.

Refreshes the font or macro list.

Font/Macro Toggles the display between the font and macro lists.
No. Displays a font or macro number.
Type Displays a font or macro type.
Destination Displays where the font or macro data is saved.
Name Displays a font or macro name.
ID Displays a font or macro ID number for PCL font or PCL macro.
[Add] Adds new font or macro data.
For details, refer to page 2-281.
[Delete] Deletes the registered font or macro data.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-280

2.64 Using Data Management Utility
2
System
In the system page, you can perform screen operations such as Auto Protect Setting or Exit.

Item Description
Auto Protect Setting Displays the window that prohibits operations when the specified time has
elapsed after the user paused operations. This prevents a third person from
handling the system without the user's permission if the user leaves the seat
while displaying the setting page.
To use the Auto Protect function, specify the timeout period ranging from a
time the user paused operations to a time the Auto Protect page appears.
Exit Exits the application.
The Confirmation screen appears. Click [OK].

Add
Add fonts or macros to this machine.

Item Description
Type Select a type of font or macro to be added.
Destination Select where to save font or macro data.
If data is saved in memory (RAM), it is deleted when this machine has been
turned off. To continuously use font or macro data, save it in the HDD.
ID Enter a font or macro ID number for PCL font or PCL macro.
If it is not entered, the available ID is assigned automatically.
Add File Click [Browse] to specify a font or macro file to be added to this machine.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-281

3 Appendix
3.1 Product specifications (Network functions)
3

3 Appendix

3.1 Product specifications (Network functions)

Item Specification
Type Embedded
Frame type IEEE802.2/802.3/Ethernet II/IEEE802.3SNAP
Cable type 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T
Connector RJ-45
Bluetooth perform- Communication protocol: Bluetooth 2.0 + EDR
ance *1 Supported profile: OPP/BPP/SPP
Main supported proto- TCP/IP (IPv4/IPv6), BOOTP, ARP, ICMP, DHCP, DHCPv6, AutoIP, SLP,
cols SNMP, FTP, LPR/LPD, RAW Socket, SMB over TCP/IP, IPP, HTTP, POP,
SMTP, LDAP, NTP, SSL, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk, Bonjour, NetBEUI, WebDAV,
DPWS, S/MIME, IPsec, DNS, DynamicDNS, LLMNR, LLTD, SSDP, and SOAP.
Supported LDAP Serv- OpenLDAP 2.1x, Active Directory, Exchange 5.5/2000/2003, Sun Java Direc-
ers tory Server (Netscape/iPlanet Directory Server), Novell NetWare 5.x/6.x NDS,
Novell eDirectory 8.6/8.7, and Lotus Domino Server (5.x/6.x)*2.
Supported LDAP pro- LDAP Protocol Version 3 (Version 2 is not supported)
tocol
Supported SSL ver- SSL2, SSL3, and TLS1.0 (An x.509 certificate must be installed on the server.)
sions
Multiprotocol Auto detection
Operating environ- Compatible Web browsers:
ments of PageScope <For Windows NT4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista/Server 2008>
Web Connection • Microsoft Internet Explorer Ver. 6/7/8 (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)
• Netscape Navigator 7.02 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)
• Mozilla Firefox 1.0 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)
<For Macintosh MacOS 9.x/MacOS X>
• Netscape Navigator 7.02 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)
• Mozilla Firefox 1.0 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)
<For Linux>
• Netscape Navigator 7.02 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)
• Mozilla Firefox 1.0 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)
Adobe® Flash® Player:
• Plug-in Ver.7.0 or later required to select Flash as the display format.
• Plug-in Ver.9.0 or later required to use the Data Management Utility
(font/macro data management).
Setting Saved to non-volatile memory

*1
Install the optional local Interface kit EK-605 in this machine.
*2When using the Lotus Domino Server, and setting the search condition to "OR", the function will not work
correctly.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-2

3.2 Displaying the network settings screen (Control panel)
3
3.2 Displaying the network settings screen (Control panel)
This section describes procedures for displaying the network settings menu from the control panel.

1 Press [Utility/Counter].

2 Press [3 Administrator Settings].

% An item can also be selected by pressing the key on the keypad for the correspondent number. For
[3 Administrator Settings], press the [3] key on the keypad.

3 Enter the password, and then press [OK].

The Administrator Settings screen appears.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-3

3.2 Displaying the network settings screen (Control panel)
3
4 Press [5 Network Settings] in the Administrator Settings screen.
The Network Settings screen appears.

NOTICE
To enable network settings you have changed, turn the main power of this machine off and on again.
To turn the main power switch off and on, first turn the main power off, and then on after 10 seconds or more
has elapsed. Not doing so may result in an operation failure.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-4

3.3 Network settings menu list (Control panel)
3
3.3 Network settings menu list (Control panel)
To configure network settings in the control panel of the machine, refer to this menu list.
This section describes the keys displayed when you press [5 Network Settings].

d Reference
For details on displaying the Network Settings screen, refer to page 3-3.

3.3.1 Network Settings screen (1/2)

You can configure the following items in the Network Settings (1/2) screen.

[1]TCP/IP Settings

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level
IPv4 Settings Manual Input IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Auto Input DHCP Settings ON/OFF
BOOTP Settings ON/OFF
ARP/PING Set- ON/OFF
tings
AUTO IP Settings ON/OFF
IPv6 Settings Auto IPv6 Set- ON
tings
OFF Global Address Prefix Length
Gateway Address
Link-Local Address
DHCPv6 Setting ON/OFF
DNS Host DNS Host Name
Dynamic DNS Enable/Disable
Settings
DNS Domain Domain Name Enable/Disable
Auto Retrieval
Search Domain Enable/Disable
Name Auto Re-
trieval
Default DNS Domain Name
DNS Search Domain Name 1 to 3

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-5

3.3 Network settings menu list (Control panel)
3
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level
DNS Server Set- DNS Server Auto Enable/Disable
tings (IPv4) Obtain
Priority DNS Server
Secondary DNS Server 1 and 2
DNS Server Set- DNS Server Auto Enable/Disable
tings (IPv6) Obtain
Priority DNS Server
Secondary DNS Server 1 and 2
IPsec Settings IKE Settings Group 1 to 4
Encryption Algo- DES_CBC
rithm
3DES_CBC
OFF
Authentication Al- MD5
gorithm
SHA-1
OFF
Key Validity Period
Diffie-Hellman Group 1
Group
Group 2
IPsec SA Settings Group 1 to 8 Security Protocol AH
ESP
ESP_AH
OFF
ESP Encryption DES_CBC
Algorithm
3DES_CBC
AES_CBC
AES_CTR
NULL
OFF
ESP Authentica- MD5
tion Algorithm
SHA-1
OFF
AH Authentication MD5
Algorithm
SHA-1
OFF
Lifetime After Establishing SA
Peer Group 1 to 10 Encapsulation Tunnel Mode
Mode
Transport Mode
OFF
IP Address
Pre-Shared Key Text
Perfect Forward ON/OFF
Secrecy
IP Filtering (Permit Enable Set 1 to 5
Access)
Disable

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-6

3.3 Network settings menu list (Control panel)
3
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level
IP Filtering (Deny Enable Set 1 to 5
Access)
Disable
RAW Port Port 1 to 6 Job Setting
Number
Do Not Use
LLMNR Setting Enable/No Limit

[2]NetWare Settings

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level
IPX Settings ON Ethernet Frame Auto Detect
Type
802.2
802.3
Ethernet II
802.3SNAP
OFF
NetWare Print ON PServer Print Server Name
Settings
Print Server Password
Polling Interval
NDS/Bindery Set- NDS
ting
NDS & Bindery
File Server Name
NDS Context Name
NDS Tree Name
Nprinter/ Print Server Name
Rprinter
Printer Number
OFF
Status
User Authentica- ON/OFF
tion Setting (NDS)

[3]HTTP Server Settings

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level
PSWC Settings ON/OFF
IPP Settings ON/OFF
Accept IPP Jobs ON/OFF
Support Informa- Print Job
tion
Valid Job
Cancel Job
Open Job Attributes
Open Job
Open Printer Attributes

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-7

3.3 Network settings menu list (Control panel)
3
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level
Printer Informa- Printer Name
tion
Printer Location
Printer Information
Printer URI
IPP Authentica- ON/OFF
tion Settings
Authentication requesting-user-name
Method
basic
digest
User Name
Password
realm

[4]FTP Settings

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level
FTP TX Settings ON Proxy Server Ad- Input Host Name
dress
IPv4 Address Input
IPv6 Address Input
Proxy Server Port Number
Port No.
Connection Timeout
OFF
FTP Server Set- ON/OFF
tings

[5]SMB Settings

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level
Client Settings ON NTLM Settings v1
v2
v1/v2
User Authentica- ON/OFF
tion (NTLM)
DFS Setting Enable/Invalid
OFF
Print Settings ON NetBIOS Name
Print Service Name
Workgroup
OFF

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-8

3.3 Network settings menu list (Control panel)
3
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level
WINS Settings ON Automatic Re- Enable/Disable
trieval Settings
WINS Server Address
Node Type Set- B Node
ting
P Node
M Node
H Node
OFF
Direct Hosting ON/OFF
Setting

[6]LDAP Settings

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level
Enabling LDAP ON/OFF
Setting Up LDAP LDAP Server Name
Max. Search Results
Timeout
Initial Setting for Name
Search Details
E-mail
Fax Number
Last Name
First Name
City
Company Name
Department
Change Search Name
Attribute
Nickname
Server Address
Search Base
SSL Setting ON/OFF
Port Number
Port Number (SSL)
Certificate Verifi- Expiration Date Confirm/Do Not Confirm
cation Level Set-
tings Key Usage Confirm/Do Not Confirm
Chain Confirm/Do Not Confirm
Expiration Date Confirm/Do Not Confirm
Confirmation
CN Confirm/Do Not Confirm
Authentication Anonymous
Type
Simple
Digest-MD5
GSS-SPNEGO
NTLM v1
NTLM v2

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-9

3.3 Network settings menu list (Control panel)
3
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level
Select Server Au- Use Settings
thentication
Method Use User Authentication
Dynamic Authentication
Referral Setting ON/OFF
Login Name
Password
Domain Name
Reset All Settings
Check Connection
Default LDAP Server Setting

[7]E-mail Settings

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level
E-Mail TX (SMTP) Scan to E-Mail ON/OFF
Status Notifica- ON/OFF
tion
Total Counter No- ON/OFF
tification
SMTP Server Ad- Input Host Name
dress
IPv4 Address Input
IPv6 Address Input
Binary Division ON/OFF
Divided Mail Size
Connection Timeout
Server Capacity
SSL Setting SMTP over SSL
Start TLS
OFF
Port No.
Port Number (SSL)
Certificate Verifi- Expiration Date Confirm/Do Not Confirm
cation Level Set-
tings Key Usage Confirm/Do Not Confirm
Chain Confirm/Do Not Confirm
Expiration Date Confirm/Do Not Confirm
Confirmation
CN Confirm/Do Not Confirm
Detail Settings SMTP Authenti- ON User ID
cation
Password
Domain Name
Authentication
Setting
OFF
POP before SMTP ON/OFF
Authentication
POP Before SMTP Time

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-10

3.3 Network settings menu list (Control panel)
3
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level
E-Mail RX (POP) ON POP Server Ad- Input Host Name
dress
IPv4 Address Input
IPv6 Address Input
Connection Timeout
SSL Setting ON/OFF
Port No.
Port Number (SSL)
Certificate Verifi- Expiration Date Confirm/Do Not
cation Level Set- Confirm
tings
Key Usage Confirm/Do Not
Confirm
Chain Confirm/Do Not
Confirm
Expiration Date Confirm/Do Not
Confirmation Confirm
CN Confirm/Do Not
Confirm
Login Name
Password
APOP Authentica- ON/OFF
tion
Check for New Yes/No
Messages
Polling Interval
OFF
S/MIME Commu- ON Digital Signature Do not add signature
nication Settings
Always add signature
Select when sending
E-Mail Text En- RC2-40
cryption Method
RC2-64
RC2-128
DES
3DES
AES-128
AES-192
AES-256
Print S/MIME In- Yes/No
formation
Automatically Ob- Yes/No
tain Certificates
Certificate Verifi- Expiration Date Confirm/Do Not
cation Level Set- Confirm
tings
Key Usage Confirm/Do Not
Confirm
Chain Confirm/Do Not
Confirm
Expiration Date Confirm/Do Not
Confirmation Confirm
OFF

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-11

3.3 Network settings menu list (Control panel)
3
[8]SNMP Settings

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level
SNMP v1/v2c (IP) ON/OFF
SNMP v3 (IP) ON/OFF
SNMP v1 (IPX) ON/OFF
UDP Port Number
SNMP v1/v2c Read Community Name Settings
Settings
Write Setting Enable/Invalid
Write Community Name Settings
SNMP v3 Settings Context Name Settings
Discovery User ON/OFF
Permissions
Discovery User Name Settings
Read User Name Settings
Security Level OFF
auth-password
auth-password/priv-password
Password Setting Read auth
(Read)
Read priv
Write auth
Write priv
Write User Name Settings
Security Level OFF
auth-password
auth-password/priv-password
Password Setting Read auth
(Write)
Read priv
Write auth
Write priv
Encryption Algo- DES
rithm
AES-128
Authentication Al- MD5
gorithm
SHA-1
TRAP Setting Allow/Restrict
TRAP Setting Enable/Invalid
When Authentica-
tion Failed

[9]AppleTalk Settings

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level
AppleTalk Set- ON Printer Name
tings
Zone Name
Current Zone
OFF

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-12

3.3 Network settings menu list (Control panel)
3
[0]Bonjour Setting

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level
Bonjour Setting ON Bonjour Name
OFF

3.3.2 Network Settings screen (2/2)

You can configure the following items in the Network Settings (2/2) screen.

[1]TCP Socket Settings

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level
TCP Socket ON Use SSL/TLS ON/OFF
Port Number
Port Number (SSL)
OFF

TCP Socket/ (AS- ON Port Number(ASCII Mode)

CII Mode)
OFF

[2]Network Fax Settings

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level
Network Fax IP Address Fax ON/OFF
Function Settings Function
Internet Fax Func- ON/OFF
tion
SMTP TX Settings Port No.
Connection Timeout
SMTP RX Set- ON Port No.
tings
Connection Timeout
OFF

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-13

3.3 Network settings menu list (Control panel)
3
[3]WebDAV Settings

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level
WebDAV Client ON Proxy Server Ad- Input Host Name
Settings dress
IPv4 Address Input
IPv6 Address Input
Proxy Server Port Number
User Name
Password
Chunk Transmis- Yes/No
sion
Connection Timeout
Server Authenti- UTF-8
cation Character
Code Windows Code Page

Certificate Verifi- Expiration Date Confirm/Do Not

cation Level Set- Confirm
tings
Key Usage Confirm/Do Not
Confirm
Chain Confirm/Do Not
Confirm
Expiration Date Confirm/Do Not
Confirmation Confirm
CN Confirm/Do Not
Confirm
OFF
WebDAV Server ON SSL Setting Non-SSL Only
Settings
SSL Only
SSL/Non-SSL
Password Setting Password Setting
Initial Password
OFF

[4]Web Service Settings

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level
Web Service Friendly Name
Common Settings
Publication Serv- Enable/Invalid
ice
SSL Setting ON/OFF
Print Settings ON Printer Name
Printer Location
Printer Information
OFF
Scanner Settings ON Scanner Name
Scanner Location
Scanner Information
Connection Timeout
OFF

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-14

3.3 Network settings menu list (Control panel)
3
[6]SSDP Setting

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level
ON Multi-Cast TTL Setting
OFF

[7]Detail Settings

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level
Device Setting MAC Address
LLTD Setting Enable/Disable
Network Speed Auto Setting
10Mbps Half Duplex
10Mbps Full Duplex
100Mbps Half Duplex
100Mbps Full Duplex
1Gbps Full Duplex
Time Adjustment ON Auto IPv6 Retriev- On/Off
Setting al
NTP Server Set- Input Host Name
ting
IPv4 Address Input
IPv6 Address Input
Port Number
Set Date
Auto Timer Ad- On/Off
justment
Polling Interval
OFF
Status Notifica- Register Notifica- IP Address 1 to 5 Address Input Host Name
tion Setting tion Address
IPv4 Address In-
put
IPv6 Address In-
put
Port Number
Community Name
Notification Items
IPX Address Address Network Address
Node Address
Community Name
Notification Items
E-mail 1 to 10 Edit E-Mail Address
Notification Items

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-15

3.3 Network settings menu list (Control panel)
3
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level
Total Counter No- Notification Schedule 1 and 2 Monthly Monthly Frequen-
tification Settings Schedule Setting cy
Date Setting
Weekly Weekly Frequen-
cy
Day of the Week
Daily Interval of Day(s)
Notification Ad- Address 1 to 3 Edit E-Mail Address
dress Setting
Schedule Settings Schedule 1 and 2
Model Name
Send Now
PING Confirma- PING TX Address Input Host Name
tion
IPv4 Address Input
IPv6 Address Input
Check Connection
SLP Setting Enable/Disable
LPD Setting Enable/Disable
Prefix/Suffix Set- ON/OFF Setting ON/OFF
ting
Prefix/Suffix Set- Prefix
ting
Suffix
Error Code Dis- ON/OFF
play Setting

[8]IEEE802.1X Authentication Settings

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level
ON Auth. Status
Reset Job Settings
Certificate Verifi- Expiration Date Confirm/Do Not Confirm
cation Level Set-
tings CN Confirm/Do Not Confirm
Chain Confirm/Do Not Confirm
OFF

[0]Bluetooth Setting
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level
Enable/No Limit

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-16

3.4 Network Error Codes
3
3.4 Network Error Codes
Function Code Description
IEEE802.1X 1 Connection has already been established.
2 Parameter error.
3 Unable to find the destination AP (SSID).
4 The authentication mode does not match the AP
(IEEE8021X/WPA-EAP/WPA-PSK/NONE).
5 Negotiation of the EAP method failed.
6 The EAP authentication failed (user ID, password, certificate, etc.)
7 Encryption negotiation with the AP failed (TKIP/CCMP).
8 Failed to retrieve the client certificate.
9 The client certificate has expired.
10 Verification error of the server certificate (EAP-TLS/EAP-
TTLS/PEAP).
11 Although the WPA-PSK mode is selected, the Pre-Shared Key is
not specified.
12 An authentication error occurred in the WPA-PSK mode (un-
matched Pre-Shared Key).
13 The phase 2 method is not specified (PEAP).
14 Negotiation of the phase 2 method failed (PEAP).
15 Response from the server has timed out.
16 Failed to allocate memory.
17 Failed to start the supplicant task.
18 The driver does not work.
19 The server certificate has expired (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
20 CA verification error of the server certificate (EAP-TLS/EAP-
TTLS/PEAP).
21 Server ID verification error of the server certificate (EAP-TLS/EAP-
TTLS/PEAP).
22 The CA certificate is not specified (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
23 The server ID is not specified (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
24 The setting combination is correct.
25 Connection and authentication are complete.
26 The server certificate does not have the expected usage (EAP-
TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
27 The server certificate has expired (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
28 Access to the server to check for expiration of the server certifi-
cate is rejected (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
29 Access to the server to check for expiration of the server certifi-
cate has timed out (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
30 Unable to check for expiration because the CRL size that has been
retrieved to check for the expiration of the server certificate ex-
ceeds the maximum capacity that can be retained (1MB) (EAP-
TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
31 Incorrect format of the server certificate (EAP-TLS/EAP-
TTLS/PEAP).
32 Verification of the server certificate is invalid (EAP-TLS/EAP-
TTLS/PEAP).

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-17

3.4 Network Error Codes
3
Function Code Description
33 Although the environment is configured to use the HDD, it is una-
ble to perform verification because the HDD path has not been
specified (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
34 Unable to perform verification because there are too many certifi-
cates to be verified (the maximum number of certificates that can
be verified at a time is 20) (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
35 Parameter error of the certificate (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
36 Internal error of the certificate verification (EAP-TLS/EAP-
TTLS/PEAP).
LDAP 1 An invalid operation occurred.
4 The number of search results has exceeded the maximum number
of items allowed.
7 The LDAP server does not support SASL.
10 Unable to trace the link although Referral is specified.
32 Cannot find the search route.
49 Failed to log in to the LDAP server.
80 An unexpected error occurred.
85 The connection has timed out.
86 The supported SASL does not match the LDAP server side.
88 Cancelled by the user.
90 A memory shortage occurred.
91 Unable to connect to the LDAP server.
92 The supported LDAP version does not match the LDAP server
side.
128 Failed to resolve the LDAP server name using the DNS server.
129 The certificate of the LDAP server has expired.
130 Mutual authentication using GSS-SPNEGO (Kerberos v5) failed.
131 The search result remains.
2238 The CN field of the LDAP server certificate does not match the
server address.
2239 The LDAP server certificate does not have the expected usage for
a server.
2240 The LDAP server certificate is not trusted. To trust the certificate,
the certificate must be registered to the system.
2241 The LDAP server certificate has expired.
2242 The CA server rejected the connection.
2243 The connection to the server that checks for expiration of the cer-
tificate has timed out.
2244 Unable to check for expiration because the CRL size exceeds the
maximum capacity that can be retained (1MB).
2261 The format of the LDAP server certificate is invalid.
2263 Although the environment is configured to use the HDD, it is una-
ble to perform verification because the HDD path has not been
specified.
2264 Unable to perform verification because there are too many certifi-
cates to be verified (the maximum number of certificates that can
be verified at a time is 20).
2266 Internal error of the certificate verification.
2267 The device certificate does not exist.
2268 No certificate is sent from the server.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-18

3.4 Network Error Codes
3
Function Code Description
10000 Failed in authentication using a PKI card.
12236 The ticket certificate has expired.
12239 The ticket certificate does not have the expected usage for a serv-
er.
12240 The ticket certificate is not trusted. To trust the certificate, the cer-
tificate must be registered to the system.
12241 The ticket certificate has expired.
12242 The CA server rejected the connection.
12243 The connection to the server that checks for expiration of the cer-
tificate has timed out.
12244 Unable to check for expiration because the CRL size exceeds the
maximum capacity that can be retained (1MB).
12261 The format of the ticket certificate is invalid.
12263 Although the environment is configured to use the HDD, it is una-
ble to perform validation because the HDD path has not been
specified.
12264 Unable to perform verification because there are too many certifi-
cates to be validated (the maximum number of certificates that
can be verified at a time is 20).
12266 Internal error of the certificate validation.
E-Mail/Internet Fax 1 Failed to log in to the E-mail server.
2 An internal error occurred.
3 Failed to connect to the server.
4 The connection has timed out.
5 Decoding failed due to invalid MIME format or S/MIME format.
6 Available free memory is insufficient. Reception is not possible.
7 Job ID is invalid.
9 Failed to delete an E-mail message.
10 The mail box is full.
11 Failed to search the certificate.
12 Failed to retrieve the device certificate or private key.
13 An I/O error occurred.
An HDD operation error occurred, or memory capacity of the com-
puter may be insufficient.
14 The S/MIME function is disabled.
15 The HDD is disabled.
16 The format of the certificate from the E-mail sender is invalid.
2236 The certificate has expired, or the validity period has not yet start-
ed.
2238 The CN field of the certificate does not match the server address.
2239 The certificate does not have the expected usage.
2240 The certificate is not trusted. To trust the certificate, the certificate
must be registered to the system.
2241 The certificate has expired.
2242 The CA server rejected the connection.
2243 The connection to the server that checks for expiration of the cer-
tificate has timed out.
2244 Unable to check for expiration because the CRL size exceeds the
maximum capacity that can be retained (1MB).

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-19

3.4 Network Error Codes
3
Function Code Description
2261 The format of the certificate is invalid.
2263 Failed to initialize the certificate verification.
2264 Unable to perform verification because there are too many certifi-
cates to be verified (the maximum number of certificates that can
be verified at a time is 20).
2266 Internal error of the certificate verification.
2267 The device certificate does not exist.
2268 No certificate is sent from the server.
FTP transmission 22 Parameter error (e.g. the file name is NULL).
27 Parameter is invalid.
42 The specified protocol is unavailable.
52 The process is cancelled by a device reset.
55 A buffer shortage occurred.
56 The FTP connection is already open.
57 Failed to connect to the server.
60 The connection has timed out.
61 The connection has been interrupted.
62 The device is not connected to the network.
70 The network connection is busy.
450 The file has not been deleted.
451 The file transfer failed (e.g. due to insufficient server capacity).
452 The file transfer failed (e.g. due to insufficient server capacity).
530 Incorrect login name or password.
550 The specified folder does not exist.
552 The file operation failed (e.g. due to insufficient server capacity).
SMB transmission 42 The specified protocol is unavailable.
52 The process is cancelled by a device reset.
55 A buffer shortage occurred.
57 Failed to connect to the server.
62 The device is not connected to the network.
The connection has been interrupted.
70 The network connection is busy.
4096 The host name is not specified.
The specified host name does not exist on the network.
4097 The user name is not specified.
Unable to log in with the specified user name and password.
The user does not have write permission to the folder.
Failed to log in due to an SMB protocol error.
4098 The folder name is not specified.
The specified folder does not exist.
4099 The user name is not specified.
Unable to log in with the specified user name and password.
The user does not have write permission to the folder.
Failed to log in due to an SMB protocol error.
4100 The specified file name is invalid.
4101 The specified file already exists and is write-protected.
The folder and the disk are write-protected.
4102 The specified media to be written is not formatted.
The file system of the specified media to be written is faulty.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-20

3.4 Network Error Codes
3
Function Code Description
4103 The server capacity is full.
4104 The server capacity has become full while writing data.
4105 Other errors to which an error code is not assigned.
10000 Failed in authentication using a PKI card.
12236 The certificate has expired, or the validity period has not yet start-
ed.
12239 The certificate does not have the expected usage.
12240 The certificate is not trusted. To trust the certificate, the certificate
must be registered to the system.
12241 The certificate has expired.
12242 The CA server rejected the connection.
12243 The connection to the server that checks for expiration of the cer-
tificate has timed out.
12244 Unable to check for expiration because the CRL size exceeds the
maximum capacity that can be retained (1MB).
12263 Although the environment is configured to use the HDD, it is una-
ble to perform validation because the HDD path has not been
specified.
12264 Unable to perform verification because there are too many certifi-
cates to be validated (the maximum number of certificates that
can be verified at a time is 20).
12266 Internal error of the certificate validation.
12267 The device certificate does not exist.
12268 No certificate is sent from the server.
SMTP transmission 22 Invalid argument.
27 The file size is too large.
28 Insufficient memory of the device.
32 The pipe is broken.
42 The specified protocol is unavailable.
51 Unable to reach the destination network.
52 The connection aborted by the network.
55 A buffer shortage occurred.
57 The socket is not connected.
58 The connection has been interrupted.
60 The operation has timed out.
61 The connection is rejected.
62 The device is not connected to the network.
67 The host is shut down.
70 The operation is expected to be blocked.
421 SMTP server error. Since the service is unavailable, the transfer
channel is closed.
432 SMTP server error.
The password must be changed.
450 SMTP server error.
Unable to access to the mail box.
451 SMTP server error.
The requested action has been cancelled because an error oc-
curred while processing a job.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-21

3.4 Network Error Codes
3
Function Code Description
452 SMTP server error.
Shortage of the system storage capacity.
453 SMTP server error.
No E-mail massage.
454 SMTP server error.
Temporary authentication failure.
458 SMTP server error.
Unable to queue a message to the node.
459 SMTP server error.
The node is not permitted.
499 SMTP server error.
An unsupported SMTP error code of 400s is received from the
SMTP server.
500 SMTP server error.
Syntax error (command unrecognized).
501 SMTP server error.
Syntax error in parameters or arguments.
502 SMTP server error.
The command is not implemented.
503 SMTP server error.
Bad sequence of commands.
504 SMTP server error.
The command parameter is not implemented.
521 SMTP server error.
The server does not receive E-mail messages.
530 SMTP server error.
The access is rejected.
534 SMTP server error.
The authentication mechanism is too weak.
535 SMTP server error.
Authentication error.
538 SMTP server error.
The requested authentication mechanism requires encryption.
550 SMTP server error.
The requested action is not executed.
551 SMTP server error.
The user is not connected locally.
552 SMTP server error.
The requested E-mail action is cancelled.
553 SMTP server error.
The requested action is not accepted.
554 An SMTP server error, or an internal error when sending data.
The transaction failed.
555 SMTP server error.
MAIL/RCPT parameter error.
599 SMTP server error.
An unsupported SMTP error code of 500s is received from the
SMTP server.
2236 The certificate has expired, or the validity period has not yet start-
ed.
2238 The CN field of the certificate does not match the server address.
2239 The certificate does not have the expected usage.
2240 The certificate is not trusted. To trust the certificate, the certificate
must be registered to the system.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-22

3.4 Network Error Codes
3
Function Code Description
2241 The certificate has expired.
2242 The CA server rejected the connection.
2243 The connection to the server that checks for expiration of the cer-
tificate has timed out.
2244 Unable to check for expiration because the CRL size exceeds the
maximum capacity that can be retained (1MB).
2261 The format of the certificate is invalid.
2263 Failed to initialize the certificate verification.
2264 Unable to perform verification because there are too many certifi-
cates to be verified (the maximum number of certificates that can
be verified at a time is 20).
2266 Internal error of the certificate verification.
2267 The device certificate does not exist.
2268 No certificate is sent from the server.
3000 An unexpected error occurred.
3001 An unexpected error occurred within the library being used.
3002 An invalid channel is specified.
3003 SMTP server address is invalid.
3004 Parameter error (MIMEBodyHeader).
3005 Parameter error (DisplayName).
3006 Parameter error (character set).
3007 Parameter error (From address).
3008 Parameter error (To address).
3009 Parameter error (CC address).
3010 Parameter error (BCC address).
3011 Parameter error (pEmailSet is NULL).
3012 Parameter error (destination certificate is NULL).
3013 Parameter error (E-mail body).
3014 The HDD is disabled.
3015 The S/MIME function is disabled.
3016 The device certificate cannot be used in S/MIME (e.g. self-signed
certificate error, the private key type is not RSA).
3018 An invalid encryption algorithm is specified.
3019 An invalid signature algorithm is specified.
3020 The E-mail address included in the destination certificate does not
match the destination address (To/Cc/Bcc).
3021 The E-mail address included in the certificate does not match the
sender (From) address.
3022 Format error of the certificate.
3023 Parameter error (Disposition-Notification-To).
3024 Message syntax error of the receiver side.
3025 The SMTP server does not support the STARTTLS command.
3026 PKI card access error.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-23

3.4 Network Error Codes
3
Function Code Description
WebDAV transmission 22 The format of the URL of the target resource is invalid. Parameter
error.
27 Attempted to send data that exceeds the maximum transferrable
size for transfer coding.
42 The specified protocol is unavailable.
52 The process is cancelled by a device reset.
55 A buffer shortage occurred.
56 The connection has already been established.
57 The connection to the WebDAV server failed (including connection
time out).
62 The device is not connected to the network.
70 The network connection is busy.
72 The connection has been interrupted with the condition that is in-
sufficient to the specified size.
1001 The server does not support WebDAV.
Unable to upload data to the server.
1002 The intermediate resource is not a collection (directory) (e.g. the
specified folder does not exist).
1003 The target resource is a collection (directory).
1011 Although "https" is specified for the resource URL, it is unavailable
because the SSL library is not included for the modularity.
1012 Although "https" is specified for the resource URL, the connection
is interrupted because the WebDAV server certificate has expired.
1013 The CONNECT method is issued to the proxy server to establish
an SSL connection via a proxy, but it is rejected.
1017 A communication error occurred while sending a request.
1018 A communication error occurred while receiving a response.
1027 nContentLength exceeds the maximum transferable size.
1030 Although use of a proxy has been specified, the proxy setting in-
formation is unavailable.
1031 The connection to the proxy server failed (including connection
time out).
1098 Failed in chunk TX to SharePoint Server.
1099 Other internal error occurred (e.g. memory shortage).
2236 The certificate has expired, or the validity period has not yet start-
ed.
2238 The CN field of the certificate does not match the server address.
2239 The certificate does not have the expected usage.
2240 The certificate is not trusted. To trust the certificate, the certificate
must be registered to the system.
2241 The certificate has expired.
2242 The CA server rejected the connection.
2243 The connection to the server that checks for expiration of the cer-
tificate has timed out.
2244 Unable to check for expiration because the CRL size exceeds the
maximum capacity that can be retained (1MB).
2261 The format of the certificate is invalid.
2263 Failed to initialize the certificate verification.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-24

3.4 Network Error Codes
3
Function Code Description
2264 Unable to perform verification because there are too many certifi-
cates to be verified (the maximum number of certificates that can
be verified at a time is 20).
2266 Internal error of the certificate verification.
2267 The device certificate does not exist.
2268 No certificate is sent from the server.
SMB browsing 32 The connection has been interrupted.
42 The specified protocol is unavailable.
57 Failed to connect to the server.
62 The device is not connected to the network.
The internal channel detected an error immediately before estab-
lishing communication.
67 The host is shut down.
4096 The group name/host name is not specified.
The specified group name/host name does not exist on the net-
work.
4097 The user name is not specified.
Unable to log in with the specified user name and password.
Failed to log in due to an SMB protocol error.
4098 Administrative shares do not exist.
The shared resource name is not specified.
The shared resource does not exist.
4099 The user name is not specified.
Unable to log in with the specified user name and password.
Failed to log in due to an SMB protocol error.
4102 The specified media to be written is not formatted.
The file system of the specified media to be written is faulty.
4105 Other errors to which an error code is not assigned.
4352 The browser machine (master browser/backup browser) is not
found.
4353 Unable to log in to the browser machine (master browser/backup
browser).
4354 The sub folder does not exist.
4355 The request is not accepted due to an invalid call sequence etc.
4368 The number of groups is too large.
4369 The number of host PCs is too large.
4370 The number of shared resources is too large.
10000 Failed in authentication using a PKI card.
12236 The certificate has expired, or the validity period has not yet start-
ed.
12239 The certificate does not have the expected usage.
12240 The certificate is not trusted. To trust the certificate, the certificate
must be registered to the system.
12241 The certificate has expired.
12242 The CA server rejected the connection.
12243 The connection to the server that checks for expiration of the cer-
tificate has timed out.
12244 Unable to check for expiration because the CRL size exceeds the
maximum capacity that can be retained (1MB).
12263 Although the environment is configured to use the HDD, it is una-
ble to perform validation because the HDD path has not been
specified.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-25

3.4 Network Error Codes
3
Function Code Description
12264 Unable to perform verification because there are too many certifi-
cates to be validated (the maximum number of certificates that
can be verified at a time is 20).
12266 Internal error of the certificate validation.
12267 The device certificate does not exist.
12268 No certificate is sent from the server.
User authentication 1 Invalid parameter (e.g. the number of characters exceeds the limit,
blank).
The authentication function setting is disabled.
2 Failed to resolve the name using the DNS server.
3 Unable to find the authentication server.
4 Failed to authenticate.
5 Failed to allocate memory.
An unexpected error occurred (which does not occur under nor-
mal usage conditions).
6 An authentication request is received while an internal task of the
user authentication client is being performed.
7 The connection was interrupted while the user authentication was
being performed.
10000 Failed in authentication using a PKI card.
12236 The certificate has expired, or the validity period has not yet start-
ed.
12239 The certificate does not have the expected usage.
12240 The certificate is not trusted. To trust the certificate, the certificate
must be registered to the system.
12241 The certificate has expired.
12242 The CA server rejected the connection.
12243 The connection to the server that checks for expiration of the cer-
tificate has timed out.
12244 Unable to check for expiration because the CRL size exceeds the
maximum capacity that can be retained (1MB).
12261 The format of the certificate is invalid.
12263 Although the environment is configured to use the HDD, it is una-
ble to perform validation because the HDD path has not been
specified.
12264 Unable to perform validation because there are too many certifi-
cates to be verified (the maximum number of certificates that can
be verified at a time is 20).
12266 Internal error of the certificate validation.
WebDAV client 0 When receiving a response: Successfully received data, but the
response body is missing.
When sending a request: Successfully sent data, and is waiting for
a response to be received.
1 When receiving a response: Successfully received data, and con-
tinuously receives the response body.
When sending a request: Successfully sent data, and is waiting for
an instruction to send the request body.
2 When receiving a response: Successfully received the response
body, and its reception has been completed.
When sending a request: The ID of the client that is not opened is
specified.
3 When receiving a response: The reception has timed out.
When sending a request: An invalid request method has been
specified.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-26

3.4 Network Error Codes
3
Function Code Description
4 When receiving a response: A reception error occurred. Or an
invalid request URL is specified.
When sending a request: An invalid request URL is specified.
5 When receiving a response: Content-Length or the received data
size exceeds the maximum transferable size. Or, the size of the
message body is too large.
When sending a request: The size of the message body is too
large.
6 When receiving a response: The process is cancelled by a reset.
Or, the size of the message body exceeds the maximum transfer-
able size.
When sending a request: The size of the message body exceeds
the maximum transferable size.
7 When receiving a response: An internal error occurred. Or, the
process is cancelled by an internal reset.
When sending a request: The process is cancelled by an internal
reset.
8 Failed to connect to the WebDAV server.
9 An error occurred while sending data to the WebDAV server.
10 A timeout occurred while sending data to the WebDAV server.
11 Failed to connect to the proxy server.
12 The proxy server rejected the connection request.
13 Although use of a proxy has been specified, the proxy setting in-
formation is unavailable.
14 Failed to authenticate the proxy server.
15 Other error was returned from the proxy server.
16 An internal error occurred.
17 The process is cancelled because MIO_REQBODY_ERROR is
specified by the device application.
2236 The certificate has expired, or the validity period has not yet start-
ed.
2238 The CN field of the certificate does not match the server address.
2239 The certificate does not have the expected usage.
2240 The certificate is not trusted. To trust the certificate, the certificate
must be registered to the system.
2241 The certificate has expired.
2242 The CA server rejected the connection.
2243 The connection to the server that checks for expiration of the cer-
tificate has timed out.
2244 Unable to check for expiration because the CRL size exceeds the
maximum capacity that can be retained (1MB).
2261 The format of the certificate is invalid.
2263 Failed to initialize the certificate verification.
2264 Unable to perform verification because there are too many certifi-
cates to be verified (the maximum number of certificates that can
be verified at a time is 20).
2266 Internal error of the certificate verification.
2267 The device certificate does not exist.
2268 No certificate is sent from the server.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-27

3.4 Network Error Codes
3
Function Code Description
WS scan 1 The specified client is not registered.
2 Parameter is invalid.
3 The Web service or WS scan function is disabled.
4 The device is not connected to the network.
5 Waiting for connection from CP.
6 The certificate of the destination computer is not valid when the
validity period of a certificate is checked.
22 Invalid argument.
42 The specified protocol is unavailable.
52 The connection aborted by the network.
53 The connection has been interrupted.
55 A buffer shortage occurred.
57 The socket is not connected.
60 The operation has timed out.
70 The operation is expected to be blocked.
72 The RetrieveImage waiting period has timed out.
2236 The certificate has expired, or the validity period has not yet start-
ed.
2238 The CN field of the certificate does not match the server address.
2239 The certificate does not have the expected usage.
2240 The certificate is not trusted. To trust the certificate, the certificate
must be registered to the system.
2241 The certificate has expired.
2242 The CA server rejected the connection.
2243 The connection to the server that checks for expiration of the cer-
tificate has timed out.
2244 Unable to check for expiration because the CRL size exceeds the
maximum capacity that can be retained (1MB).
2261 The format of the certificate is invalid.
2263 Although the environment is configured to use the HDD, it is una-
ble to perform verification because the HDD path has not been
specified.
2264 Unable to perform verification because there are too many certifi-
cates to be verified (the maximum number of certificates that can
be verified at a time is 20).
2265 Parameter of the certificate verification is invalid.
2266 Internal error of the certificate verification.
2267 The device certificate does not exist.
2268 No certificate is sent from the server.
Bluetooth 0 The reception of the object data specification range has been
completed (not the last data).
1 The reception of the object data specification range has been
completed (the last data).
2 Failed in communication.
3 An error was detected in the peripheral hardware of Bluetooth.
4 Failed to allocate memory.
5 The process has been cancelled by the device.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-28

3.5 Glossary
3
3.5 Glossary
Term Description
10Base-T/ A set of specifications under the Ethernet standards.
100Base-TX/ Those cables that consist of twisted copper wire pairs are used.
1000Base-T The transmission speed of 10Base-T is 10 Mbps, of 100Base-TX is 100 Mbps,
and of 1000Base-T is 1000 Mbps.
2in1 A function to send the original by double-page spread, consolidating two pages
on a sheet.
Abbreviated/address A function to register frequently used fax numbers of recipients. When register-
ing abbreviated/addresses, you should also register the destination name and
the search string, so that you can specify the destination using the search string
to select.
Active Directory A network service provided by Microsoft. Active Directory can centrally manage
all types of information including servers, clients, printers and other hardware re-
sources, as well as properties and access permissions of users on the network.
Adobe® Flash® Software or its file format developed by Adobe Systems Inc. (formerly by Mac-
romedia, Inc.), used to create a content by compiling vector-graphic animations
and sounds. The software allows handling interactive contents using keyboard
or mouse. The files can be kept relatively compact and accessed from a Web
browser with dedicated plug-in software.
Anonymous FTP While FTP sites are usually protected using some account name and password
mechanism, an anonymous FTP system permits anyone to access the FTP site
by simply entering "anonymous" as the account name, without a password.
APOP The acronym for Authenticated Post Office Protocol. While usual POP does not
encrypt the password used for receiving an E-mail, APOP encrypts the pass-
word. This authentication method helps enhance the E-mail security.
AppleTalk The generic name for the protocol suite developed by Apple Computer for com-
puter networking.
Auto IP A function to obtain an IP address automatically. If one fails to get an IP address
via DHCP, the auto IP gets an IP address from the space of "169.254.0.0".
Background adjust- A function to adjust the shading of background color before sending the original.
ment
Batch transmission A function to send documents as one document at a specified time if the docu-
ments have the same transmission conditions such as destination, transmission
time, memory transmission or resolution, and are stored in the same memory.
Baudrate The transmission rate of a modem. This machine can communicate at a high
transmission rate of 33,600bps. When selecting overseas communication mode,
the machine communicates at 7200bps or 4800bps, a rate suitable for noise-re-
sistance.
Binding Position A function to specify the binding position of a double-sided document when it is
sent using ADF. Two types of binding positions are available for a double-sided
original: One is the top/bottom binding with the binding position at the top or
bottom of the original. The other is left/right binding with the binding position at
the left (or right) of the original. Note that the second side of the original has a
different top/bottom relationship.
bit The abbreviation of binary digit. The smallest unit of information (data quantity)
handled by a computer or printer. A bit uses only a 0 or a 1 to indicate data.
Bitmap Font A font using a collection of dots to present characters. Jagged edges are con-
spicuous for the larger Bitmap Font characters.
Bluetooth One of short-range wireless communication technologies used to connect port-
able information devices, which are a few meters apart. This function enables
you to wirelessly connect a laptop computer, PDA, or cellular phone to transfer
voices or data.
BMP The abbreviation for bitmap. It is a file format used to save image data. (The file
extension is ".bmp").
Commonly used on Windows platforms. BMP covers the color depth from mon-
ochrome (2 values) to full color (16,777,216 colors). BMP is basically used to
save images without compression.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-29

3.5 Glossary
3
Term Description
Bonjour A Macintosh network technology, automatically detecting devices connected to
the network and configuring the devices. Previously called "Rendezvous", and
has been changed to "Bonjour" since Mac OS X v10.4.
Book copying A function to separate the front cover, back cover, right pages, and left pages
into individual pages when sending a book or catalog by fax.
BOOTP The abbreviation of BOOTstrap Protocol, which is used for a client computer on
the TCP/IP network to load network configuration automatically from a server.
Instead of BOOTP, DHCP, an advanced protocol based on BOOTP, is typically
used today.
bps The acronym for bit per second, which is a unit of data transmission, indicating
the amount of data transmitted per second.
Brightness Brightness of a display or other screen.
Broadcast A transmission of a single original to multiple recipients in one operation.
Bulletin board A function to post documents to be viewed, or to store the documents to be
transmitted via polling.
Byte A byte indicates a unit of information (data quantity) handled by a computer or
printer. A byte consists of eight bits.
Check Dest. & Send A function to send a fax after comparing the specified fax number with the fax
number information of the recipient (CSI). Only when those numbers match, the
function sends the fax. If the numbers are not matched, a transmission error oc-
curs. Therefore, this prevents misdirected transmissions.
Client A computer using services provided by servers via the network.
Closed Network RX A function to accept only transmissions from recipient machines with a matching
password.
CMYK The acronym for Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black.
The colors in the toner/ink used for color printing. Changing the mixing ratio of
the four CMYK colors enables any type of color to be created.
Color matching A technology for minimizing the difference in colors among different devices
such as scanners, displays and printers.
Compact PDF/XPS A compression method for minimizing the data size using the PDF or XPS format,
used when digitalizing color documents.
Compact PDF allows high compression performance by identifying the text and
image regions and applying the resolution and compression method optimized
for each region.
The compact PDF method can be selected in this machine when using the scan-
ning function to digitalize documents.
Confidential commu- A function used to transmit an original only to specific people who you want to
nication read it. Originals sent via confidential communication are not printed when re-
ceived, and are saved in a confidential box of the recipient's fax machine. The
document can be printed by some specific operation such as entering the ac-
cess code for the confidential box.
Contrast The difference in intensity between the light and dark parts of the image
(light/dark variation). "Low contrast" indicates an image with little light and dark
variation, while "High contrast" an image with large light and dark variation.
CSV The acronym for Comma Separated Values, which is one of the formats used for
saving database or spreadsheet data as a text file. (The file extension is ".csv".)
Data can be shared among different applications by being separated by commas
(as the delimiter).
Default An initial setting. The settings selected in advance and enabled when the ma-
chine is turned on, or the settings selected in advance and enabled when the
function is activated.
Default Gateway A device, such as a computer or router, used as a "gateway" to access comput-
ers on different LANs.
Default value A setting value configured for the machine prior to shipment from the factory.
Some default values can be changed by using the settings menu. It will be con-
venient to set a frequently used value to the default value according to your ap-
plication.
Density The amount of density of an image.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-30

3.5 Glossary
3
Term Description
Density Compensa- A color tone correction function used for output devices such as printers and dis-
tion plays.
DHCP The acronym for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol,
which is used for a client computer on the TCP/IP network to load network con-
figuration automatically from a server.
Just using a DHCP server to centrally manage IP addresses of the DHCP clients
enables you to construct a network without IP address conflicts or other trou-
bles.
Dialing method There are three Dialing methods: PB (push-button dialing), 10PPS (pulse dialing
/10 pps), and 20PPS (pulse dialing /20 pps).
Dither A method of presenting the quasi-shading of gray using black and white colors.
This method is easier to process than error diffusion, but may stir some uneven-
ness on the image.
DNS The acronym for Domain Name System.
DNS allows for obtaining the IP address corresponding to a host name in net-
work environments. This system enables a user to access other computers on
the network by specifying host names instead of elusive and non-intuitive IP ad-
dresses.
DNS Host Name The name of a device on the network.
DPI (dpi) The acronym for Dots Per Inch. A unit of resolution used for printers and scan-
ners.
This indicates the number of dots used to represent an inch.
The higher this value, the higher the resolution.
Driver Software that works as a bridge between a computer and a peripheral device.
DSN The acronym for Delivery Status Notifications, which is a delivery status notifi-
cation message being returned from a receiver to a sender when the E-mail is
delivered to the receiver's mail server.
Dynamic authentica- An authentication method option used when connecting to a LDAP server form
tion (LDAP setting) a multifunctional product. Select this option if you want an user to enter the login
name and password each time the user logs on the LDAP server to refer to des-
tination information.
ECM The acronym for Error Correction Mode.
An error resending method used for G3 communication. ECM checks whether
the data is correctly sent to the destination, and should it be not the case, ECM
resends the same data while maintains the serial communication. If a receiver
also provides the ECM mode, this machine uses the ECM-based communication
with the receiver unless the ECM mode is disabled.
Ethernet LAN transmission line standard
Fax ID An identification code used for the mutual recognition for fax transmission. Usu-
ally the fax number is registered for the fax ID.
F-Code A communication procedure related to the usage of subaddress of T.30* stand-
ardized by ITU-T (international telecommunication union). F code is provided by
Japanese Communications Industrial Corporation. Various kinds of capabilities
are available for the communication among fax machines with the F code func-
tion irrespective of difference of the fax machine brand. This machine uses F
code for the bulletin boards, relay request, confidential communication, and
password transmission. (* a communication standard)
File extension Characters added to a file name for the recognition of the file format. The file ex-
tension is added after a dot of a file name, for example, ".bmp" or ".jpg".
Forced memory re- A function to store received documents in memory, and print them when re-
ception quired.
Frame erase A function of erasing dark shadow around the document before transmitting it
via fax, when scanning a booklet form document or a document with ADF kept
open.
Frame type A type of communication format used in NetWare environments.
For mutual communication, the same frame type is required.
FTP The acronym for File Transfer Protocol, which is used to transfer files via the In-
ternet, intranet or other TCP/IP network.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-31

3.5 Glossary
3
Term Description
G3 A fax communication mode standardized by the ITU-T (International Telecom-
munication Union). G3 and G4 are provided for the communication modes. To-
day, G3 is more widely used than G4.
Gateway Hardware and software used as the point where a network is connected to a net-
work. A gateway also changes data formats, addresses, and protocols accord-
ing to the connected network.
Gradation The shading levels of an image. Larger number of the levels can reproduce
smoother transition of the shading.
Grayscale A form presenting monochrome image by using the gradation information shift-
ing from black to white.
Group The grouping of multiple abbreviation numbers. It will be convenient to use the
group when a volume of serial broadcasts or serial pollings are distributed to the
same destination addresses.
GSS-SPNEGO/ Authentication methods used for logging in to the LDAP server. The different au-
Simple/Digest MD5 thentication method, GSS-SPENEGO, SIMPLE or Digest MD5 is used for a LDAP
server depending on the type of the server being used or server settings.
Halftone A method for presenting the shading of an image by using different sizes of black
and white dots
Hard disk A large capacity storage device for storing data. The data is retained even after
the power is turned off.
HTTP The acronym for HyperText Transfer Protocol, which is used to transmit data be-
tween a Web server and a client (such as a Web browser). HTTP can exchange
files such as images, sounds, and moving pictures that are associated with doc-
uments, including their presentation formats and other information.
ICM The acronym for Image Color Management, which is a color management sys-
tem used for Windows. ICM adjusts the difference of a color caused by different
I/O devices, such as monitors, scanners and printers, and reproduce the color
mostly common to any those devices.
IEEE802.1X A standard used in a wired or wireless LAN to authenticate terminals gaining ac-
cess to the network.
A LAN switch compatible with IEEE802.1X permits a user to connect with the
LAN after authentication (to confirm whether the user is authorized).
Install To install hardware, operating systems, applications, printer drivers on to a com-
puter
Internet Fax A transmission method by which the scanned original data is transmitted among
Internet fax machines and computers as TIFF format E-mail attachments via the
intranet (in-house network) and the Internet.
IP Address An address or a code used to identify individual network devices on the Internet.
IPv4 (Internet Protocol version 4), a protocol widely used today, adopts 32-bit
numeric values of the IP address separated into four sections. An example of the
IP address: 192.168.1.10. On the other hand, IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6),
the next generation protocol, adopts 128-bit of the IP address. The IP address
is assigned to every computer or other device connected to the Internet.
IP Address Fax The IP is an address or code used to identify individual devices on the Internet.
IP Address Fax uses the addresses to send or receive faxes within the intranet.
IPP The acronym for Internet Printing Protocol, which is used to send or receive print
data or control printers via the Internet or other TCP/IP network. IPP can also
send data to be printed to printers in remote areas via the Internet.
IPsec The name of a security technology used for the TCP/IP network. IPsec allows
service with enhanced security by determining the protocol used for the encryp-
tion of transmit packets and for authentication.
IPv6 The acronym for Internet Protocol version 6.
With the number of devices on the Internet increasing, the IPv6 protocol has
been arranged to replace the current IPv4 protocol.
The length of an IP address has been changed to 128 bits and security functions
and other features have been added.
IPX One of the protocols used for NetWare. IPX runs in the network layer of the OSI
reference model.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-32

3.5 Glossary
3
Term Description
IPX/SPX The acronym for Internetwork Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet Exchange,
which is a protocol developed by Novell, Inc., typically used in NetWare environ-
ments.
JPEG The acronym for Joint Photographic Experts Group. It is a file format used to
save image data. (The file extension is ".jpg"). The compression ratio is generally
1/10 to 1/100. JPEG is an effective method to compress photographs and other
natural images.
Kerberos A network authentication system used for Windows 2000 or later, used for Active
Directory authentication. Kerberos arranges an authentic site within the network
to provide two-phase authentication processes of users login and the use of net-
work resources, allowing users to be securely and efficiently authenticated.
LAN The acronym for Local Area Network, which is a network constructed by con-
necting computers on the same floor, in the same building, or in neighboring
buildings.
LDAP The acronym for Lightweight Directory Access Protocol, which is a protocol used
to access a database that can manage E-mail addresses and environmental in-
formation of network users on the Internet, intranet, or other TCP/IP network.
LLMNR The acronym for Link-local Multicast Name Resolution, which is a protocol used
for the name resolution of neighboring computers. LLMNR uses simple ex-
change of request and response messages to perform name resolution of neigh-
boring computers without configuring DNS server or clients.
LLTD The acronym for Link Layer Topology Discovery, which is a technology investi-
gating how the devices on the network are connected. Network devices with this
technology are recognized by Windows Vista/Server 2008 on the network, and
displayed as icons configured on the network map of Windows Vista.
Local printer A printer connected to a parallel or USB port of a computer.
Long original A function to send original pages longer than the standard size. Long size doc-
uments can be sent by selecting this function.
LPD The acronym for Line Printer Daemon, which is a platform-independent printer
protocol running on the TCP/IP network. The protocol was originally developed
for BSD UNIX, and has become one of the printing protocols typically used
among general computers.
LPR/LPD The acronym for Line Printer Request/Line Printer Daemon, which is a printing
method via the network, used for Windows NT or UNIX based systems. It uses
TCP/IP to output printing data from Windows or UNIX to a printer on the network.
MAC address MAC is the acronym for Media Access Control. MAC address is an ID number
unique to each Ethernet card, enabling the cards to send and receive data to and
from each other. A Mac address consists of 48-bit numbers. The first 24 bits are
controlled by IEEE and used to allocate a unique number to each manufacture,
whereas the latter 24 bits are used by each manufacturer to assign a unique
number to each card.
Main Scanning The operation of scanning a document optically, and converting the document
into image data.
Main scanning direc- The horizontal direction for scanning originals.
tion
Manual transmission An operation to send a fax while checking the status of the receiver.
MDN The acronym for Message Disposition Notifications, which is a message sent to
confirm that the mail has been unsealed, a response to a sender when the sender
requests for doing so.
Memory A storage device used for storing data temporarily.
Some types of memory retain data even after the power is turned off, while oth-
ers not.
Memory overflow A condition where the fax memory becomes full while scanned documents or
temporarily stored documents are saved.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-33

3.5 Glossary
3
Term Description
Memory transmission A method used to start a fax transmission after scanning originals and storing
them in memory. If memory transmission is used, the total number of pages are
automatically printed in the page number of the transmission source information
and an image of the first page of the sent document is printed in the transmission
report. However, the memory may become full if the document contains many
pages, or there is a large amount of information due to high image quality.
MH The acronym for Modified Huffman, which is a data compression encoding
method used for fax transmissions. The text-based original is compressed to ap-
proximately one-tenth the original size.
MIB The acronym for Management Information Base, which defines the format of
management information for network devices that are collected using SNMP in
TCP/IP communication. Two types of MIB are provided, that is, the private MIB
specific to each manufacturer and the standardized MIB.
Mixed original A function to set different sizes of originals, detect the size of each original, and
send them accordingly.
MMR The acronym for Modified Modified Read, which is a data compression encod-
ing method used for fax transmissions. Text-based originals are compressed to
approximately 1/20 the original size.
Multi Page TIFF A TIFF file that contains multiple pages.
NDPS The acronym for Novell Distributed Print Services, which provides a high per-
formance printing solution in NDS environments. By using the NDPS as a printer
server, you can output from the desired printer, automatically download the
printer driver of a newly installed printer, simplify and automate complicated
management environments related to printer use, and integrate management re-
lated to the network printer.
NDS The acronym for Novell Directory Services.
It allows the centralized management in an hierarchical structure of shared re-
sources such as servers, printers and users information on the network, as well
as the access privilege and other information related to the users.
NetBEUI The acronym for NetBIOS Extended User Interface, which is a network protocol
developed by IBM. NetBEUI enables you to construct a small-scale network sim-
ply by configuring computer names.
NetBIOS The acronym for Network Basic Input Output System, which is a communication
interface developed by IBM.
NetWare A network operating system developed by Novell, using NetWare IPX/SPX as the
communication protocol.
No. of originals A function used for quick memory transmission with information of the total
number of pages. This allows the recipient to check whether the all pages were
received or not (In case of memory transmission, the total no. of pages are auto-
matically added).
Nprinter/Rprinter A remote printer support module used when using a printer server in NetWare
environments.
Rprinter is used for NetWare 3.x, and Nprinter for NetWare 4.x.
NTLM The acronym for NT LAN Manager, which is a user authentication method used
for Windows NT or later. NTLM encodes password using MD4 or MD5 encoding
method.
NTP The acronym for Network Time Protocol, which is a protocol used to adjust the
computer's internal clock precisely via the network. In a hierarchical method, the
time is adjusted with the server at the highest level using GPS to acquire the cor-
rect time, which is then referenced by each lower level host.
OCR The acronym for Optical Character Reader, which is a device or software that
converts handwritten or printed characters to text data by optically scanning
them and comparing them with previously stored patterns for identification.
OHP/OHT A transparent sheet used for OHP (overhead projector), used for presentations.
OS The acronym for Operating System, which is a base software used to control the
system of a computer. Windows, MacOS, or Unix is an OS.
Outline font A font using lines and curves to display an outline of a character.
Large characters can be displayed on a screen or printed with no jagged edges.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-34

3.5 Glossary
3
Term Description
Overseas communi- This is a function used to communicate with an overseas recipient. If an overseas
cation communication mode is set, the fax is sent with a lower speed. Specifying an
overseas transmission mode ensures the fax transmission when faxing to the lo-
cation where transmission conditions are poor, even within the country.
Password transmis- A function to send a fax with a password. If the recipient's fax machine is set to
sion closed network reception, the sender's fax machine should transmit the same
password as used for the closed network reception.
PASV The acronym for PASsiVe, which is a mode used to connect to an FTP server
from within a firewall. If this mode is not selected, the firewall regards the access
as unauthorized and blocks the connection, disabling any file transmission.
Pause A temporary break in dialing. In this machine, each pause creates a one second
break during dialing.
PB A push telephone line.
PC-FAX A function to send a fax directly from a computer without using paper.
PDF The acronym for Portable Document Format, which is an electronically format-
ted document with file extension of ".pdf". PDF is a PostScript based format, and
can be viewed using Adobe Acrobat Reader, a free viewer software.
PDL The acronym for Page Description Language, which is a language used to indi-
cate print images for each page to a page printer.
Peer-to-peer A type of network allowing connected devices to communicate each other with-
out using a dedicated server.
Pixel the smallest constitutional unit of an image.
Pixel Pixel. the smallest constitutional unit of an image.
Plug-and-play A mechanism of immediately detecting a peripheral device when it is connected
to a computer, and automatically searching an appropriate driver so that the de-
vice becomes operable.
Polling A function available on the receiver's side to request a sender to send originals
set or stored in the sender's machine or memory.
POP Before SMTP A user authentication method used when sending E-mail messages. POP Before
SMTP receives E-mail messages first, then authenticates the user using the POP
server. The IP address, passed through the user authentication by the POP serv-
er, is then permitted to use the SMTP server. This method prevents third parties
without permission to use the mail server from sending mail messages.
POP3 The acronym for Post Office Protocol - Version 3, which is a commonly used
transmission protocol (transmission convention) for the transmission and recep-
tion of E-mail. POP3 has functions including mail box authentication, E-mail
download, list information check, and E-mail deletion.
Port Number A number used to identify the transmission port assigned to each process run-
ning on a computer on the network. The same port cannot be used by multiple
processes.
PostScript A typical page-descriptive language developed by Adobe and is commonly used
for high quality printing.
PPD The acronym for PostScript Printer Description, which is a file with the descrip-
tion of resolution, available paper sizes, and other information specific to a Post-
Script printer model.
PPI The acronym for Pixels Per Inch, which is a unit of resolution used mainly for
monitors or scanners. PPI indicates how many pixels are contained per inch.
Preview A function allowing you to view an image before being processed for printing or
scanning.
Print Job Print request transmitted from a computer to a printing device.
Print queue A software system used for spooler, saving generated print jobs.
Printer buffer A memory area temporarily used for processing data of print jobs.
Printer driver Software that works as a bridge between a computer and a printer.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-35

3.5 Glossary
3
Term Description
Profile A color attribute file
This contains overall input and output correlation data of primary colors, specif-
ically used by the color input and output devices to reproduce colors.
Program address A function to register frequently used destination fax numbers, or stereotyped
transmission operation procedures. By simply pressing a program key, you can
specify the destination, or configure a function automatically to start communi-
cation.
Property Attribute information.
When using a printer driver, you can use its property to configure different func-
tions.
Also by using a file property, you can check the attribute information about the
file.
Protocol A rule enabling a computer to communicate with other computers or peripherals.
Proxy Server A server installed for the connection with the Internet. A proxy server acts as a
proxy of client computers to contact the Internet to ensure security effectively for
the total organization.
PServer A print server module available in Netware environments.
PServer monitors, changes, pauses, restarts, or cancels print jobs.
Queue name A name assigned to each device for allowing printing to the device via network.
Queue name A logical printer name required for LPD/LPR printing.
Quick memory trans- A method used to start sending fax immediately after scanning a page of the
mission original. This method allows even an original with many pages to be sent without
overflowing the memory.
RAW port number A TCP port number used when the RAW protocol is selected for Windows or oth-
er TCP printing. The RAW port number is usually set to 9100.
realm (IPP setting) An area used for allowing security functions. The area is used to organize user
names, passwords and other authentication information, and define the security
policy in the area.
Receiving A fax machine status when it receives a call.
Redial A function to re-dial a fax number after waiting for a specified length of time when
recipient's line is busy. Both manual redial and automatic redial functions are
available.
Reference Allowed A feature for specifying settings so that only certain people are able to view cer-
Level tain destination information for the security of the information. When synchro-
nized with user authentication, only information with an access permission level
matching that specified for the user can be viewed.
Referral setting If no relevant destination data is found on an LDAP server, the LDAP server itself
(LDAP setting) instructs which LDAP server to be searched for the next. The referral setting con-
figures whether the multifunctional product is responsible for searching the next
LDAP server.
Relay broadcast A function to broadcast fax messages via other fax machine (called a relay dis-
tribution station). When you have multiple broadcast destinations in remote
place, you may configure one of the destinations as a relay station to transfer the
broadcast via the relay station, so that you can reduce the total communication
rate.
Relay distribution A feature to broadcast the fax to the relay distribution destination by receiving
station the relay request from the relay instruction station. The relay distribution function
is not available in this machine.
Relay instruction sta- A fax machine sending a relay broadcast request.
tion
Resending A function to select and resend a document that was not send but stored in the
memory. The document can be resent either to the same destination or to an-
other destination.
Resolution Resolution indicates how much details of an object can be reproduced precisely
on an image or a print matter.
RGB The acronym for Red, Green, and Blue.
The RGB are the three primary colors used on monitors and other devices to re-
produce full colors by changing their brightness ratio.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-36

3.5 Glossary
3
Term Description
RIP The acronym for Raster Image Processor, which is a process to extract picture
images from text data created using the PostScript page description language.
The processor is usually integrated into a printer.
S/MIME The acronym for Secure/Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions, which is a pro-
tocol used to add encryption, digital signature, and other features to MIME (E-
mail operations).
Public key method is used for encryption, using a different key for encryption and
decryption.
Samba UNIX server software using SMB (Server Message Block) so that UNIX system
resources can be used from Windows environments.
Scanning The reading of an image in scanner operation by moving aligned image sensors
step by step. The direction of moving image sensors is called the main scanning
direction, and the direction of image sensors alignment is called the sub-scan-
ning direction.
Scanning size A function to specify the scanning size of an original to transmit it. If the width of
the paper in the recipient's fax machine is smaller than that of the transmitted
document, the document will usually be reduced for printing purposes. If you do
not want to reduce the document size, specify the same document size as that
of the paper in the recipient's fax machine, so that you can send the document
with its original size.
Screen font A font used for displaying characters/symbols on a CRT or other monitor.
Screen frequency The density of dots used to create the image.
Sending Sending indicates making a call. For fax, sending indicates sending originals or
dialing for pollings.
Shared printer A printer connected to a server on the network and configured to be used by
multiple computers.
Sharpness A function to enhance the edge of characters before sending the document.
Single-page TIFF A TIFF file that contains only a single page.
SLP An acronym for Service Location Protocol, which is a protocol capable of finding
services on the TCP/IP network, and the automatic configuration of clients.
SMB The acronym for Server Message Block, which is a protocol allowing the share
of files and printers mainly over the Windows network.
SMTP The acronym for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol, which is a protocol used to
transmit or transfer E-mail.
SNMP The acronym for Simple Network Management Protocol, which is a management
protocol in the TCP/IP network environments.
Spool The acronym for Simultaneous Peripheral Operation On-Line, which indicates
that data to be output to a printer is not sent directly to the printer, but is tempo-
rarily stored in another location. The stored data is then sent collectively to the
printer.
SSL/TLS The acronym for Secure Socket Layer/Transport Layer Security, which is an en-
coding method used to transmit data between the Web server and a browser in
a secure manner.
Subnet Mask A value used to divide a TCP/IP network into small networks (subnetworks).
TCP/IP is used to identify how many higher-order bits of the IP address are used
for the network address.
Sub-scanning direc- The vertical direction for scanning originals.
tion
Super G3 (SG3) A G3 communication mode complying with ITU-T V.34. Compared with usual G3
communication, it allows the higher rate transmission (up to 33,400bps).
TCP Socket TCP Socket indicates an API used for the TCP/IP network. This socket is used
to open a transmission route for input or output of usual files.
TCP/IP The acronym for Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol, which is a de
facto standard protocol widely used for the Internet.
The IP address is used to identify each network device.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-37

3.5 Glossary
3
Term Description
Temporary docu- A function to save received documents automatically to memory when the ma-
ment saving chine is unable to print the documents for some reason such as running out of
paper. When a proper action is taken such as refilling of paper, the temporarily
saved document is printed out.
Temporary forward A function to manually forward the received original that is in the standby state
transmission to be output, by using the setting check button on the control panel. The function
must be set while the fax/scan screen is displayed, otherwise the operation will
be halted due to the paper running out or a paper jam.
Thumbnail A function to display the content of an image or document file as a small image
(image displayed when the file is opened).
TIFF The acronym for Tagged Image File Format, It is a file format used to save image
data. (The file extension is ".tif"). By using the "tag" indicating the data type, in-
formation for various image formats can be saved in a single image data.
Timer communica- A function to transmit a fax at the specified time. It reduce costs by transmitting
tion faxes in the late evening or early morning when discount telephone services are
available.
Transmission reser- A function to program the next transmission during transmission or printing.
vation
Transmission source The name of a sender. On the receiver's side, the name is printed as a part of the
name sender's information at the edge of the transmitted original.
Transmission source The transmission time, name, telephone number, page number, and other infor-
record mation on the sender's side printed at the edge of the document on the receiv-
er's side.
Transmission time The time needed to send a fax. The higher the resolution or larger the paper, the
longer the transmission takes.
TrueType A type of outline font, developed by Apple and Microsoft, and currently used as
a standard font for Macintosh and Windows.
The font can be used both for display and printing.
TSI The acronym for Transmitting Subscriber Identification, which is the ID of a fax
transmission terminal.
TWAIN An interface standard defined for between imaging devices including scanners
and digital cameras and applications including graphics software. To use a
TWAIN compatible device, a corresponding TWAIN driver is required.
Uninstallation To delete software installed on a computer
USB The acronym for Universal Serial Bus, which is a general-purpose interface de-
fined for connecting a mouse, printer, and other devices with a computer.
V34 A communication mode used for super G3 fax transmission. Super G3 mode
transmission may not be activated because of a telephone line status where the
receiver's or sender's machine is connected to a telephone line via a private
branch exchange switchboard. If this occurs, the G3 mode should be disabled
by turning V34 off.
Web browser Software used to view Web pages.
Typical Web browsers are Internet Explorer and Netscape Navigator.
Web service Which is a technology useful for detecting a device on the network, using the de-
vice functions or obtaining the device information. Web service comes equipped
with Windows Vista, and is used to detect devices on the network and to perform
printing or scanning via the network.
WINS The acronym for Windows Internet Name Service, which is a service available in
Windows environments, of calling the name server responsible for converting
between a computer name and an IP address.
Z folded original This function first determines the document size that cannot be detected cor-
rectly because of folds, then scans and sends the document after the verifica-
tion. This function is available only when the original is scanned by ADF.
Zone A name used for an AppleTalk network. Zone is used to group multiple devices
on the AppleTalk network.

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-38

4 Index
4.1 Index by item
4

4 Index

4.1 Index by item

A G
Active Directory .......................................................2-137 Group .......................................................... 2-237, 2-249
Address Book ..........................................................2-232
H
Administrative Setting
..................... 2-131, 2-140, 2-144, 2-147, 2-151, 2-154 Header/footer position ............................................2-259
Administrator mode ...................................................2-10 I
Administrator Password ..........................................2-215
IEEE802.1X authentication ......................................2-166
Administrator settings .................................................3-3
Import ......................................................................2-183
Annotation User Box ...............................................2-225
Initialize ....................................................................2-187
APOP Authentication .................................................2-50
Interface ...................................................................2-230
AppleTalk ................................................................2-100
Internet Fax ..................................................... 2-72, 2-78
Assign Account to Acquire Device Info ...................2-231
Internet fax destination ............................................2-236
Automatic logout time .............................................2-214
Internet fax destinations ..........................................2-248
B IP Address Fax ..........................................................2-82
Blank pages .............................................................2-204 IP address fax destination .......................................2-235
Bonjour ......................................................................2-99 IP address fax destinations .....................................2-247
Bulletin Board User Box ..........................................2-224 IP address filtering ...................................................2-157
IPP printing ..................................................... 2-94, 2-97
C IPsec ........................................................................2-162
Certificate ................................... 2-15, 2-22, 2-24, 2-26 IPv6 ..........................................................................2-159
Certificate validation ..........................2-29, 2-169, 2-176
Create System User Box .........................................2-224 L
Create User Box ......................................................2-221 LDAP ............................................................ 2-60, 2-152
LDAP over SSL ............................................. 2-64, 2-154
D License Registration ................................................2-188
Data Management Utility .........................................2-275 List Function Display ...................................................1-6
Date ...........................................................................2-31 LPR printing ...............................................................2-91
Digital Signature ........................................................2-54
Direct print ...............................................................2-231 M
Machine information ................................................2-192
E Main Menu ...................................................................1-7
E-mail body .............................................................2-254 Meter Count ................................................ 2-125, 2-181
E-mail destination ........................................2-233, 2-238 MFP authentication .................................................2-129
E-mail Notification ...................................................2-119
E-mail subject ..........................................................2-254 N
E-mail Transmission (SMTP) .....................................2-43 NDS over IPX/SPX ...................................................2-146
Export ......................................................................2-183 NDS over TCP/IP .....................................................2-149
Extension lines ........................................................2-272 NetWare ...................................................................2-101
External certificates .................................................2-210 Network Error Codes .................................... 2-186, 3-17
Network map ...........................................................2-115
F Network settings ................................................ 3-3, 3-5
Fax ...................................................2-245, 2-261, 2-262 No destination entry ................................................2-250
Fax destination ........................................................2-235 NTLM Authentication ...............................................2-142
Fax reports ..............................................................2-271
Fax server ................................................................2-255 O
Font/macro ..............................................................2-190 OpenAPI ..................................................................2-173
FTP destination .......................................................2-233 P
FTP destinations .....................................................2-240
PageScope Web Connection ......................... 2-8, 2-214
FTP Server ...............................................................2-178
PBX ..........................................................................2-270
FTP TX .......................................................................2-66

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-2

4.1 Index by item
4
PCL print .................................................................2-227 User authentication .................................................2-129
POP before SMTP .....................................................2-47 User Box ..................................................... 2-217, 2-220
POP over SSL ...........................................................2-49 User Box destination .................................. 2-235, 2-244
Port9100 printing .......................................................2-91 User Boxes ..............................................................2-194
Prefix/Suffix .............................................................2-258
W
Print Setting .............................................................2-226
Web Service ............................................................2-112
Program ...................................................................2-238
Web service ................................................ 2-106, 2-110
Protocol .....................................................................2-22
Web Services ...........................................................2-113
PS print ....................................................................2-228
WebDAV destination .................................. 2-234, 2-243
Public key ..................................................................2-57
WebDAV over SSL .....................................................2-70
Public user ...............................................................2-216
WebDAV server .......................................................2-178
R WebDAV transmission ...............................................2-68
Reference allowed ...................................................2-212 WS Print ...................................................................2-106
Relay User Box ........................................................2-224 WS Scan ..................................................................2-110
ROM Version ...........................................................2-182
X
S XPS print ..................................................................2-230
S/MIME ............................................................2-54, 2-57
Scan to Authorized Folder Settings ........................2-218
Scan to E-Mail ...........................................................2-42
Scan to Home ...........................................................2-38
Scan to Me ................................................................2-51
Single Color / 2 Color Output ..................................2-218
Skipping jobs ...........................................................2-204
SMB ...........................................................................2-40
SMB destination ......................................................2-234
SMB destinations ....................................................2-241
SMB Print ..................................................................2-92
SMB TX .....................................................................2-34
SMTP Authentication ................................................2-47
SMTP over SSL .........................................................2-45
SNMP ......................................................................2-116
Specification ................................................................3-2
SSL ....................................................2-15, 2-112, 2-113
Stamp ......................................................................2-202
Start TLS ...................................................................2-45
Status Notification .......................................2-119, 2-122
Store address ..........................................................2-213
Support information ................................................2-193
System User Box ....................................................2-222

T
Tab Function Display ...................................................1-6
TCP Socket .............................................................2-171
TCP/IP .........................................................................2-6
Telephone and fax lines ..........................................2-260
Temporary one-touch destination ...........................2-253
TIFF print .................................................................2-229
Timer .......................................................................2-184
Total Counter Notification .......................................2-125
TRAP Notification ....................................................2-122
TWAIN .......................................................................2-89

U
User Authentication
................................. 2-137, 2-142, 2-146, 2-149, 2-152

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-3

4.2 Index by button
4
4.2 Index by button
A F
Account Track Registration .....................................2-135 Fax TX settings ........................................................2-203
Address Registration ...............................................2-232 font or macro ...........................................................2-280
Administrator Password Setting ..............................2-215 Format All Destination .............................................2-188
AppleTalk Settings ........................................2-100, 3-12 Forward TX Setting ..................................................2-265
Assign Account to Acquire Device Info ...................2-231 FTP Server Settings .................................................2-179
Auto Logout .............................................................2-214 FTP Settings ................................................................3-8
Automatically Obtain Certificates ..............................2-28 FTP transmission setting ...........................................2-66
Function ON/OFF Setting ........................................2-262
B
Basic Setting ...........................................................2-226 G
Black Compression Level ................................2-76, 2-86 General Settings
Blank Page Print Settings .......................................2-204 ..................... 2-129, 2-139, 2-144, 2-147, 2-151, 2-154
Bonjour Setting .........................................................3-13 Get Request Code ...................................................2-189
Bonjour Settings ........................................................2-99 Group .......................................................................2-237

C H
Certificate Verification Level Settings Header Information ....................................................2-75
..............................................................2-29, 2-70, 2-176 Header/Footer Position ...........................................2-259
Certificate Verification Settings Header/Footer Registration .....................................2-202
....... 2-29, 2-46, 2-49, 2-64, 2-70, 2-114, 2-169, 2-176 HTTP Server Settings ..................................................3-7
Client Setting .................................................2-35, 2-145
Closed network RX ..................................................2-264 I
Color/Grayscale Multi-Value Compression Method Icon ..........................................................................2-236
..........................................................................2-77, 2-87 ID & Print Delete Time .............................................2-201
Create System User Box .........................................2-224 IEEE802.1X Authentication Setting ............ 2-167, 2-169
Create User Box ......................................................2-221 IEEE802.1X Authentication Settings ..........................3-16
Creating and installing a self-signed certificate ........2-17 IEEE802.1X Authentication Trial ..............................2-170
I-Fax Advanced Setting .................................. 2-75, 2-80
D IKE ...........................................................................2-163
Default Function Permission ...................................2-140 Import/Export ..........................................................2-183
Delete Secure Print File ...........................................2-195 Importing a certificate ................................................2-20
Delete Time Setting .................................................2-195 Incomplete TX Hold .................................................2-266
Delete Unused User Box .........................................2-194 Install a Certificate .....................................................2-19
Detail Settings ...........................................................3-15 Install License ..........................................................2-189
Device Certificate Setting ..........................................2-16 Interface Setting ......................................................2-230
Device Setting .............................................................2-7 Internet Fax RX Ability ...............................................2-81
Direct Hosting Setting ...............................................2-37 IP Filtering ................................................................2-157
Direct Print Settings ................................................2-231 IPP Authentication Setting ........................................2-96
Document Delete Time Setting ...............................2-196 IPP Setting .................................................................2-95
Document Hold Setting ...........................................2-197 IPsec ........................................................................2-163
E L
Edit Font/Macro ......................................................2-190 LDAP Settings .................................................. 2-61, 3-9
E-mail ........................................................................2-27 Line Parameter Setting ............................................2-260
E-Mail RX (POP) ....................................2-48, 2-49, 2-79 LLMNR Setting ..........................................................2-37
E-mail Settings ..........................................................3-10 LLTD Setting ............................................................2-115
E-mail Transmission (SMTP) LPD ............................................................................2-91
................................................. 2-43, 2-45, 2-120, 2-126
Exporting a certificate ...............................................2-24 M
External Certificate Setting ......................................2-210 Machine Setting .................................. 2-44, 2-74, 2-192
External Memory Function Settings ........................2-199 Manage Copy Protect Data .....................................2-276
External Server Settings Manage Stamp Data ................................................2-278
..................... 2-138, 2-143, 2-146, 2-150, 2-153, 2-154 Manual Setting ..........................................................2-32
Memory RX Setting .................................................2-263
Meter Count .............................................................2-181

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-4

4.2 Index by button
4
Multi Line Settings ...................................................2-272 Subject ....................................................................2-254

N T
NetWare Settings ....... 2-101, 2-116, 2-122, 2-148, 3-7 TCP Socket Settings .................. 2-9, 2-90, 2-172, 3-13
NetWare Status .......................................................2-105 TCP/IP Setting .........................................................2-160
Network Error Code Display Setting .......................2-186 TCP/IP Settings .................................................. 2-6, 3-5
Network Fax Function Settings .......................2-73, 2-83 Text ..........................................................................2-254
Network Fax Settings ................. 2-75, 2-80, 2-86, 3-13 TIFF Setting .............................................................2-229
Network Setting Clear .............................................2-187 Timer Adjustment Setting ..........................................2-33
Network TWAIN .........................................................2-90 Total Counter Notification Setting ...........................2-127
TRAP Settings .........................................................2-123
O TSI User Box Registration .......................................2-269
Open System User Box ...........................................2-222
TSI User Box Setting ...............................................2-268
Open User Box ........................................................2-220
TX/RX settings .........................................................2-261
OpenAPI Setting ......................................................2-175
U
P User Box Operation .................................................2-200
PBX Connection Setting ..........................................2-270
User Registration .....................................................2-133
PC-FAX RX Setting .................................................2-267
User/Account Common Setting ..............................2-218
PCL Setting .............................................................2-227
Peer .........................................................................2-165 W
Power Save Setting .................................................2-184 Web Service Common Settings
Prefix/Suffix .............................................................2-258 ............................................. 2-106, 2-110, 2-112, 2-113
Print Setting ...................................................2-93, 2-107 Web Service Settings ................................................3-14
Program ...................................................................2-238 Web Settings ...............................................................2-8
Protocol setting .........................................................2-23 WebDAV client settings .............................................2-69
PS Setting ...............................................................2-228 WebDAV Server Settings .........................................2-180
Public User ..............................................................2-216 WebDAV Settings ......................................................3-14
Public User Box Setting ..........................................2-217 Weekly Timer Setting ...............................................2-185
WINS Setting .............................................................2-36
R
RAW Port Number .....................................................2-91 X
Register Support Information ..................................2-193 XPS Settings ............................................................2-230
Registering applications ..........................................2-255
Registering reference allowed groups .....................2-212
Removing a Certificate ..............................................2-21
Report Settings .......................................................2-271
Requesting an issuance of certificate .......................2-18
Reset .......................................................................2-187
Restrict User Access ...............................................2-213
ROM Version ...........................................................2-182

S
S/MIME ............................................................2-55, 2-58
SA ............................................................................2-164
Scan to Authorized Folder Settings ........................2-219
Scan to Home Settings .............................................2-39
Scanner Settings .....................................................2-111
Setting up the LDAP server .............................2-62, 2-64
Skip Job Operation Settings ...................................2-204
SLP ............................................................................2-89
SMB Settings ..............................................................3-8
SMTP RX Setting .......................................................2-85
SMTP TX Setting .......................................................2-84
SNMP Settings ..............................................2-117, 3-12
SSDP Settings .........................................................2-174
SSL Setting ...............................................................2-20
Status Notification Setting ..........................2-120, 2-123

bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-5

 http://konicaminolta.com

Copyright
A1DM-9585NA-00 2009 2009.11